Huawei

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01
Product Description
Issue Date 05 2010-11-19
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description
About This Document
About This Document

Intended Audience
The iManager U2000 Product Description describes the position, functional characteristics, system architecture and networking mode of the U2000, appended with standards that the U2000 complies with, and performance indexes. This document provides guides for getting the features and functionalities of the U2000. The intended audiences of this document are: l l l Network Planning Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 05 (2010-11-19)

The fifth release. The fifth release has the following changes: 17.3.19 Manageable OP-Bypass Equipment is added..

The fourth release. The third release has the following changes: This chapter is optimized: 5.2 Security Management.

The third release. The second release has the following changes: 3 Configuration Requirements This chapter is added to describes the software and hardware configuration requirements of the U2000.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document

The second release. Optimize all of this document.

Initial release.
iv
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Positioning and Benefits...........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Position.............................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Network Management Trend.................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Product Orientation................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Product Characteristics....................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Manageable Equipment...................................................................................................................................1-6
2 System Architecture...................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Software Structure...........................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Software Structure of the U2000 Single-Server System........................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Software Structure of the U2000 HA System (Veritas Hot Standby)....................................................2-3 2.2 External Interfaces...........................................................................................................................................2-4 2.2.1 NBI.........................................................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.2 SBI........................................................................................................................................................2-13
3 Configuration Requirements...................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Hardware Configuration of the U2000 Server................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Software Configuration of the U2000 Server.................................................................................................3-3 3.3 Configuration of the U2000 Client..................................................................................................................3-5
4 Networking and Application................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Deployment Mode...........................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Centralized Deployment of a Single-Server System..............................................................................4-3 4.1.2 Centralized Deployment of an HA System............................................................................................4-3 4.2 Networking Mode Between the U2000 and NEs............................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Inband Networking Mode......................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Outband Networking Mode....................................................................................................................4-5 4.3 Application Scenarios of U2000 Management...............................................................................................4-6 4.3.1 Unified Management of Network Products...........................................................................................4-7 4.3.2 Single Metro Solution............................................................................................................................4-9 4.3.3 Single Backhaul Solution.....................................................................................................................4-12 4.3.4 Single Backbone Solution....................................................................................................................4-16 4.3.5 Single FAN Solution............................................................................................................................4-18 Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
Contents
5 Basic Functions...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Overview of Functions and Features...............................................................................................................5-3 5.2 Security Management......................................................................................................................................5-4 5.3 Topology Management................................................................................................................................... 5-9 5.4 Alarm Management.......................................................................................................................................5-15 5.5 Performance Management.............................................................................................................................5-29 5.6 Inventory Management.................................................................................................................................5-34 5.7 Log Management...........................................................................................................................................5-36 5.8 Database Management..................................................................................................................................5-39 5.9 NE Communication Parameter Management................................................................................................5-41 5.10 DCN Management.......................................................................................................................................5-42 5.11 NE Software Management..........................................................................................................................5-42 5.12 Report Management....................................................................................................................................5-43 5.13 System Monitoring......................................................................................................................................5-46
6 MSTP Network Feature Management...................................................................................6-1

6.1 MSTP NE Management..................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 MSTP Protection Subnet Management.........................................................................................................6-10 6.3 E2E MSTP Management...............................................................................................................................6-11 6.4 SDH ASON Management.............................................................................................................................6-16
7 WDM Network Feature Management....................................................................................7-1

7.1 WDM NE Management.................................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.2 WDM NA NE Management..........................................................................................................................7-11 7.3 WDM Protection Subnet Management.........................................................................................................7-20 7.4 End-to-End WDM Management...................................................................................................................7-21 7.5 WDM ASON Management...........................................................................................................................7-24
8 RTN Network Feature Management......................................................................................8-1

8.1 RTN NE Management.....................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 RTN Protection Subnet Management...........................................................................................................8-10 8.3 End-to-End RTN Management.....................................................................................................................8-11
9 PTN Network Feature Management.......................................................................................9-1

9.1 PTN NE Management.....................................................................................................................................9-2 9.2 E2E PTN Management..................................................................................................................................9-19
10 Router Feature and Switch Feature Management............................................................10-1

10.1 Router Management....................................................................................................................................10-3 10.2 Router V8 Management..............................................................................................................................10-6 10.3 Automatic NE Configuration Management................................................................................................10-7 10.4 Switch Management....................................................................................................................................10-8 10.5 Template Management..............................................................................................................................10-13 10.6 Diagnosis Management.............................................................................................................................10-14 10.7 Cluster Management.................................................................................................................................10-16 vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Contents
10.8 Node Redounded Management.................................................................................................................10-17 10.9 Report Subsystem Management................................................................................................................10-18 10.10 VPN Service Management......................................................................................................................10-18 10.11 Tunnel Service Management...................................................................................................................10-20
11 Feature Management for Security Devices ......................................................................11-1

11.1 Security Device Management.....................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 Single-Point Web Configuration for Security Devices...............................................................................11-2 11.3 Centralized Security Policy Configuration.................................................................................................11-3 11.3.1 Policy Package Management.............................................................................................................11-4 11.3.2 Security Policy Configuration............................................................................................................11-4 11.3.3 Attack Defense Configuration............................................................................................................11-5 11.3.4 Policy Resource Configuration..........................................................................................................11-5 11.3.5 Mapping Service................................................................................................................................11-6 11.4 Report Subsystem Management..................................................................................................................11-6 11.5 VPN Service Management..........................................................................................................................11-6 11.5.1 IPSec End-to-End Service..................................................................................................................11-7 11.5.2 Remote Access Service......................................................................................................................11-7
12 FTTx Network Feature Management.................................................................................12-1

12.1 OLT Management.......................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2 ONU Management....................................................................................................................................12-12
13 MSAN Network Feature Management..............................................................................13-1

13.1 MSAN Management...................................................................................................................................13-2
14 DSLAM Network Feature Management............................................................................14-1

14.1 DSLAM Management.................................................................................................................................14-2
15 Reliability................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1 Reliability Design........................................................................................................................................15-2 15.2 Reliability Indicator.....................................................................................................................................15-3 15.3 HA System..................................................................................................................................................15-3 15.4 DCN Protection...........................................................................................................................................15-4 15.5 Disk Mirroring.............................................................................................................................................15-5 15.6 Data Backup................................................................................................................................................15-5
16 Performance Indicators.........................................................................................................16-1 17 Management Capability.......................................................................................................17-1

17.1 NE Equivalent Coefficient..........................................................................................................................17-2 17.1.1 Equivalent NEs in the Transport Domain..........................................................................................17-3 17.1.2 Equivalent NEs in the IP Domain......................................................................................................17-6 17.1.3 Equivalent NEs in the Access Domain..............................................................................................17-9 17.2 Management Capabilities of the U2000 on Different Hardware Platforms..............................................17-10 17.3 Manageable Equipment.............................................................................................................................17-14 17.3.1 Manageable MSTP Series Equipment..............................................................................................17-15 Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description 17.3.2 Manageable WDM Series Equipment..............................................................................................17-16 17.3.3 Manageable NA WDM Series Equipment.......................................................................................17-18 17.3.4 Manageable Submarine Line Equipment.........................................................................................17-19 17.3.5 Manageable RTN Series Equipment................................................................................................17-19 17.3.6 Manageable PTN Series Equipment................................................................................................17-19 17.3.7 Manageable FTTx Series Equipment...............................................................................................17-20 17.3.8 Manageable MSAN Series Equipment............................................................................................17-22 17.3.9 Manageable DSLAM Series Equipment..........................................................................................17-23 17.3.10 Manageable Router Series Equipment...........................................................................................17-23 17.3.11 Manageable Switch Series Equipment...........................................................................................17-24 17.3.12 Manageable Metro Service Platform Equipment...........................................................................17-26 17.3.13 Manageable Broadband Access Series Equipment........................................................................17-26 17.3.14 Manageable VoIP Gateway Equipment.........................................................................................17-26 17.3.15 Manageable WLAN Series equipment...........................................................................................17-27 17.3.16 Manageable Firewall Series Equipment.........................................................................................17-27 17.3.17 Manageable DPI Equipment..........................................................................................................17-31 17.3.18 Manageable SVN Series Equipment..............................................................................................17-32 17.3.19 Manageable OP-Bypass Equipment...............................................................................................17-32
18 Standards Compliance..........................................................................................................18-1 A Glossary and Abbreviations..................................................................................................A-1
viii
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy.....................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-2 Centralized network management...................................................................................................... 1-4 Figure 2-1 U2000 software structure....................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Veritas hot standby HA system (Solaris) software structure..............................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Veritas hot standby HA system (Windows) software structure..........................................................2-4 Figure 2-4 Functions of external interfaces..........................................................................................................2-5 Figure 4-1 Centralized deployment of the single-server system..........................................................................4-3 Figure 4-2 Centralized deployment of the HA system.........................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-3 Example network in inband networking mode...................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-4 Example network in outband networking mode.................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-5 Unified management of network products......................................................................................... 4-8 Figure 4-6 Network management solution for a single metro network..............................................................4-10 Figure 4-7 SingleBackhaul solution...................................................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-8 Network management solution for a single backbone network........................................................4-17 Figure 4-9 Networking application of the FTTx access network management.................................................4-19 Figure 4-10 FTTx predeployment flow..............................................................................................................4-20 Figure 4-11 FTTx fault diagnosis (1).................................................................................................................4-22 Figure 4-12 FTTx fault diagnosis (2).................................................................................................................4-22 Figure 4-13 PnP function of the MDU after replacement..................................................................................4-24 Figure 4-14 Implementation of the dual homing protection..............................................................................4-24 Figure 4-15 Implementation of the fast service cutover.....................................................................................4-25 Figure 5-1 Basic functions of the U2000............................................................................................................. 5-1 Figure 5-2 Security management overview..........................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Right................................................................................................................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-4 RADIUS-based user authentication....................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-5 LDAP user authentication.................................................................................................................. 5-9 Figure 5-6 Topology view and its functions......................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-7 Alarm display in the topology view.................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-8 Illustration of automatic topology discovery....................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-9 Clock view and its functions............................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-10 Relationships between alarm states................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-11 Alarm reporting and handling flowchart........................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-12 Alarm panel....................................................................................................................................5-18 Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Figures
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description Figure 5-13 Alarm bar chart...............................................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-14 Viewing alarms...............................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-15 Alarm correlation analysis..............................................................................................................5-23 Figure 5-16 Relationships between a root alarm and its correlative alarms.......................................................5-24 Figure 5-17 Alarm synchronization...................................................................................................................5-26 Figure 5-18 Difference between alarm masking and alarm suppression...........................................................5-27 Figure 5-19 Various alarm notification means...................................................................................................5-27 Figure 5-20 Alarm association...........................................................................................................................5-28 Figure 5-21 Alarm maintenance experience base..............................................................................................5-29 Figure 5-22 Performance management process.................................................................................................5-31 Figure 5-23 Relationships between a template, an instance, and a task.............................................................5-32 Figure 5-24 Inventory management window and its functions..........................................................................5-35 Figure 5-25 Log management window and functions........................................................................................5-37 Figure 5-26 Window and functions of dumping and exporting logs.................................................................5-38 Figure 5-27 NMS database management...........................................................................................................5-40 Figure 5-28 Diagram of the NE resource report.................................................................................................5-45 Figure 5-29 Diagram of the network resource report.........................................................................................5-46 Figure 5-30 System monitoring processes.........................................................................................................5-47 Figure 5-31 System monitoring information......................................................................................................5-48 Figure 9-1 Unicast MPLS tunnel .......................................................................................................................9-11 Figure 9-2 CES service application model.........................................................................................................9-13 Figure 9-3 ATM service application model.......................................................................................................9-14 Figure 9-4 E-Line Service..................................................................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-5 E-AGGR service scenario 1..............................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-6 E-AGGR service scenario 2..............................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-7 E-LAN service .................................................................................................................................9-17 Figure 10-1 Cluster topology...........................................................................................................................10-16 Figure 10-2 Navigation path to cluster functions.............................................................................................10-17 Figure 15-1 Switchover between active and standby sites in HA system..........................................................15-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 NBI functions supported by transport equipment................................................................................2-6 Table 2-2 NBI functions supported by access equipment....................................................................................2-6 Table 2-3 NBI functions supported by IP equipment...........................................................................................2-7 Table 3-1 Configuration requirements of the U2000 servers that manage networks of different scales ............ 3-2 Table 3-2 Recommended configurations of the disk array...................................................................................3-2 Table 3-3 System software of the U2000.............................................................................................................3-3 Table 3-4 High availability software....................................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-5 Software Configurations of the U2000................................................................................................3-5 Table 3-6 Hardware and software configuration requirements of the U2000 client............................................3-5 Table 4-1 Deployment modes of the U2000........................................................................................................ 4-2 Table 4-2 Relationships between faults and their causes that are identified by means of the alarm-based root cause identification........................................................................................................................................................4-23 Table 5-1 Overview of functions and features of the U2000............................................................................... 5-3 Table 5-2 Alarm severity....................................................................................................................................5-15 Table 5-3 Alarm display functions.....................................................................................................................5-19 Table 5-4 Alarm function...................................................................................................................................5-20 Table 5-5 Performance monitoring templates....................................................................................................5-31 Table 5-6 Statistical items for resource inventory management........................................................................5-35 Table 5-7 Resource Report.................................................................................................................................5-44 Table 9-1 Types of PTN service interfaces..........................................................................................................9-3 Table 15-1 Reliability indicators of the U2000..................................................................................................15-3 Table 15-2 Data backup......................................................................................................................................15-5 Table 16-1 Performance indicators.....................................................................................................................16-1 Table 16-2 DCN bandwidth requirements..........................................................................................................16-2 Table 17-1 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different OptiX NE Equivalents...................................17-3 Table 17-2 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different IP NE Equivalents.........................................17-6 Table 17-3 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different access NE Equivalents................................17-10 Table 17-4 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different hardware platforms......................................17-11 Table 17-5 Manageable MSTP series equipment.............................................................................................17-15 Table 17-6 Manageable WDM equipment.......................................................................................................17-17 Table 17-7 Manageable NA WDM equipment................................................................................................17-18 Table 17-8 Manageable submarine line equipment..........................................................................................17-19 Table 17-9 Manageable RTN equipment.........................................................................................................17-19 Table 17-10 Manageable PTN series equipment..............................................................................................17-20 Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Tables
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description Table 17-11 Manageable FTTx series equipment............................................................................................17-20 Table 17-12 Manageable MSAN series equipment..........................................................................................17-22 Table 17-13 Manageable DSLAM series equipment.......................................................................................17-23 Table 17-14 Manageable router series equipment............................................................................................17-24 Table 17-15 Manageable switch series equipment...........................................................................................17-24 Table 17-16 Manageable Metro service platform equipment...........................................................................17-26 Table 17-17 Manageable broadband access series equipment.........................................................................17-26 Table 17-18 Manageable VoIP gateway equipment.........................................................................................17-27 Table 17-19 Manageable WLAN series equipment.........................................................................................17-27 Table 17-20 Manageable firewall series equipment.........................................................................................17-27 Table 17-21 Manageable DPI equipment.........................................................................................................17-32 Table 17-22 Manageable SVN series equipment.............................................................................................17-32 Table 17-23 Manageable OP-Bypass equipment.............................................................................................17-32 Table 18-1 Details of the Standards and Protocols.............................................................................................18-2
xii
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
1 Positioning and Benefits
1
About This Chapter
Positioning and Benefits
This topic describes the position of the iManager U2000 unified network management system (hereinafter referred to as U2000) in the telecommunications management network (TMN), the product characteristics, and the equipment that the U2000 can manage. 1.1 Network Position This topic provides information about the development trend of network management and the position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy. 1.2 Product Characteristics The U2000 improves the capability of managing converged networks, scalability, and ease of use to construct a customer-centered and future-oriented NMS of a new generation. 1.3 Manageable Equipment This topic provides information about the equipment that the U2000 V100R002C01SPC003 can manage.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
1-1
1.1 Network Position

This topic provides information about the development trend of network management and the position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy. 1.1.1 Network Management Trend With the development of IT and IP technologies and the convergence of telecommunications, IT, media, and consumer electronic industries, the telecommunications industry has witnessed tremendous changes. Broadband services and mobile services have become the mainstream services on telecommunications networks and convergence of networks is being implemented widely, which bring changes in the market orientation and business modes of carriers. 1.1.2 Product Orientation The U2000 is the equipment management system developed by Huawei and is also the major and future-oriented network management product and solution.
1.1.1 Network Management Trend

With the development of IT and IP technologies and the convergence of telecommunications, IT, media, and consumer electronic industries, the telecommunications industry has witnessed tremendous changes. Broadband services and mobile services have become the mainstream services on telecommunications networks and convergence of networks is being implemented widely, which bring changes in the market orientation and business modes of carriers. l The development of the all-IP architecture is a leading factor in the transition from the existing vertical network that is divided by technology and service to the flattened horizontal network. Improving user experience, lowering operation expenditure (OPEX), and improving efficiency are the driving forces for fixed-mobile convergence (FMC). Network convergence requires network management to be consolidated.
l l
To be oriented to the future network development trend, the U2000 combines all-IP and FMC and manages bearer and access equipment in a centralized manner. l The U2000 can perform not only integrated management of multi-domain equipment but also integrated management at the element and network management layers. The U2000 has revolutionized the layer-based management mode to meet the management requirements in the transition from the existing vertical network to the flattened horizontal network. The U2000 is a unified network management system (NMS) of multiple domains and it aims to minimize operation and maintenance (O&M) costs for customers and to bring more network benefits.
1.1.2 Product Orientation

The U2000 is the equipment management system developed by Huawei and is also the major and future-oriented network management product and solution. In the TMN hierarchy, the U2000 is located at the element management layer and network management layer, and supports all functions of the element and network management layers. Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Figure 1-1 Position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy
1.2 Product Characteristics

The U2000 improves the capability of managing converged networks, scalability, and ease of use to construct a customer-centered and future-oriented NMS of a new generation.
Centralized Network Management

The U2000 manages transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment in a centralized manner. Specifically, it manages Huawei products and services of the products. The products include MSTP, WDM, OTN, microwave, and PTN equipment, routers, switches, MSANs, DSLAMs; the services include FTTx, firewall services. In addition, the U2000 manages end-to-end (E2E) services across domains in access and bearer networks, as shown in Figure 1-2. The services include SDH, WDM, microwave, packet, PTN, CX, and switch services.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
1-3
Figure 1-2 Centralized network management
Multiple Operating Systems

The U2000 is developed based on the integrated management application platform (iMAP) of Huawei. It supports Sun workstations, PC servers, Sybase databases, SQL Server databases, and Solaris, Windowsoperating systems (OSs). The U2000 is a stand-alone application that can be installed on different OSs and databases. Hence, it is compatible with multiple OSs. The U2000 provides high-end solutions for largescale networks and low-cost solutions for small- and medium-scale networks.
Leading Scalable NMS Architecture

By adopting the mature and widely-used client/server (C/S) architecture, the U2000 supports distributed and hierarchical database system, service processing system, and client application system and it also supports concurrent operations of multiple clients. Modularized architecture is scalable so that the U2000 meets the management requirements of complex and large-scale networks. l The U2000 uses an object-oriented, multiprocessing, modularized, and componentized architecture design, thereby decreasing the degree of the coupling of NE management components. In this way, the U2000 supports smooth online increase in management capability from a single domain to multiple domains. The U2000 has the capability of flexibly integrating NBIs. The loose coupling framework supports the independent upgrade and maintenance of subsystems.
l l
1-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Visualized Management
l Service supervision: Supports service-centered visualized supervision and the function of querying affected services by alarm. Provides abundant detection and diagnosis methods based on services to quickly check service connectivity and locate faults. Supports service-based performance query, threshold pre-warning, and trend analysis in the GUI. l Service deployment: Provides templates to set service-related parameters once instead of setting parameters repeatedly. Supports bulk deployment of services, increasing the configuration efficiency. Calculates static routes and allocates labels automatically, without manual intervention. l Object relationship: Associates services with tunnels and tunnels with routes. Hierarchical object relationships represent the bearer relationships explicitly. Provides bearer relationships to quickly locate and rectify faults. l Network-wide clock: Supports the automatic discovery of clocks (1588 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, and SDH clock) and addition of the clocks to the clock topology view. Provides the unified topology view of network-wide clocks and refreshes the tracking relationships and synchronization status of the clocks when faults occur in networks. Monitors clock status and displays clock alarms, tracking relationships, and protection status in real time.
Cross-Domain E2E Service Provisioning

l Supports E2E TDM service provisioning and management across traditional microwave and MSTP networks, which speeds up network deployment and service provisioning of a large number of microwave services. Supports E2E packet service provisioning and management across IP microwave and PTN/ Hybrid MSTP networks, which accelerates service provisioning in an IP network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-5
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Supports Ethernet, CES, and ATM service management for PTN, MSTP, RTN, SW, and NE40 devices, and supports E2E management of MPLS tunnels and PWs, which push the fixed market towards fixed-mobile convergence (FMC). Supports E2E service (Ethernet, CES, and ATM) provisioning across PTN and CX networks, and supports E2E management of MPLS tunnels and PWs, which push the mobile market towards FMC.
1.3 Manageable Equipment

This topic provides information about the equipment that the U2000 V100R002C01SPC003 can manage. For information about the equipment of specific types that the U2000 V100R002C01SPC003 can manage, see the following topics: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Manageable MSTP Series Equipment Manageable WDM Equipment Manageable NA WDM Equipment Manageable Submarine Line Equipment Manageable RTN Equipment Manageable PTN Equipment Manageable FTTx Access Series Devices Manageable MSAN Series Devices Manageable DSLAM Series Devices Manageable Router Series Devices Manageable Switch Series Devices Manageable Metro Service Platform Devices Manageable Broadband Access Series Devices Manageable VoIP Gateway Devices Manageable WLAN Series Devices Manageable Firewall Series Devices Manageable DPI Equipment Manageable SVN Series Devices Manageable OP-Bypass Equipment
1-6
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2 System Architecture
2
About This Chapter
System Architecture
The U2000 provides solutions to single-layer management for small- and medium-scale networks. In addition, the U2000 provides standard external interfaces, through which the U2000 is interconnected with an upper layer management system to form a hierarchical management network. The U2000 assists the system at the network management layer and the system at the service management layer to manage large-scale networks. 2.1 Software Structure This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 single-server system and U2000 HA system. 2.2 External Interfaces The U2000 offers abundant northbound interfaces (NBIs) that help to achieve unified management of transport, IP, and access equipment, fast integration between OSS and the U2000, and better quality of customer service. Currently, NBIs jointly developed by Huawei and mainstream OSS vendors are widely used by 72% of the top 50 carriers worldwide.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2-1
2.1 Software Structure

This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 single-server system and U2000 HA system. 2.1.1 Software Structure of the U2000 Single-Server System This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 single-server system. 2.1.2 Software Structure of the U2000 HA System (Veritas Hot Standby) This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 HA system (Veritas Hot Standby).
2.1.1 Software Structure of the U2000 Single-Server System

This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 single-server system. In the U2000 single-server system, there is only one U2000 server but multiple U2000 clients. The clients can gain access to the server at the same time. Figure 2-1 shows the structural relationships between main modules of the U2000 single-server system. Figure 2-1 U2000 software structure
2-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2.1.2 Software Structure of the U2000 HA System (Veritas Hot Standby)

This topic describes the software structure of the U2000 HA system (Veritas Hot Standby). The U2000 HA system (Veritas Hot Standby) applies to geographic redundancy of an HA system. The U2000 HA system (Veritas Hot Standby) supports the Solaris and Windows. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show the software structure. Figure 2-2 Veritas hot standby HA system (Solaris) software structure
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2-3
Figure 2-3 Veritas hot standby HA system (Windows) software structure
The Veritas volume replicator (VVR) is used to duplicate the U2000 data on the primary site to the secondary site so that data is synchronized between the primary and secondary sites in real time. The Veritas cluster server (VCS) is used to monitor the system and application service in real time. When a fault occurs in hardware or software, the VCS restarts or stops the application service. The Veritas volume manager (VxVM) is used to manage the disks and data volumes of servers.
2.2 External Interfaces

The U2000 offers abundant northbound interfaces (NBIs) that help to achieve unified management of transport, IP, and access equipment, fast integration between OSS and the U2000, and better quality of customer service. Currently, NBIs jointly developed by Huawei and mainstream OSS vendors are widely used by 72% of the top 50 carriers worldwide. In addition to conventional NBIs such as SNMP, CORBA, and TL1 NBIs, the U2000 offers the XML NBI that is based on the MTOSI 2.0 standards. The XML NBI provides multiple extensible functions, including alarm management, inventory management, performance management, service provisioning, and diagnosis test. By using these interfaces, the U2000 can integrate with the OSS in a fast and holistic manner. Figure 2-4 shows the functions of external interfaces.
2-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Figure 2-4 Functions of external interfaces
2.2.1 NBI The U2000 offers extensive network monitoring information, such as alarms, performance statistics, and inventory information, for OSSs through northbound interfaces (NBIs). The NBIs support network management functions, such as service provisioning and diagnosis test. Through the NBIs, the U2000 can integrate with different OSSs flexibly. 2.2.2 SBI Using the southbound interface (SBI), the U2000 can connect to NEs and manage them. The U2000 supports the following SBIs: SNMP, CLI, Qx, SSH, and Telnet SBIs.
2.2.1 NBI
The U2000 offers extensive network monitoring information, such as alarms, performance statistics, and inventory information, for OSSs through northbound interfaces (NBIs). The NBIs support network management functions, such as service provisioning and diagnosis test. Through the NBIs, the U2000 can integrate with different OSSs flexibly.
NOTE
Supported
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2-5
Not supported
The equipment of each product domain supports different NBI functions. For details, see the following tables. Table 2-1 NBI functions supported by transport equipment Interfa ce XML Feature MSTP Hybir d MSTP WDM OTN TDM RTN Packet RTN Marin e
Alarm Performa nce Inventory Service provisioni ng
CORB A
SNMP FTP TL1
Custom er OSS Test
Diagnosis test
Table 2-2 NBI functions supported by access equipment Interface XML

2-6
Feature Alarm
DSLAM
GPON/FTTx
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Interface
Feature Performance Inventory Service provisioning
DSLAM
GPON/FTTx
CORBA
Alarm Performance Inventory Service provisioning
SNMP FTP TL1
Alarm Performance Inventory Service provisioning
Customer OSS Test
Diagnosis test
Table 2-3 NBI functions supported by IP equipment Interface XML Feature Alarm Performance Inventory Service provisioning CORBA Alarm Performance Inventory Service provisioning SNMP FTP TL1 Alarm Performance Inventory Service provisioning NE CX Switch PTN
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
2-7
Interface Customer OSS Test
Feature Diagnosis test
NE
CX
Switch
PTN
XML NBI (Transport)

Complying with the TMF MTOSI 2.0 series standards, the XML NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm, performance, inventory, and service provisioning management on transport equipment for OSSs. The XML NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment Collection of alarm statistics l Performance management Query of history performance data Query of current performance data Reporting of performance threshold-crossing events Query of performance threshold-crossing events l Inventory management Query of physical inventory, such as NEs, shelves, slots, boards, and physical ports Query of logical inventory, such as logical ports, fibers or cables, tunnels, and services Export of inventory data and reporting of changes in inventory
XML NBI (Access)

Complying with the TMF MTOSI 2.0 series standards, the XML NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm, performance, inventory, and service provisioning management on access equipment for OSSs. The XML NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment Collection of alarm statistics l Inventory management Query of IP DSLAM inventory (ADSL ports, SHDSL ports, and templates)
Service provisioning management Provisioning of FTTH services (GPON)
XML NBI (IP)

Complying with the TMF MTOSI 2.0 series standards, the XML NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm, performance, inventory, and service provisioning management on IP equipment for OSSs. The XML NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment Collection of alarm statistics l Performance management Query of history performance data Query of current performance data Reporting of performance threshold-crossing events Query of performance threshold-crossing events l Inventory management Query of physical inventory, such as NEs, shelves, slots, boards, and physical ports Query of logical inventory, such as logical ports, fibers or cables, tunnels, and services Export of inventory data and reporting of changes in inventory QoS management l Service provisioning management Provisioning of route and MAN tunnel resources (MPLS tunnels and IP tunnels) Provisioning of route and MAN service resources (ATM PWE3, CES PWE3, Ethernet PWE3, VPLS, and L3VPN) ANCP service management
CORBA NBI (Transport)

Complying with the TMF MTNM V3.5 series standards, the CORBA NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm management and inventory management. The CORBA NBI also enables the U2000 to provide service provisioning, performance, and diagnosis test management for transport equipment. The CORBA NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment
Issue 05 (2010-11-19) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-9
Collection of alarm statistics l Performance management Query of history performance data Query of current performance data Reporting of performance threshold-crossing events Query of performance threshold-crossing events l Inventory management Query of physical inventory, such as NEs, shelves, slots, boards, and physical ports Query of logical inventory, such as logical ports, fibers or cables, and trails l Service provisioning management Provisioning of end-to-end (E2E) services (SDH, WDM, OTN, MSTP, ASON, and RTN) in the transport domain Provisioning of per-NE services (SDH, WDM, OTN, and MSTP) in the transport domain l Diagnosis test management Port loopback and alarm insertion Ethernet CC, LB, and LT tests 2M pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests OAM management on MPLS LSP, PW, PWE3 and VPLS services
CORBA NBI (Access)

Complying with the TMF MTNM V3.5 series standards, the CORBA NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm management. The CORBA NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment Collection of alarm statistics
CORBA NBI (IP)

Complying with the TMF MTNM V3.5 series standards, the CORBA NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm management. In addition, the CORBA NBI enables the U2000 to provide service provisioning and performance management for metropolitan area network (MAN) equipment. The CORBA NBI supports the following functions: l Alarm management Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment
Alarm unacknowledgment Collection of alarm statistics l Performance management for MAN equipment Query of history performance data Query of current performance data Reporting of performance threshold-crossing events Query of performance threshold-crossing events l Inventory management for MAN equipment Query of physical inventory, such as NEs, shelves, slots, boards, and physical ports Query of logical inventory, such as logical ports, fibers or cables, and trails QoS management and protection management l Service provisioning management for MAN equipment Provisioning of services for MAN tunnels (MPLS tunnels and IP tunnels) Provisioning of MAN services (ATM PWE3, CES PWE3, Ethernet PWE3, and VPLS)
SNMP NBI
Complying with the SNMP v1/v2c/v3 standard, the SNMP NBI enables the U2000 to provide unified alarm management for OSSs. The SNMP NBI supports the following functions: l l l l l l Alarm reporting Synchronization of active alarms Alarm acknowledgment Alarm unacknowledgment Heartbeat alarm reporting Setting of alarm filter criteria
TL1 NBI
Complying with the GR 831 standard, the TL1 NBI enables the U2000 to provide service provisioning (xDSL, xPON, broadband, and narrowband services), inventory query, and inventory provisioning in the access domain for OSSs. The TL1 NBI supports the following functions: l Service provisioning management for access equipment Provisioning of xDSL (ADSL, SHDSL, and VDSL2) services Provisioning of xPON (GPON and EPON) services Provisioning of multicast services Provisioning of voice services Provisioning of services for the BRAS Management of service virtual ports and PVCs Management of VLANs Management of Ethernet ports
Management of ACL and QoS l Inventory management for access equipment Query of resources, such as equipment, shelves, boards, daughter boards, ports, and service ports Notification of resource changes Management and maintenance of resources
FTP Performance NBI

The FTP performance NBI enables the U2000 to provide performance statistics export for OSSs. The U2000 exports performance statistics to a specified FTP server for analysis purposes. The FTP performance NBI supports the following functions: l Setting of the following conditions for exporting performance statistics: Monitoring period of performance events Monitoring indicator of performance events Export period of performance statistics l Export of performance statistics to a specified FTP server
Customer OSS Test NBI

The customer OSS test NBI includes two types of NBI: narrowband line test NBI and ADSL line test NBI. Narrowband line test NBI tests narrowband access devices (lines and terminals). ADSL line test NBI queries ADSL ports, and captures and releases ADSL lines. The customer OSS test NBI supports the following functions: l Narrowband line test NBI: Dial tone test for POTS users Feed voltage test for POTS users Loop current test for POTS users Line test for POTS users Ringing test for POTS users DTMF or pulse test for POTS users Howler tone test for POTS users Circuit test for ISDN user Line test for ISDN users NT1 terminal test for ISDN users Narrowband line capture test Narrowband line release test Ringing current voltage test Stopping a test l ADSL line test NBI: Query of the information about an ADSL user port Controlling of the DSLAM test bus
Loopback diagnosis test performed at the central office end on the user port OAM test
2.2.2 SBI
Using the southbound interface (SBI), the U2000 can connect to NEs and manage them. The U2000 supports the following SBIs: SNMP, CLI, Qx, SSH, and Telnet SBIs.
Qx Interface
Qx interfaces are simplified interfaces based on the Q3 interfaces defined in ITU-T recommendations. They are used for private communications. Qx interfaces use a protocol based on standard TCP/IP packets. Qx interfaces support data transmission over media such as in-band DCCs or ECCs and out-of-band channels, featuring low overheads, standard structures, and high efficiency. Qx interfaces are classified into Qx4 interfaces and Qx5 interfaces (Qx4 is the earlier version). Qx4 interfaces are used for managing the OptiX 2500+ and earlier transport equipment; Qx5 interfaces are used for managing transport equipment later than the OptiX 2500+. The U2000 can adapt to various protocols. The U2000 uses Qx interfaces to connect and manage transport equipment, such as MSTP, WDM, RTN, PTN, and OTN equipment.
SNMP SBI
The SNMP SBI is used to connect and manage SNMP equipment. The U2000 supports the SNMP SBI that complies with the SNMP v1/v2c/v3 standard. Through the SNMP SBI, the U2000 can be connected to Huawei routers, switches, and security access equipment. SNMP is a TCP/IP-based network management protocol at the application layer. SNMP uses the UDP protocol at the transmission layer. Through the SNMP SBI, the U2000 can manage the network equipment that supports proxy processes.
Telnet/SSH Telnet (STelnet) SBI

The Telnet and STelnet SBIs are a basic type of interface used for remote login to and management of NEs. The Telnet and STelnet SBIs compensate the disadvantages of the SNMP SBI and allow the U2000 to perform more management functions. Through the Telnet and STelnet SBIs, the U2000 can be connected to Huawei routers, switches, and security equipment. l Telnet is a TCP/IP-based network management protocol at the application layer. Through the Telnet SBI, you can log in to an NE in the CLI and run commands directly in the CLI to maintain and configure the NE. Using the TCP protocol at the transmission layer, the Telnet protocol provides services for network communication. The Telnet protocol transmits communication data in plain text, which is not secure. Similar to Telnet, Secure Shell (SSH) is also a TCP/IP-based network management protocol at the application layer. The SSH protocol, however, transmits encrypted data. Using the TCP protocol at the transmission layer, the SSH protocol encrypts data at the application layer. The SSH protocol ensures the security of network communications by means of authentication, encryption, and authorization. The SSH protocol supports authentication by password and RSA. In addition, the SSH protocol transmits compressed data, which speeds up the transmission.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
TFTP/FTP/SFTP SBI
The TFTP, FTP, and SFTP SBIs are used for backing up NE data, upgrading NE software, and loading patches. TFTP, FTP, and SFTP are TCP/IP-based network management protocols at the application layer and are dependent on the UDP protocol. l Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a basic and standard protocol that requires least extra overheads, as compared with FTP and SFTP, to upload and download files. The TFTP protocol does not support password configuration and transfers file contents in plain text. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a set of standard protocols used for transferring files on networks. The FTP protocol transfers passwords and file contents in plain text. SSH FTP (SFTP) uses the SSH protocol to provide secure file transfer and processing. For data backup using the SFTP protocol, passwords and data are encrypted during transmission.
l l
Syslog SBI
The Syslog SBI serves as an interface for the U2000 to receive system logs from NEs. With the Syslog SBI, the U2000 can manage NE logs.
2-14
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
3 Configuration Requirements
3
About This Chapter
Configuration Requirements
This topic describes the software and hardware configuration requirements of the U2000 server and client. 3.1 Hardware Configuration of the U2000 Server This topic describes the hardware configuration requirement of the U2000 server. 3.2 Software Configuration of the U2000 Server This topic describes the software that can be configured for the NMS server, including system software and NMS software. 3.3 Configuration of the U2000 Client This topic describes the requirements on software and hardware configuration when the U2000 client runs on the Windows and Solaris OSs.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
3-1
3.1 Hardware Configuration of the U2000 Server

This topic describes the hardware configuration requirement of the U2000 server.
Configuration Principles
l l Select proper hardware configurations according to the network scale. If multiple configuration schemes can meet the requirements of the current network scale, determine the specific hardware configurations according to the requirements of customers.
Table 3-1 Configuration requirements of the U2000 servers that manage networks of different scales Network Scale Server Type Small-scale network: less than 2000 equivalent NEs HP DL380G6 (CPU: 2 x Xeon quatri-core 2.0 GHz or later; memory: 8 GB; hard disk: 5 x 146 GB) Sun T5220 (CPU: 4C x 1.2 GHz; memory: 16 GB; hard disk: 6 x 146 GB) Medium-scale network: 2000-6000 equivalent NEs HP DL580G5 (CPU: 4 x Xeon quatri-core 2.13 GHz or later; memory: 16 GB; hard disk: 4 x 146 GB) Sun T5220 (CPU: 8C x 1.4 GHz; memory: 32 GB; hard disk: 6 x 146 GB) Large-scale network: 6000-15000 equivalent NEs -
PC Server (Windows)
Server (Solaris)
Sun M4000 (CPU: 4 CPU x 2.53 GHz (quatri-core); memory: 32 GB; hard disk: 2 x 146 GB) + disk array
Table 3-2 Recommended configurations of the disk array Hardware Configuration Item OceanStor S2600 Capacity 6 x 300 GB
You need to determine hardware configurations according to the network scales and the management capacities of the NMSs based on different hardware platforms.
3-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)

NOTE
If the HA system is applied, you need to multiply the hardware quantity by 2. For example, if the current large-scale network applies the HA system, the following hardware requirements need to be met: l Two M4000s and two OceanStor S2600s.
3.2 Software Configuration of the U2000 Server

This topic describes the software that can be configured for the NMS server, including system software and NMS software.
Configuration Principles
The software for the U2000 server is as follows: l l l System software: It includes the operating system software and database software. To select the required system software, see 3.1 Hardware Configuration of the U2000 Server. High availability software: It refers to the Veritas software that is applicable to only the high availability system. NMS software: It refers to the software developed by Huawei. The NMS software in this document refers to the U2000 software.
The U2000 can run on multiple OSs, including Windows, Solaris. Table 3-3 lists the configuration standards of the system software. Table 3-3 System software of the U2000 Item Delivered software platform Software Platform x86 (Windows 32 bit) Software Type OS Version Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise +SP2 SQL Server 2000 Standard + SP4 Solaris 10 (10/08) + Huawei Patch 9.0.1 Sybase 15.0.3 with EBF16476 + EBF16548 Windows Server 2003 Standard Supported OS Language Chinese English
Database
SPARC (Solaris 64 bit)
OS
Database
Compatible software platform
x86 Windows (32 bit)
OS
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
3-3
Item
Software Platform
Software Type Database
Version SQL Server 2000 Standard Solaris 10 Sybase 12.5 Windows 2000 Server MS SQL Server 7.0 or SQL Server 2000 Solaris 8 Sybase 12.0
Supported OS Language
SPARC (Solaris 64 bit) Software platform no longer supported x86 Windows (32 bit)
OS Database OS Database
SPARC (Solaris 32 bit)
OS Database
High Availability Software

The high availability system of the U2000 can be deployed on the Windows, Solaris OSs with the high availability software being Veritas. Table 3-4 shows the Veritas software versions in each platform. Table 3-4 High availability software Platform Solaris High Availability Software l Delivered configurations: Veritas 5.1 l Compatible configurations: Veritas 5.0MP3+RP2 and Veritas 4.1 l Configurations no longer supported: Veritas 4.0 and earlier versions + Watchman scheme Windows Delivered configurations: Veritas 5.1
Software Configurations of the U2000

The NMS software, namely, the U2000 server software, can be installed through the installation DVD or the installation package.
3-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Table 3-5 Software Configurations of the U2000 Configurat ion Item U2000 software Typical Configuration Installation DVD or installation software package
NOTE If you install the server software through the software package, prepare a proper software package according to the components to be installed.
3.3 Configuration of the U2000 Client

This topic describes the requirements on software and hardware configuration when the U2000 client runs on the Windows and Solaris OSs. The U2000 client can be installed on both Windows and Solaris. Currently, it cannot be installed on SUSE Linux. It is recommended that the U2000 client is installed on Windows. Table 3-6 shows the hardware configuration and software configuration. Table 3-6 Hardware and software configuration requirements of the U2000 client Platform Windows Hardware Configuration l Recommended configuration: Intel E5200 (dual-core) (2.5 GHz or greater); memory (2 GB or greater) l Lowest configuration: Intel E2140 (dual-core) (1.6 GHz or greater); memory (2 GB or greater) Solaris Sun T5220 Software Configuration Recommended OS: l Windows XP Professional SP3 Compatible OS: l Windows XP Professional SP3 l Windows Vista Business with SP1 l Windows 7 Ultimate (64-bit version)
Solaris 10 (10/08) with Huawei Patch 9.0.1
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
3-5
4 Networking and Application
4
About This Chapter
Networking and Application
The U2000 provides a centralized network-wide management solution to transport, access, and IP networks. In addition, the U2000 provides standard external interfaces to integrate with the operations support system (OSS), thereby meeting the management requirements of large-scale networks. 4.1 Deployment Mode You can select a proper deployment mode according to the network scale and deployment requirements. 4.2 Networking Mode Between the U2000 and NEs The U2000 adopts the widely used C/S architecture. In such architecture, the client and the server communicate through the LAN or wide area network (WAN). The U2000 server communicates with its managed NEs in inband or outband networking mode. 4.3 Application Scenarios of U2000 Management This topic describes typical application scenarios of U2000 management.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-1
4.1 Deployment Mode

You can select a proper deployment mode according to the network scale and deployment requirements. The U2000 supports the HA system (Veritas hot standby) to ensure the high availability (HA) of the system. Table 4-1 provides information about the deployment modes of the U2000. Table 4-1 Deployment modes of the U2000 NMS Deployment Solution Centralized deployment scheme for a single-server system Supporte d Platform l Windo ws l Solaris Requirem ent on Disaster Recovery Low Networki ng Complexi ty Simple Maximum Network Scale
l The Windows-based system supports a medium-scale network (2,000 to 6,000 equivalent NEs). l The Solaris-based system supports an ultra-largescale network (15,000 to 20,000 equivalent NEs).
Centralized deployment scheme for an HA system
l Windo ws l Solaris
High
Simple
l The Windows-based system supports a medium-scale network (2000 to 6000 equivalent NEs). l The Solaris-based system supports an ultra-largescale network (15,000 to 20,000 equivalent NEs).
4.1.1 Centralized Deployment of a Single-Server System In the centralized deployment mode of a single-server system, there is only one U2000 server on which all processes run. The U2000 server supports communication with and operations on multiple clients. Centralized deployment is applicable to small- and medium-scale networks because the deployment scheme is simple and requires low costs. 4.1.2 Centralized Deployment of an HA System In the centralized deployment mode of an HA system, the servers at the primary and secondary sites form an HA system and the data is synchronized in real time between the servers. When the server at the primary site is faulty, applications are switched to the server at the secondary site automatically to continue monitoring networks and ensure system running without interruption.
4.1.1 Centralized Deployment of a Single-Server System

In the centralized deployment mode of a single-server system, there is only one U2000 server on which all processes run. The U2000 server supports communication with and operations on multiple clients. Centralized deployment is applicable to small- and medium-scale networks because the deployment scheme is simple and requires low costs. The single-server system is deployed on Windows or Solaris, and supports the networking scheme of a single server and multiple clients, the clients and the server are connected through LAN or WAN, as shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1 Centralized deployment of the single-server system
NMS Client ...... NMS Client n
......
NMS Server
4.1.2 Centralized Deployment of an HA System

In the centralized deployment mode of an HA system, the servers at the primary and secondary sites form an HA system and the data is synchronized in real time between the servers. When the server at the primary site is faulty, applications are switched to the server at the secondary site automatically to continue monitoring networks and ensure system running without interruption. The centralized HA system can be deployed on the Windows or Solaris platform. There is only one server at each of the primary and secondary sites. Figure 4-2 shows an example network.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-3
Figure 4-2 Centralized deployment of the HA system

Primary Site Diskarray (Optional) Secondary Site Diskarray (Optional)
Ethernet Port
Router
Router
Ethernet Port
Switch
Switch
DCN
GNE NMS Client
4.2 Networking Mode Between the U2000 and NEs

The U2000 adopts the widely used C/S architecture. In such architecture, the client and the server communicate through the LAN or wide area network (WAN). The U2000 server communicates with its managed NEs in inband or outband networking mode. 4.2.1 Inband Networking Mode In inband networking mode, the U2000 uses the service channels that are provided by the managed equipment to transmit messages for network management and manage the network. The messages are transmitted between the U2000 and the equipment through the service channels of the managed equipment. 4.2.2 Outband Networking Mode In outband networking mode, the U2000 uses the communication channels that are provided by the equipment other than the managed equipment to transmit messages for network management and manage the network. Generally, the management interface on the control card of the managed equipment functions as the access interface.
4.2.1 Inband Networking Mode

In inband networking mode, the U2000 uses the service channels that are provided by the managed equipment to transmit messages for network management and manage the network. The messages are transmitted between the U2000 and the equipment through the service channels of the managed equipment. Figure 4-3 shows an example network in inband networking mode.
Figure 4-3 Example network in inband networking mode
Networking Description
The equipment managed by the U2000 is all connected to the managed network. The U2000 needs to be connected to only the nearby equipment on the managed network. After configuring the related routes, you can manage all the equipment on the network. The way of connecting the U2000 with the managed network depends on the distance between the U2000 and its nearby equipment. If the U2000 and its nearby equipment are in the same telecommunications room, you can connect them in LAN mode. If the U2000 and its nearby equipment are far from each other, you can connect them in private line mode. In this case, the private line mode is similar to the outband networking mode. l l Networking advantages: The inband networking mode is flexible and cost-effective. It does not need extra equipment. Networking disadvantages: When a fault occurs in the network, the communication channel between the U2000 and its managed network is broken. As a result, you cannot maintain the managed network on the U2000.
4.2.2 Outband Networking Mode

In outband networking mode, the U2000 uses the communication channels that are provided by the equipment other than the managed equipment to transmit messages for network management and manage the network. Generally, the management interface on the control card of the managed equipment functions as the access interface. In outband networking mode, the U2000 can be connected to the managed equipment in multiple ways. For example, the U2000 can be connected to the managed equipment through the data communication network (DCN), E1 lines, or routers. This topic considers the DCN as an example to describe how the U2000 manages equipment. Figure 4-4 shows an example network in outband networking mode.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-5
Figure 4-4 Example network in outband networking mode
Networking description
The equipment managed by the U2000 is all connected to the managed network. The U2000 connects with the equipment on the managed network through the DCN that is made up of other equipment. In this manner, the U2000 manages the network and equipment. l Networking advantages: In outband networking mode, the U2000 is not connected to its managed equipment directly but is connected to its managed equipment through other equipment. Compared with the inband networking mode, this mode provides more reliable equipment management channels. When managed equipment is faulty, the U2000 locates information about the faulty equipment in a timely manner and monitors the equipment in real time. Networking disadvantages: In outband networking mode, the U2000 manages equipment through a maintenance channel that is independent of the service channel. To provide such a maintenance channel, you need to construct a network that is made up of extra equipment. Thus, the cost of constructing the network is high.
4.3 Application Scenarios of U2000 Management

This topic describes typical application scenarios of U2000 management. 4.3.1 Unified Management of Network Products This topic describes the application of the U2000 for unified management of network products, that is, typical solutions provided by the U2000. 4.3.2 Single Metro Solution The U2000 provides perfect solutions for single metro networks in terms of network deployment, service deployment, and service assurance.
4.3.3 Single Backhaul Solution All-IP networks become a trend in telecommunications and various mobile data services sprout out everywhere. With the development of all-IP networks and mobile data services, networks become complex to maintain because devices are in a huge number and of various types and are widely used. Therefore, the operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) system must be improved with proper OPEX to support the configuration of more complex, flexible and various services and to provide fault monitoring means. 4.3.4 Single Backbone Solution The U2000 provides perfect solutions for single backbone networks in terms of network deployment, service deployment, and service assurance. 4.3.5 Single FAN Solution The single FAN Solution is the optical access solution that supports a large capacity of subscribers and long-distance transmission and provides high bandwidth. The U2000 provides a comprehensive solution for FTTx access devices to manage and maintain the OLT, ONU, SBU, CBU, and ONT in a centralized manner.
4.3.1 Unified Management of Network Products

This topic describes the application of the U2000 for unified management of network products, that is, typical solutions provided by the U2000. l The U2000 is the platform for managing access, transport, and datacom equipment. It supports unified management of equipment across domains and also revolutionizes the vertical management mode to support unified management at the element and network management layers. In addition, the U2000 supports right- and domain-based management. This feature enables the U2000 to manage the equipment in each domain respectively to meet the requirements for managing different networks and departments without interference. The U2000 follows the network convergence trend and provides management solutions for various networking scenarios. The U2000 has a uniform GUI style, which is simple and convenient for service provisioning. Highly effective service monitoring and service assurance ensure good user experience and cut the network O&M cost effectively. The U2000 provides unified northbound interfaces (NBIs), thereby reducing the workload of OSS integration.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-7
Figure 4-5 Unified management of network products
Network Deployment
l Centralized deployment and right- and domain-based management By controlling the rights of NMS users, the U2000 assigns different management rights to different users and specifies the objects that can be managed by the users, which ensures system security. l High availability solution The U2000 supports the high availability (HA) feature. In this manner, the HA system monitors the U2000 and automatically implements data protection in real time.
Service Provisioning
The U2000 automatically creates a service after you click the source and sink. This function ensures that new services can be provisioned quickly. Specifically, the time required for provisioning services decreases from minutes to seconds and the efficiency of the configuration on a per-NE basis is improved by 90%. l l Automatic discovery of end-to-end services. Provisioning of end-to-end services across domains. Supports E2E TDM service provisioning and management across traditional microwave and MSTP networks, which speeds up network deployment and service provisioning of a large number of microwave services. Supports E2E packet service provisioning and management across IP microwave and PTN/Hybrid MSTP networks, which accelerates service provisioning in an IP network. Supports Ethernet, CES, and ATM service management for PTN, MSTP, RTN, SW, and NE40 devices, and supports E2E management of MPLS tunnels and PWs, which push the fixed market towards fixed-mobile convergence (FMC).
Supports E2E service (Ethernet, CES, and ATM) provisioning across PTN and CX networks, and supports E2E management of MPLS tunnels and PWs, which push the mobile market towards FMC.
Service Assurance
The U2000 supports cross-domain fault location, which greatly improves the efficiency of rectifying faults and ensures normal running of services. l l l l l Network-wide equipment is monitored in a centralized manner and the number of alarms decreases greatly. Multiple network management systems (NMSs) and teams are combined into one NMS and one team, thereby greatly improving the efficiency of rectifying faults. Alarm correlation and intelligent analysis help to accurately locate faults. Service-oriented alarm management helps to directly locate the base station that is affected by an alarm and thus the efficiency of rectifying faults is improved by 50%. Unified fiber management enables the U2000 to clearly display the fiber connections of network-wide equipment. You can directly locate the equipment that a fiber is connected to according to an alarm generated on the fiber.
4.3.2 Single Metro Solution

The U2000 provides perfect solutions for single metro networks in terms of network deployment, service deployment, and service assurance.
Networking Diagram
Under the trend of all-service and super-broadband, the integration of mobile broadband and fixed broadband speeds up, and operators tend to act as all-service operators. An integrated super-broadband bearer network helps to quickly and flexibly deploy all services and greatly reduce the TCO of the network. The construction of such a bearer network becomes a challenge for operators. Carrying multiple services is one of the most distinctive features of the Metro Ethernet. Services such as the high-speed internet (HSI), IPTV, and voice over IP (VoIP) services must be established on logical channels, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-9
Figure 4-6 Network management solution for a single metro network
The U2000 provides perfect solutions for single metro networks in terms of network deployment, service deployment, and service assurance.
Network Deployment
The U2000 must meet the following requirements in the network deployment stage: l l Automatic discovery of network-wide equipment The U2000 supports the ability to automatically discover network topologies and links. Automatic discovery of existing services The U2000 provides the function of automatically discovering services. With this function, existing services on the network side can be restored to the U2000 through only two steps. l Visualized service deployment One-stop configuration: The U2000 provides the tunnel template, L2/L3VPN/VPLS/ PWE3 service template, and QoS policy template for you to perform one-stop service configuration. These templates predefine 80% parameters, thus reducing the configuration workload. Batch deployment: The U2000 supports the ability to deploy services in batches and the deployment efficiency is increased two to three times. Automatic computation: The U2000 automatically computes static routes and assigns labels without any manual intervention.
Service Deployment
The Metro Ethernet often carries heavy service traffic. To adapt to this feature, the U2000 provides the functions of deploying services in batches and quickly creating end-to-end services to accelerate the deployment process.
End-to-end service management and deployment The U2000 allows you to quickly establish specific logical channels on physical networks through GUIs. You can verify the validity of services before deployment and modify services after the logical channels are established. Creation of an end-to-end tunnel: After you select the ingress, egress, and transit nodes, an end-to-end tunnel can be automatically created. After tunnel configuration, parameter settings can be instantly deployed and both the primary and bypass hop-byhop tunnels can be displayed in the topology view. The U2000 supports the ability to create forward and backward tunnels at the same time, which facilitates tunnel management. In addition, the U2000 supports automatic assignment of LSP labels, thus freeing you from manually assigning labels. Creation of an end-to-end service: After you select the ingress node, the egress node, and the tunnel that is used to carry an end-to-end service, the service can be automatically created. The U2000 can automatically check service configurations and service connectivity, ensuring that services can be successfully deployed at a time.
Batch management of multicast parameters The U2000 supports the ability to set, adjust, and verify multicast parameters in batches, which helps operators to improve the efficiency of IPTV service deployment and helps users to know the running status of multicast services in real time.
Service Assurance
The U2000 monitors the running status of the network 24 hours a day and 7 days a week in multiple ways. It can detect network faults or degradation in a timely manner and report end-toend SLA data of the network. The U2000 provides the following service assurance measures for the broadband bearer network: l Reduction of IP alarms On the U2000, four technologies are used to reduce the great number of IP alarms, and the number of alarms in typical scenarios is reduced by 85%. l Fault location The U2000 can display network-wide routes and allows you to accurately diagnose service faults layer by layer and hop by hop. Service faults can be located to specific NEs and protocols, and the location duration is reduced from several hours to only several minutes. l Visualized service monitoring Supports service-oriented visualized service monitoring so that you can directly query services affected by a specific alarm. Provides abundant service-based test and diagnosis methods that can be used to quickly check service connectivity and rectify faults. Provides service-based functions of displaying performance through GUIs, generating alerts when performance thresholds are exceeded, and analyzing the performance trend. Supports layered management so that you can query the network bearing relation in real time. l Visualized object relation On the U2000, services are associated with tunnels and tunnels are associated with routes so that the network bearing relation can be easily identified.
When a fault occurs, you can quickly locate and rectify the fault according to the bearing relation. l Fast check of network-wide links The network scanning tool can automatically compute IP links between equipment, which improves the network check efficiency. The status of network-wide links can be monitored through only two clicking operations. Different network quality is shown in different colors: red, yellow, and green. This helps you to easily find network problems and rectify the problems accordingly. l Independent Web-based performance report system (iWeb) You can log in to the iWeb report system anytime, any place. You can use the Internet Explorer to log in to the iWeb report system, without upgrading any client. The iWeb report system provides various reports, including resource reports, performance reports, and fault reports. l Real-time alarm monitoring and notification The U2000 can monitor network faults and the status of equipment and interfaces in real time. By notifying the related personnel of network faults through SMSs or emails, the U2000 effectively ensures the normal running of the network. l Performance monitoring 24 hours a day and 7 days a week The U2000 regularly collects the traffic data of all the links or some key links on the entire network to provide effective support for network monitoring. l End-to-end SLA monitoring on network nodes The U2000 regularly collects the SLA data between PEs, between the local CE and PE, and between the PE and remote CE. With these data, you can discover network degradation, predict the trend of network running, and optimize the network accordingly.
NOTE
l PE: Provider Edge l CE: Customer Edge
4.3.3 Single Backhaul Solution

All-IP networks become a trend in telecommunications and various mobile data services sprout out everywhere. With the development of all-IP networks and mobile data services, networks become complex to maintain because devices are in a huge number and of various types and are widely used. Therefore, the operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) system must be improved with proper OPEX to support the configuration of more complex, flexible and various services and to provide fault monitoring means. All-IP implementation in the mobile bearer network presents the following challenges to the OAM: l Unified management of many types of devices: Fibers, microwaves, copper cables, and Ethernet may function as media to carry services of mobile bearer networks. The maintenance and management of various types of media challenge carriers. End-to-end (E2E) service provisioning and QoS assurance: The OAM experience of traditional SDH and MSTP networks must be inherited for the OAM of all-IP bearer networks. In addition, all-IP networks need to be merged with connectionless bearer
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-12
networks. Therefore, carriers need to improve their capabilities in E2E service management and QoS monitoring. l As shown in Figure 4-7, in mobile bearer networks, 2G and 3G services on the base station (BS) side are transmitted through TDM-E1, IMA-E1, or FE ports and then carried over E2E PWs. In addition, fixed networks and mobile networks are merged. Specifically, the CX series equipment carries broadband services and the PTN equipment functions as the mobile access service gateways at the two ends.
Figure 4-7 SingleBackhaul solution
The U2000 provides solutions to the Network Deployment, Service Provisioning, and Service Assurance of mobile bearer networks.
Network Deployment
One visit to site without field software commissioning l The data communication network (DCN) becomes available automatically and the U2000 searches for devices remotely. In this case, software commissioning engineers or customer engineers do not need to visit sites and only hardware installation engineers need to visit sites to install devices. That is, the devices do not require field software commissioning.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Software commissioning is implemented in the network management center (NMC) in a centralized manner. Hence, customer engineers do not need to visit sites for cooperation and the duration of software commissioning is reduced by 50%. The U2000 automatically searches for all NEs in a specified range and creates the NEs in the Main Topology. NEs that are searched out are displayed in a list, which helps you modify and maintain NE properties in a unified manner. The U2000 automatically searches for fibers in a specified range and creates the fibers in the Main Topology.
Auto-discovery of NEs and links l l l
Fast fiber search and creation. Automatic fiber search helps you create fibers quickly and correctly and facilitates network construction. Automatic network-side IP address assignment l Automatic IP address assignment on the NE network side: Network-side IP addresses of NEs can be automatically assigned when fibers are created, which simplifies network deployment. Centralized management of IP addresses of NEs: A report is provided to collect the IP addresses of all NEs on the entire network.
Plug-and-play (PnP) function of devices. After a device is connected to a microwave network, all devices on the network are searched out and are displayed in a list. The U2000 supports onetouch device creation. PnP function of cards. A physical card is automatically displayed when the NE Panel is displayed. The U2000 supports one-touch card creation. Packet service cutover of PTN equipment. Six steps complete the cutover of packet services. In the daytime, cutover tasks are created in batches and service data to be cut over are verified. At night, services are automatically cut over. Automatic cutover reduces the workload and increases the efficiency. l l With an increase in services, packet service cutover can quickly balance the service traffic load between the RNC and base station controllers (BSCs). To meet the requirements of frequent network adjustment, packet service cutover can efficiently and correctly adjust services to reduce errors and service interruption.
Automatic WDM optical power commissioning. Automatic WDM optical power commissioning lowers the skill requirements for deployment engineers and increases the overall deployment efficiency to a great extent. l l l WDM optical power is automatically adjusted. Multiple types of fibers are supported, such as G.652, G.653, G.655, and the combination of G.652 and G.655. Mainstream WDM equipment from Huawei and many networking modes are supported. For example, the chains, rings, intersecting rings, and mesh networks are supported.
Wizard-based network adjustment. Wizard-based network adjustment simplifies network adjustment. l l Nodes can be added to a ring or link and the link capacity can be expanded. Wizard-based and step-by-step operations increase the efficiency in network adjustment and lower the skill requirements of OAM engineers.
4-14
The entire process of network expansion can be assured. Specifically, network resources are checked before network expansion, an automatic service rollback is triggered upon an expansion failure, and a comparison report is generated after a successful network expansion. This ensures a high reliability in network expansion and facilitates management.
E2E management and service provisioning l l The E2E packet service provisioning and management of the IP microwave and PTN/MSTP devices speeds up service provisioning on the IP network. The E2E TDM service provisioning and management of the traditional microwave and MSTP devices increases the efficiency in the network deployment and service provisioning of a huge number of microwave devices. E2E service provisioning on the network of the PTN equipment and CX equipment is supported. E2E packet service provisioning on the network of the PTN equipment and MSTP equipment is supported. The network of the OptiX RTN 910/950 and PTN equipment is supported and E2E CES service provisioning can be performed on the mixed network. The network of the PTN equipment and CX equipment is supported. Visualized tunnels. Visualized protection relationships between tunnels. Visualized service topologies that can be previewed.
l l l l l l l
Visualized E2E service provisioning
Bulk deployment: The U2000 supports the bulk deployment of Metro Ethernet services to better meet the requirements of deploying these services in a large number. Bulk deployment speeds up service deployment. Fast service provisioning: Configuration is applied to NEs quickly after you specify the source, sink, and TE constraints. In addition, hops of working and protection trails are displayed in the topology view. Quick, accurate, and automatic service restoration. The U2000 provides an automatic service restoration function that is easy to use. By using this function, only two steps are required to restore network-side services to the E2E service configuration on the U2000. As a result, services are quickly provisioned. l l l Services are automatically created after you specify the source and sink and select a routing policy. In this case, service provisioning is efficient and errors are reduced. Services can be created in batches, which achieves the fast provisioning of a large number of services. The creation and management of E2E services that traverse both microwave and MSTP equipment are supported, which is unique in the industry.
Service Assurance
Service-based E2E OAM l All OAM data are configured based on E2E services and you do not need to configure OAM data for each node on an E2E trail separately.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Default parameters are provided and one-touch tunnel configuration is supported. Wizardbased Ethernet OAM is supported and a remote maintenance endpoint point (MEP) is automatically generated. E2E service diagnosis is supported and the diagnosis is not required on each node. This helps to locate a fault quickly. Fault information is collected during a diagnosis. The fault information helps analyze fault causes quickly. Clocks such as IEEE 1588v2 clocks, synchronous Ethernet clocks, and SDH clocks can be auto-discovered in the topology view. In addition, network-wide clocks are displayed in a unified topology view. In the topology view, the clock tracing status and clock synchronization status are refreshed in real time when a network fault occurs. The clock status is monitored in real time and the clock alarm, clock tracing status, and clock protection are displayed in real time. Relevant alarms are displayed in the E2E service management window when the network is faulty and affects service provisioning. Services affected by alarms can be located by a one-touch operation in the alarm management window. You can view network-wide alarms on the U2000 client or Web browser after alarms are generated.
Service-based fault diagnosis and fast fault locating l l
Visualized network-wide clock l
Server-centered alarm monitoring l l l
4.3.4 Single Backbone Solution

The U2000 provides perfect solutions for single backbone networks in terms of network deployment, service deployment, and service assurance. With the development of carrier-class IP technologies such as MPLS, VPN, and OAM technologies, carrier-class network technologies based on the IP backbone network become increasingly mature. The single backbone solution is provided for multi-service core bear networks, Internet backbone networks, and international gateways. Carrier-class maintenance must be performed strictly on the IP core network because of its core position on a telecommunications network. As shown in Figure 4-8, the single backbone network has the following networking features: l l l l The core layer uses the dual-plane structure and fully meshed connections are set up between Ps. Dual-homing connections are set up between convergence-layer equipment (PEs) and Ps. Two sets of equipment are deployed on important nodes for backup. The MPLS VPN is planned in a unified manner to perform isolation between users or services.
4-16
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Figure 4-8 Network management solution for a single backbone network
Network Deployment
The U2000 meets the following requirements in the network deployment stage: l Automatic discovery of topologies and services The U2000 supports the ability to automatically discover network topologies, links, and IP services. l End-to-end reliability The U2000 supports the abilities to manage mainstream routing protocols such as OSPF, IS-IS, and BGP, configure IGP (OSPF and IS-IS) fast convergence, and configure BFD, VRRP, IP FRR, VPN FRR, and MPLS OAM to ensure service reliability. l End-to-end QoS deployment The U2000 supports QoS deployment in common Diff-Serv mode so that traffic can be classified according to the service priorities of users. On a PE, complex traffic classification is performed according to the source IP address, destination IP address, interface, and VLAN; on a P, only simple traffic classification is performed. In addition, the U2000 supports VPN HQoS deployment to schedule multiple services on a VPN and different VPN traffic on public TE tunnels.
Service Deployment
The U2000 provides the following functions to effectively and accurately deploy services: l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Supports the setup of MPLS tunnels.

Supports the deployment of mainstream services (for example, L2VPN, L3VPN, and PWE3 services) that are carried over tunnels, provides multiple service configuration templates and batch configuration templates, and supports the automatic verification of parameter settings. Provides simple and user-friendly GUIs to effectively improve service deployment efficiency. After a service is created in the topology view, the U2000 immediately displays the creation and deployment results. All parameters can be set in only one GUI, which quadruples the configuration efficiency.
Service Assurance
The U2000 provides the following service assurance measures for the single backbone network: l Protection switchover in less than 50 ms in case of local faults You can configure MPLS TE FRR to implement fast route convergence. This ensures that traffic can be switched in 50 ms after a fault occurs on a node or link on the network. On an MPLS TE network, after the primary LSP is configured with FRR, traffic is quickly switched to the bypass LSP if a link or a set of equipment becomes faulty. MPLS TE FRR is a temporary local protection mechanism. With this mechanism, when the primary LSP recovers, traffic is switched back to the primary LSP or a new LSP. l Protection switchover in less than 200 ms in case of end-to-end faults With VPN FRR deployed, when a fault occurs on a remote PE, the local PE can quickly switch traffic to the remote backup PE in 200 ms. The switching duration is irrelevant to the number of routes on the private network. l Real-time alarm monitoring and notification The U2000 can monitor network faults and the status of equipment and interfaces in real time. On the U2000, the status and severities of equipment alarms are identified by colors of nodes in the topology view. Maintenance engineers can quickly locate alarm-affected services from specific equipment alarms. By notifying remote users of network faults through SMSs or emails, the U2000 ensures the timely processing of network faults. l Performance monitoring 24 hours a day and 7 days a week The U2000 periodically collects the key performance indicators of networkwide links or specified links and dynamically displays the network running status, providing important references for locating network faults. The U2000 provides support for network monitoring by regularly collecting the traffic data on network-wide links or important links. l End-to-end SLA monitoring on network nodes The U2000 regularly collects the SLA data between PEs, between the local CE and PE, and between the PE and remote CE. With these data, you can discover network degradation, predict the trend of network running, and optimize the network accordingly. l Layered fault diagnosis and location After a fault occurs, the U2000 analyzes the tunnel associated with the specific service and the route associated with the tunnel, and then diagnoses the service according to different network layers to accurately locate the faulty point (equipment, port, or service) and the causes of the fault for the purpose of troubleshooting.
4.3.5 Single FAN Solution

The single FAN Solution is the optical access solution that supports a large capacity of subscribers and long-distance transmission and provides high bandwidth. The U2000 provides
a comprehensive solution for FTTx access devices to manage and maintain the OLT, ONU, SBU, CBU, and ONT in a centralized manner. In the FTTx access solution, a single fiber is used to provide voice, data, and video services. The FTTx access solution meets the networking requirements for the fiber to the curb (FTTC), fiber to the building (FTTB), fiber to the home (FTTH), base station transmission, IP private line interconnection, and wholesale services. Figure 4-9 shows the networking application of the FTTx access network management. Figure 4-9 Networking application of the FTTx access network management
Network Deployment
In an FTTx network, the U2000 provides the ONU predeployment and remote acceptance functions. By using the functions, you can improve the ONU deployment efficiency and reduce the operational expenditure (OPEX). l The U2000 provides the ONU predeployment function. Before powering on an ONU, create a corresponding virtual NE and configure service data on the U2000. After you power on the ONU, the U2000 automatically applies the preset configuration to the ONU to complete the service deployment. Therefore, the network predeployment and device installation can be started at the same time. In this way, the time required for network construction is reduced by half. The U2000 provides the function of predeploying NEs by means of a sheet. By using this function, you can import data of NEs to the U2000 in batches, thus installing the devices
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
without software commissioning and performing remote acceptance. Engineers only need to visit a site once. The plug and display (PnP) feature of the ONU is implemented. Therefore, the deployment efficiency is greatly improved, and the network construction cost is reduced. l The U2000 provides flexible authentication that works together with the preconfiguration function to implement the PnP of the ONU. In this way, the installation cost is greatly reduced. After you replace an ONU with a new one upon a fault, you only need to enter the authentication information. Then, the U2000 automatically applies the configuration data of the faulty ONU to the new ONU. You do not need to re-configure the new ONU. The U2000 provides the remote acceptance function for the ONU. Specifically, the U2000 automatically applies the preconfiguration data after the ONU goes online and implement the remote service acceptance, if you create an acceptance task for the ONU when it is offline.
The U2000 provides a solution to quick ONU deployment. With the solution, engineers only need to visit a site once and complete the ONU deployment in five steps as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Plan data: With the Excel-based plan tool, you can easily copy and paste data. This function is applicable to the configuration of a large amount of data. Perform offline deployment: Import Excel sheets that contain planned data to the U2000 and complete the offline pre-provisioning of services. Install ONUs on site: Install ONUs without software commissioning on site. Activate services: Power on ONUs. The PnP features of the ONUs take effect. Perform remote acceptance: Engineers do not need to visit the site. Instead, NEs automatically report acceptance results without manual intervention.
Figure 4-10 shows the FTTx predeployment flow. Figure 4-10 FTTx predeployment flow
4-20
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
The U2000 provides the following three convenient and fast service provisioning means. With these means, you can fast provision the configuration data of FTTx NEs regardless of whether the OSS is interconnected with the EMS. l Automatic provisioning upon interconnection with the OSS: The U2000 provides standard and open northbound interfaces (NBIs) that implement fast interconnection with the OSS for the FTTx solution. l Sheet-based service provisioning: The U2000 provides the convenient and fast predeployment for ONUs and preconfiguration for services in the FTTx solution. With this function, the U2000 automatically provisions services and thus reduces costs in labor. l FTTx service provisioning template: The U2000 provides templates for provisioning FTTx services. You can customize service provisioning templates for different subscribers. With such a template, you can implement the one-touch service provisioning. In this way, the efficiency and correctness of service provisioning are greatly improved.
Service Assurance
l FTTx fault diagnosis: By using the traditional method, you need to locate a subscriber fault part by part. In addition, you need to locate faults of different types in different user interfaces for function modules. Those user interfaces are not integrated and thus you need to frequently switch between the user interfaces. As the FTTx is used more widely, access fault diagnosis becomes more important. The U2000 provides the FTTx fault diagnosis function. With this function, you only need to enter the object to be diagnosed and then perform one-touch fault diagnosis. Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12 show the fault diagnosis of FTTx services.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-21
Figure 4-11 FTTx fault diagnosis (1)
Figure 4-12 FTTx fault diagnosis (2)
Root cause identification upon an FTTx alarm: With this function, you can quickly and correctly identify the cause why an ONU is unreachable. The cause can be identified as a backbone fiber fault, a branch fiber fault, or
4-22
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
power-off of an ONU. In this way, the orders for useless field jobs are reduced.Table 4-2 shows how to identify the cause of a fault by means of the alarm-based root cause identification. Table 4-2 Relationships between faults and their causes that are identified by means of the alarm-based root cause identification Cause Backbone fiber cut Alarm Reported From the OLT LOS alarm without the ONU ID Alarm Reported From the ONU None U2000 Alarm When the OLT reports the LOS alarm for the PON port, the U2000 determines that the backbone fiber connected to the PON port is faulty. When the OLT reports the LOSi alarm with the ONU ID, the U2000 determines that the branch fiber connected to the ONU is faulty. When the OLT reports the poweroff alarm with the ONU ID, the U2000 determines that the ONU is powered off.
Branch fiber cut
LOSi alarm with the ONU ID
None
ONU power-off
Power-off alarm with the ONU ID
Dying gasp alarm
PnP (plug and play) of the MDU after replacement: When an MDU is faulty, you need to locate the fault and recover services quickly. It is time consuming to locate and troubleshoot an internal fault in the MDU. Therefore, it is recommended that you directly replace the faulty MDU and save and repair faulty MDUs in a centralized manner. The U2000 provides the PnP function of the MDU. With this function, you only need to rebind the MAC address or SN of the MDU on the U2000 and then the U2000 automatically applies the configuration and NE software version to the MDU. You need configure the MDU neither on site nor on the OSS.Figure 4-13 shows the implementation of the PnP function after replacement.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-23
Figure 4-13 PnP function of the MDU after replacement
Dual homing protection at the PON port: As the split ratio increases, the number of subscribers connected to a PON port increases. The dual homing protection at the PON port is provided to fast recover services when the backbone fiber between the PON port and the splitter is faulty. The U2000 supports the dual homing protection of type B at the PON port. When the active fiber connected to the OLT is faulty, the U2000 automatically switches the services to the standby fiber. This solution improves the disaster tolerance capability of the OLT. Figure 4-14 shows the implementation of the dual homing protection at the PON port. Figure 4-14 Implementation of the dual homing protection
4-24
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Fast service cutover at the PON port: The PON port on a live network is not pluggable. When an PON port or card is faulty or the network is adjusted, you can delete the faulty PON port, create an EPON port or card, and then add all MDU data to the new port or card to implement batch data migration. In this case, the data configuration is complex and relevant services will be interrupted for a long period of time. The U2000 provides the service cutover function. When a PON port of an OLT is faulty, disconnect the fiber from the faulty PON port and connect the fiber to an idle PON port of the same OLT. Then, duplicate the configuration data of the faulty PON port to the idle PON port. That is, you migrate the configuration of the MDUs connected to the PON port to the idle PON port. In this manner, relevant services fast recover.Figure 4-15 shows the implementation of the dual homing protection. Figure 4-15 Implementation of the fast service cutover
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
4-25
5 Basic Functions
5
About This Chapter
Figure 5-1 shows the basic functions of the U2000. Figure 5-1 Basic functions of the U2000
Security management Topology management Fault management
Basic Functions
The U2000 provides all management functions at element management layer and network management layer.
Performance management
Network management
Security management policy

Right- and domainbased management
Subnet management NE management Card management Link management
Alarm severity and status Network-wide alarm monitoring Alarm statistics Alarm handling Remote alarm notification Alarm correlation analysis
Performance handling process

Monitoring template management
MSTP network management WDM network management RTN network management PTN network management
Router and switch network management
NE user management Security of NE access NE license management
Monitored instance management Performance data viewing Data lifecycle management

Network performance monitoring
Security network management Access network management
5.1 Overview of Functions and Features This topic presents an overview of functions and features of the U2000. 5.2 Security Management This topic describes how to implement security management by managing users, login, and the authorization of right- and domain-based operations, ensuring the security of the U2000. Meanwhile, the security management supports the log management in terms of the login,
5 Basic Functions
operations, and running, and supports the HA scheme and data backup to achieve an excellent security solution. 5.3 Topology Management In topology management, the managed NEs and their connections are displayed in a topology view. You can learn the network structure and monitor the operating status of the entire network in real time by browsing the topology view. 5.4 Alarm Management When an exception occurs on a network, the U2000 needs to notify maintenance engineers of the exception in a timely manner, so that the maintenance engineers will recover the network efficiently. 5.5 Performance Management The performance of a network may deteriorate because of internal or external problems and faults may occur. The performance management function enables you to detect the deteriorating tendency in advance and solve the potential threats so that faults can be prevented. 5.6 Inventory Management The U2000 supports unified inventory management of physical resources and service resources on the entire network. On the U2000, you can quickly and clearly view information about various resources network-wide. The inventory information serves as a reference for service planning and expansion planning. 5.7 Log Management Logs record the information about operations performed on the U2000 and important events that occur in the U2000. The U2000 allows administrators to query and save logs and collect statistics on logs periodically. This facilitates detection of unauthorized logins and operations and fault analysis. Specifically, by browsing and collecting statistics on logs, you can query the client from which a U2000 user logs in to the U2000 server and query the operations performed by the user after login. You can also dump and print logs. Logs also can record operations that the OSS performs on NEs through NBIs. 5.8 Database Management Database management involves the management of NE databases and U2000 databases, and maintenance of data consistency between the U2000 and NEs. 5.9 NE Communication Parameter Management The U2000 communicates with managed NEs successfully only after you correctly set the connection parameters of the U2000 and the managed NEs. 5.10 DCN Management DCN management is applicable to MSTP, WDM, microwave, submarine cable NEs. 5.11 NE Software Management The NE software management module (called DC) is an independent subsystem of the U2000 and it is used to manage software and data on NEs. The DC enables you to back up NE data and upgrade or downgrade NE software. 5.12 Report Management The U2000 provides reports about alarms, logs, and resources. You can print the required data or save the data as a file when viewing it. The reports in tabular format can be filtered by equipment type and saved in XLS, TXT, HTML, or CSV files. 5.13 System Monitoring The U2000 provides a GUI-based system monitoring tool, which is used to manage the U2000 and query the system information.
5 Basic Functions
5.1 Overview of Functions and Features

This topic presents an overview of functions and features of the U2000. Table 5-1 Overview of functions and features of the U2000 Function or Feature Unified network managem ent Description
The U2000 provides the unified GUI-based management of Huawei NEs in the transport, IP, and access domains. It is a unified network management system (NMS) that offers comprehensive functions in managing NE alarms, network alarms, security, performance, topology, logs, inventories, reports, and databases. This function meets the requirements of network convergence and rapid development of customer services. Centralized task management is an NMS task management mechanism that manages and coordinates all scheduled tasks in a unified management GUI. Two types of tasks are managed in the centralized task management: system scheduled tasks (periodic) and custom scheduled tasks (one-off). The two types of tasks can run automatically at a scheduled time and users can set parameters and browse the task status, progress, and results. NE template management allows users to bulk configure NEs by means of duplication, which makes NE configuration faster and easier. After a template is referenced in NE configuration management, NE resources are assigned automatically with parameter values in that template. This avoids tedious and labor-intensive configuration. In NE data configuration, the U2000 supports bulk configuration of NE services by using configuration templates, importing data sheets, and loading configuration files. In data management, the U2000 supports the backup, restoration, and synchronization of NMS data and NE data. With this function, services can be provisioned quickly in the GUI. NE license management allows users to query, apply for, install, and adjust NE licenses (in case of capacity change and server change). By setting NE licenses, users can perform functions as required. NE licenses also controls the validity periods of and functions available to NEs. Users can view the status of NEs and make adjustment accordingly in license management. The CAU function enables the U2000 client to upgrade automatically through the Internet provided that the U2000 server functions properly and communicates successfully with the U2000 client. The U2000 can be upgraded smoothly without service interruption. After the upgrade, the NE status, basic services, and routing relationships are checked and a check report is generated. This helps to ensure the normal running of major services immediately after the upgrade and achieve timely detection of issues such as data loss.
Centraliz ed task managem ent
NE template managem ent NE data configura tion and managem ent License managem ent
Client auto update (CAU) Check after the upgrade
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-3
5 Basic Functions
Function or Feature Online Help
Description
The Online Help is displayed if users press F1 when using the U2000. It provides comprehensive help information and supports fast searches for information. The help information is also available in offline mode.
5.2 Security Management

This topic describes how to implement security management by managing users, login, and the authorization of right- and domain-based operations, ensuring the security of the U2000. Meanwhile, the security management supports the log management in terms of the login, operations, and running, and supports the HA scheme and data backup to achieve an excellent security solution. Figure 5-2 shows the overview of security management. Figure 5-2 Security management overview
5-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)

NOTE
5 Basic Functions
This section mainly describes the NMS user security. l For the security solution to the log management, see Log Management. l For the U2000 HA scheme, see Deployment Mode. l For the backup and restoration of the database, see 5.8 Database Management. l For details about the firewall security policy, system enhancement policy, OS and database security policy, and data transmission security policy, see chapter "Security Planning" in the iManager U2000 Planning Guide
User Management
This feature is to assign NMS users the appropriate rights for management and maintenance functions according to the O&M requirements when NMS users are planned. l User management: The U2000 uniquely identifies the login, operation, and management rights of NMS users according to user names and passwords. Only one default user, user admin, is provided after the U2000 is installed. User admin is a superuser and has all operation and management rights. Other users are directly or indirectly created by user admin. The U2000 supports the creation, modification, and deletion of users. The creation of users involves setting detailed information about users, the user group to which a user belongs, the management domains, the operation rights, and the ACL. l User group management: The U2000 supports the creation, modification, and deletion of user groups. The U2000 supports the function of creating a user group to manage users that have the same rights and to bulk manage rights of NMS users, which reduces management costs. After the management attributes of a user group are set and a user is added to the user group, the user has all rights of the user group. A user can be added to multiple user groups. In this case, the user has all the rights of the user groups as well as the rights that are assigned to the user. The U2000 provides five default user groups: security management group, operator group, administrator group, monitor group, and maintainer group.
Right Management
A right defines the operations that can be performed on managed objects. Different users have different operation rights over different managed objects. The right elements include managed objects and operation rights, as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Right
Right management
Managed objects
operation, querying)
Operation rights(login,
After NMS users are planned, the users can perform operations on NEs only after rights are assigned to them. l Management domain rights define the objects that can be managed by users or user groups, and the range of the configuration data. For example, if user A is not authorized to manage equipment C and object set D, equipment C and object set D are invisible to user A in the
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
topology view. An object set is a collection of multiple pieces of equipment. The U2000 supports the creation, modification, and deletion of object sets. l Operation rights define the operations that a user can perform. When multiple users manage the same device or object set, they have different operation rights over the device if different operation rights are assigned to them. An operation set is a collection of multiple rights. Operation right management is implemented by managing the operation sets or specific rights. If operation sets are assigned to users or user groups, they have rights that the operation sets include. The U2000 supports the creation, modification, and deletion of operation sets. The U2000 also supports right- and domain-based management. Only the operations within the rights of a user in a certain domain can be performed on NEs of this domain. Only system administrator and members of the security management group can assign rights and domains to other users. Domain-based management refers to dividing equipment nodes, services, or data to different domains. The administrators of different domains manage different objects with the domain rights that are assigned to them. Meanwhile, certain NEs can be assigned directly to a certain user. Right-based management refers to domain-based authentication. Users and user groups have different operation rights if they are assigned these rights. After dividing domains and then dividing rights, the personnel with different duties or positions in the same domain have different operation rights over different objects in the domain.
User Authentication Management

U2000 provides three types of user authentication management: local authentication, RADIUS authentication, and LDAP authentication. l Local authentication: NMS user management, login authentication, and the security strategy are all implemented by the U2000 server. Local authentication is the management method of the login authentication by default. For the details, see Local Authentication. RADIUS authentication: When a user logs into the U2000, the RADIUS server verifies and authenticates the login request, and the U2000 assign rights to login users according the rights that their user group has. For the details, see RADIUS-based Authentication. LDAP authentication: When a user logs into the U2000, the LADP server verifies and authenticates the login request, and the U2000 assign rights to login users according the rights that their user group has. The LADP-based authentication is similar to the RADIUSbased authentication, but the authentication protocols are different. For details, see LDAPBased Authentication.
Local Authentication
In the local authentication mode, user security management ensures the secure running of the U2000 in multiple aspects, including local user management, right management, password policy, account policy, and login control. l Setting of the password policy Setting the minimum password length and maximum password length. Setting the correlation policy between the current password and history passwords, including the maximum times for password repetition, the number of characters of history passwords that the current password cannot contain, and whether the password can be similar to history passwords.
5 Basic Functions
Setting the validity period of the password, including the maximum and minimum period validity of the password, the number of days warning given before the password expiry. Setting the rules for the forms of passwords. l The account policy involves the account validity period, minimum length of a user name, automatic unlocking time, maximum number of login attempts, timeout period for a login or unlocking failure, and user policy of no login within a period. Login control involves the login mode, the login period control, and the IP address control. User login mode specifies whether multiple users are allowed to log into the U2000 at the same time. Usually, multiuser mode is adopted. If you need to perform special operations on the U2000 server, you can set the user login mode to single-user mode, avoiding interferences from the operations of other users. Users can log in to the U2000 only in the specified login period. The ACL controls the login IP addresses of clients. Users can log in to the U2000 server only from certain IP addresses. Therefore, even if the user account and the password are obtained by unauthorized users, these users cannot log in to the U2000 server, and thus the U2000 security is improved.
RADIUS-Based Authentication
When the RADIUS authentication is adopted, the administrator does not need to create a user account on the NMS in advance. The user account for logging in to the U2000 is an existing account that can pass the authentication of the RADIUS server. When a user enters the user name and password, the security process of the U2000 server sends the user name and password to the RADIUS server. If the user passes the RADIUS authentication, the security process learns the user group to which this user belongs, and then the security process assigns rights to the user according to the operation set policy of the user group.
NOTE
Before adopting the RADIUS authentication mode, make sure that the name of the user group defined on the U2000 is the same as that defined in the account database of carriers. In addition, make sure that the account to be authorized for logging in to the U2000 is added to the corresponding user group.
For the RADIUS-based authentication process, see Figure 5-4.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-7
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-4 RADIUS-based user authentication

OSS Authentication GUI
Security NBI User group privilege
AAA agent Security server
RADIUS server
User and user group datebase
U2000 server
U2000 user
LDAP-Based Authentication
As a distributed client/server system protocol, LDAP is adopted in the VPN and WAN to control the users' access to the network and prevent unauthorized users from accessing the networks. The LDAP-based authentication mode is similar to the RADIUS-based authentication mode except for different authentication protocols. Compared with the RADIUS authentication, the LDAP authentication supports the following features: l l Supporting common mode (encryption-free), SSL mode, and TLS mode for the communication between the U2000 and the LDAP server. Supporting multiple LDAP authentication servers and being compatible with the HA scheme of the U2000.
For the LDAP-based authentication process, see Figure 5-5.
5-8
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-5 LDAP user authentication
OSS
Securiyt NBI User group database AAA agent Security server
LDAP server
User and user group database
U2000 server
U2000 user
Session Management
l If a user does not perform operations on the client temporarily, the user can lock the client manually or set the time for the U2000 to automatically lock the client to prevent unauthorized operations. To unlock the client, the user must enter the password of the current login user or use the account of the administrator. The members of the administrator group can monitor sessions and operations of common U2000 users, forcibly log out U2000 users, and unlock U2000 users. The U2000 can automatically detect and clear invalid sessions. Client lockout: If a user does not perform operations on the client temporarily, the user can lock out the client or set the time to automatically lock the U2000 client to prevent unauthorized operations. To unlock the client, the user must enter the password of the current login user or use the account of the administrator.
l l l
5.3 Topology Management

In topology management, the managed NEs and their connections are displayed in a topology view. You can learn the network structure and monitor the operating status of the entire network in real time by browsing the topology view. The U2000 has the Physical Root, Clock View, Tunnel View, and Custom View. Required information can be easily learned in different views, which enables you to learn and monitor the operating status of the entire network conveniently.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-9
5 Basic Functions
The U2000 offers service topology management for various end-to-end services, for example, VPLS services, PWE3 services, L3VPN services, E-AGGR services, and tunnel services. By means of the service topology, users can view and configure services easily.
Topology View and Its Functions

The topology view of the U2000 consists of a navigation tree on the left side and a view on the right side. The navigation tree shows the network hierarchy. The view displays the objects at different coordinates on the background map, which helps to identify the locations of deployed objects. Figure 5-6 shows the topology view of the U2000 and its functions. Figure 5-6 Topology view and its functions
1 2 3 4 5
13
12
11
10
5-10
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
1: Name of the network management system You can change the name of the network management system (NMS) as required.
2: Menu bar With submenus, you can perform operations on the NMS and NEs, such as configuring and managing tasks.
3 and 4: Toolbar buttons l 3: You can click a button to perform a simple task quickly. For example, exiting an NMS, locking a terminal, logging out of an NMS, launching the NE Explorer, viewing alarms, and viewing performance data. l 4: You can click a button to perform a simple task quickly on the Main Topology. For example, zooming in, zooming out, refreshing, saving, locking, or unlocking views, showing or hiding navigation trees, and searching for objects.
5: Alarm button bar Alarms of different severities are displayed in different colors. The number displayed on an alarm button indicates the number of the alarms of the corresponding severity. You can click a button to view the alarms of the corresponding severity on the current U2000. For example, viewing current alarms and displaying the alarm panel. When an abnormal event occurs in the U2000, the color of Abnormal event indicator is changed from green to red. You can click the indicator to view the current abnormal event on the U2000.
6: Filter tree and legend In this area, you can set the display types of the objects in a view and view the descriptions of legends in the view. The filter tree and legends help you to locate an object quickly.
7: Current client time
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-11
5 Basic Functions
8: Name of the current login user of the U2000.
9: Name and the IP address of the U2000 server that the U2000 client currently logs in to. The name of the U2000 server is the name that you set on the U2000 client.
10: Physical map In this area, all NEs managed by the U2000 are displayed. In the Main Topology, you can launch the NE Explorer, view performance data, create NEs, configure NE data, create connections, view fibers/cables, delete topological objects, and view current alarms. 13: Network-wide NE statistics You can collect statistics on the NE types and the number of NEs of each type on the entire network.
11: Coordinates of the pointer in the Main Topology.
12: Topology navigation tree In this area, all NEs managed by the U2000 are displayed. Using this tree, you can locate the required NE quickly.
Alarm Display in the Topology View

In the topology view, alarms are displayed in different colors or icons to indicate different status of the subnets and NEs. The alarms are displayed with two methods: color-coded display and small icon display. The default method is the small icon display, as shown in Figure 5-7. You can choose nodes of different levels from the Physical Root navigation tree, for example, a subnet, a node, or an NE to browse current alarms. Figure 5-7 Alarm display in the topology view
The alarm display in the topology view has the following features: l l l The color of a topological node indicates the operating status (such as normal, unknown, or offline) and alarm status of the monitored NE. When an NE generates multiple alarms of different severities, the color or icon that indicates the highest alarm severity of these alarms is displayed in the topology view. When multiple nodes in a subnet generate alarms, the subnet is displayed in the color or icon that indicates the highest alarm severity of these alarms.
5-12
5 Basic Functions
You can switch to the current alarm window of an NE using the shortcut menu of the NE node. In addition, you can query the details of current alarms in the NE Panel.
Automatic Topology Discovery

The U2000 provides an automatic topology discovery function to automatically add NEs to the topology view. Therefore, the operational expenditure (OPEX) is reduced. The U2000 supports the automatic topology discovery as follows: l Bulk creation of NEs Bulk creation of SNMP/ICMP-based NEs: SNMP/ICMP-based NEs involve the router, switch, security access NEs. When the U2000 communicates with the preceding NEs successfully, it can search out the required NEs by IP address or by network segment and then bulk create these NEs. Bulk creation of transport/ PTN NEs: Based on the IP address, network segment, or network service access point (NSAP) address of a GNE, the U2000 automatically searches out all the NEs that communicate with the GNE and bulk creates the NEs. Bulk import of NEs: Security GNEs, service monitoring GNEs, and security virtual network (SVN) series security NEs periodically sends proactive registry messages that contain the IP addresses of NEs to the U2000 server. With the proactive registry management, the U2000 bulk creates the NEs after receiving the messages. l l Configuring NEs automatically: The U2000 provides the function of configuring autodiscovered NEs (such as PTN NEs) automatically. Searching for NEs at a scheduled interval: The U2000 searches for NEs of a specified type in a specified network segment according to the preset conditions at a scheduled interval. It automatically adds the new NEs to the topology view. NE types are as follows: the access router, switch, and security NEs. Creating fibers/cables or links automatically: The U2000 supports the function of bulk creating fibers/cables and links. It supports the function of bulk searching and adding new fibers/cables and links to the topology view automatically after a search.
Figure 5-8 Illustration of automatic topology discovery
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-13
5 Basic Functions
1.
The automatic topology discovery is implemented step by step through a wizard. The wizard instructs you to set the parameters required for the automatic discovery, such as NE type, SNMP parameters, and the IP address range. After you set the parameters, the U2000 searches for the required NEs in the specified network segments according to the preset conditions. All NEs from Huawei and other vendors that meet the conditions are displayed in the topology view. Meanwhile, the basic configuration data of the NEs is uploaded, which simplifies the configuration of these NEs. You can stop the automatic topology discovery at any time. If the discovery fails, the cause is displayed.
2.
3.
Clock View and Its Functions

In the clock view, you can set the NE clocks, query network-wide clock synchronization status, search for clocks, and traces clocks. The U2000 supports the passive optical network (PON) clocks synchronous Ethernet clocks, IEEE 1588 v2 clocks, and SDH clocks. In the clock view, NEs of various types can be displayed, such as the PTN, router, access, MSTP, RTN, and NG WDM NEs. Figure 5-9 shows the clock view of the U2000 and its functions. Figure 5-9 Clock view and its functions
Discovering the clock topology automatically: The U2000 searches for clock links between all NEs in the entire network to obtain the clock tracing relationships of all NEs. You can search for clock links by NE or by clock link type. When the clock source of an NE is changed, the U2000 performs a search again to renew the clock tracing relationships. Viewing the clock topology: After the U2000 automatically discovers the clock topology, you can view the clock tracing relationships in the entire network. To adjust the clock topology, you can manually create and delete topological nodes and links. Configuring clocks: In the clock configuration window of the NE Explorer, you can configure the clocks of the NE. You can configure the following clocks: PON clocks
5-14
5 Basic Functions
synchronous Ethernet clocks, IEEE 1588 v2 clocks, and SDH clocks. The clock configuration function varies with NE types. l Monitoring the change of clocks: When an NE or a link fails or a switching of clock sources occurs in a network, the U2000 automatically updates the clock tracing relationships and the clock synchronization status in the topology view. According to the clock alarms of the NE whose clock is changed, you can identify the fault. Switching clocks manually: You can select a clock link and set its clock tracing relationship as the current clock tracing relationships of the NE.
5.4 Alarm Management

When an exception occurs on a network, the U2000 needs to notify maintenance engineers of the exception in a timely manner, so that the maintenance engineers will recover the network efficiently. Alarm management consists of the following functions: l Network-wide alarm monitoring and remote alarm notification enable the U2000 to notify maintenance engineers of network exceptions in time so that the engineers will rectify faults quickly and effectively. Alarm correlation analysis, alarm association (with NEs, ports, or services), alarm masking, alarm suppression, and maintenance experience base improve the accuracy and efficiency of alarm processing. Alarm synchronization ensures the reliability of alarms. Custom functions such as alarm filtering, alarm redefinition, and time localization meet individualized requirements in different scenarios.
l l
Alarm Severity
Table 5-2 shows different alarm severities and the handling methods. Table 5-2 Alarm severity Alarm Severity Critical Definition A critical alarm indicates a fault or an event that may seriously affect an NE or the entire network, such as a board failure or a clock board failure. A major alarm indicates a fault or an event that may affect part of a network, such as a board failure or line failure. A minor alarm indicates a general fault or an event about the functioning of a board or line.
Handling Method Handle a critical alarm immediately to avoid a system breakdown.
Major
Handle a major alarm in a timely manner to avoid loss of important functions.
Minor
Minor alarms remind maintenance engineers of identifying alarm causes and rectifying possible faults.
5-15
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Alarm Severity Warning
Definition A warning alarm indicates a fault or an event that does not affect the system performance and services but may potentially affect the service quality of the NE or resources. Some warning alarms indicate status change. For example, when an NE recovers, a switching alarm is generated.
Handling Method Maintenance engineers can learn the information about the operating status of the network and NEs according to warning alarms and handle the alarms depending on actual situations.
Handle different severities of alarms by using different methods. The U2000 supports the function of redefining the alarm severity so that you can change the severity of a specific alarm as required. The severity of an alarm needs to be adjusted when the impact of the alarm becomes larger or smaller.
Alarm Status
l Alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearance Alarm acknowledgment: An acknowledged alarm indicates that this alarm has been handled by a user. An alarm can be acknowledged in the following two ways: Manual acknowledgment: You can select an alarm from the current alarm window to acknowledge it. Automatic acknowledgment: If you enable the automatic alarm acknowledgment, the U2000 acknowledges an alarm immediately after it is cleared or automatically acknowledges the alarms that are cleared within the specified time at 01:00 every day. Alarm clearance: When you delete an alarm, the alarm is cleared from the NE and the current alarm library of the U2000. After that, the alarm is moved to the history alarm library. l Alarm status classification Based on the acknowledgment and clearance status, alarm status can be classified into the following types: Unacknowledged and uncleared Acknowledged and uncleared Unacknowledged and cleared Acknowledged and cleared
NOTE
Acknowledged and cleared alarms become history alarms after a preset period elapses. All nonhistory alarms are current alarms.
Changing alarm states Changing the clearance status
5-16
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
When the condition triggering an alarm disappears, the NE or the U2000 server recovers. In this case, the NE or the U2000 server reports a clearance alarm. The alarm state changes from uncleared to cleared. You can also manually clear an alarm. Changing the acknowledgment status If an alarm is acknowledged, it indicates that the alarm will be handled or has been handled. After the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm state changes from unacknowledged to acknowledged. You can unacknowledge an acknowledged alarm if necessary. After the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm state changes from acknowledged to unacknowledged. l Relationships between alarm states Figure 5-10 shows the relationships between alarm states and how an alarm changes from one state to another. Figure 5-10 Relationships between alarm states
Alarm Reporting and Handling Flowchart

Figure 5-11 shows the alarm reporting and handling flowchart of the U2000. Figure 5-11 Alarm reporting and handling flowchart
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-17
5 Basic Functions
Network-Wide Alarm Monitoring

Traditionally, a network is maintained separately by domain. Faults across domains need to be located manually, which lowers the locating efficiency. The U2000 provides unified means of alarm monitoring, such as the alarm panel and alarm browsing, which helps users to understand the operating status of the network in real time. It also provides alarm query templates that are a collection of common query criteria. You can create different alarm query templates according to the region, type, and network layer of the device on which an alarm is generated. The alarm query templates facilitate the query and monitoring of alarms. The alarm display function is implemented in three different ways: alarm panel display, alarm bar chart, and alarm query and browsing. Figure 5-12 shows the alarm panel, and Figure 5-13 shows the alarm bar chart. Figure 5-12 Alarm panel
5-18
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-13 Alarm bar chart
Table 5-3 Alarm display functions Function Alarm panel Description The alarm panel collects statistics on the alarms of managed objects by severity and displays the number of the alarms of each severity. The alarm panel provides a summary of system faults and can be used as a monitoring panel. The alarm bar chart shows the real-time alarm statistics. The alarm bar chart displays the alarm statistics collected by the alarm panel. l Viewing current alarms: Query the fault alarms that are not handled, that is, unacknowledged or uncleared alarms. l Viewing history alarms: Query the fault alarms that are handled, that is, acknowledged and cleared alarms. l Viewing alarm logs: Query all fault alarms that are reported by NEs. l Viewing event logs: Query current abnormal events. l Setting an alarm query template: Save common query conditions as an alarm query template. You can directly use the template to query alarms based on the same query conditions. This function helps you to view and monitor the required alarms.
Alarm bar chart Querying and viewing alarms
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-19
5 Basic Functions
Alarm browsing consists of operations of viewing current alarms, history alarms, alarm logs, and event logs, and supports multiple custom functions, as shown in Figure 5-14 and Table 5-4. Figure 5-14 Viewing alarms
Alarm browsing Alarm sorting Dynamic alarm template
Alarm details Alarm color display Alarm filtering Alarm cause and handling suggestion Alarm handling means
Table 5-4 Alarm function Function Dynamic alarm panel Description The alarm panel shows the number of the alarms of different severities of the U2000 client. Pop-ups of the alarm panel or the blinks of alarm indicators show current alarms. Click the alarm panel to display the window for viewing alarms.
5-20
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Function Alarm filtering
Description When a large number of alarms exist, you can filter alarms by alarm name, alarm severity, status, type, last occurrence time segment and clearance time segment. The alarm filtering function improves the efficiency of viewing alarms. You can filter alarms by attributes of alarm sources, such as the objects of NEs, object groups, and maintenance areas, and create the required alarm filter templates by customizing the filter criteria. In this manner, you can select the required alarm filter template to filter alarms.
Alarm template Alarm viewing
The alarm template can be customized. Therefore, you can sort alarms flexibly as required and locate the required alarms quickly. You can view the alarms relevant to NEs and services on the U2000 to learn the operating status of the NEs and networks. l Viewing current alarms: View current alarms of all severities on the entire network. l Viewing all current alarms of a specific severity: You can quickly learn the critical, major, or minor alarms of the entire network from the alarm icons on the toolbar. l Viewing the alarms of a specified NE or U2000: You can select an NE or a U2000 in the Main Topology and quickly learn the current alarms of the selected object. l Viewing the current alarms of a trail: In the trail management window, you can quickly learn the alarms and events of the managed trails. This function facilitates trail maintenance. l Viewing history alarms: By viewing all history alarms of the U2000, you can learn the faults that occurred on the U2000 and NEs. The history alarm data can be used for long-term performance analysis.
Alarm query
You can query alarms by object where the alarms are generated, function type, alarm status, or alarm severity. The query results can be saved and printed. Alarms of different severities are displayed in different colors in the alarm list. The colors can be customized. When an NE reports an alarm, the icon in the upper left corner of the NE or the color of the NE in the topology view varies with the alarm severity. You can right-click the NE to query current alarms of the NE. You can select an alarm and locate the topological object where this alarm is generated. For a physical alarm, you can locate the board where the alarm is generated in the NE panel. You can sort alarms by field and customize the columns displayed in the alarm list. Alarms can be saved to a file (.txt, .html, .xls, or .csv) and can be printed.
Alarm display in color Alarm display in the topology view
Alarm locating
Alarm sort Customized display
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-21
5 Basic Functions
Function Details Handling suggestion
Description You can obtain the details of an alarm, such as the alarm name and identification information. The handling suggestion provides information, such as the alarm cause, recovery suggestion, alarm description, maintenance experience, and cause type. In the Handling Suggestion area, a link to the corresponding alarm reference topic in the Online Help is provided. You can click on Click here to show detail information to display the corresponding alarm reference topic in the Online Help.
You can view the information about an alarm in the alarm browsing window, including the severity, name, alarm source, location information, occurrence time, first occurrence time, last occurrence time, clearance time, acknowledgment time, clearance user, acknowledgment user, clearance status, acknowledgment status, location, direction, trail domain, alarm reversion, protection subnet name, alarm plane, trail name, ASON object name, and affected services.
Alarm Statistics
You can quickly learn alarm information by collecting statistics on alarms and analyzing them. The U2000 can collect statistics on alarms based on the preset conditions. The conditions can be the name, severity, function type, generation time, alarm status, source of an alarm, or a combination of the preceding items.
Alarm Masking and Correlation Analysis

l l By using the alarm masking function, you can set the alarm/event masking conditions to avoid display of a large number of redundant alarms. While an NE is being repaired, tested, or deployed, the NE may report a large number of alarms which can be ignored. In this case, you need to mask these alarms so that the U2000 does not display and save them.
The U2000 provides the following correlation analysis means: alarm/event correlation analysis, transient alarm analysis, repeated event analysis, alarm/event frequency analysis, and analysis on duration of acknowledged but uncleared alarms. Figure 5-15 shows the implementation of alarm correlation analysis.
5-22
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-15 Alarm correlation analysis
Correlation Analysis The Default Correlation and Correlation Analysis windows are provided for a correlation analysis. In the Default Correlation window, the predefined rules for the alarm correlation analysis are displayed. These rules can be enabled if required. In the Correlation Analysis window, the rules for the alarm correlation analysis can be customized. Correlative alarms are the alarms whose causes are relevant to each other. One of the alarms is the root cause. Various alarms are generated when a certain fault occurs. If non-root alarms are reported, the fault locating and analysis are affected. You can set the rules for the correlation analysis on the U2000 according to certain features of correlative alarms, such as generation time and physical locations where the alarms are generated. In this manner, the U2000 directly discards non-root alarms that meet the preset conditions, labels them as correlative alarms, and saves them to a suppressed alarm database, or downgrades their severities. Figure 5-16 shows the relationships between a root alarm and its correlative alarms. The alarm for high memory usage of a service causes the alarm for high memory usage and the alarm for high CPU usage. The alarm for high CPU usage causes the alarm for abnormal exit of the U2000 service. Therefore, the alarm for high memory usage of a service is the root alarm and the rest are the correlative alarms.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-23
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-16 Relationships between a root alarm and its correlative alarms
Transient alarm analysis/Repeated event analysis Transient alarms are the alarms that are cleared twice within the preset period. If transient alarms are reported continuously within a short period, the NE or services may be repeatedly switched between the normal state and the abnormal state. To resolve the problem in time, enable the transient alarm analysis to raise the alarm severity so that maintenance engineers will pay attention to the alarms. For example, if an alarm is reported and cleared repeatedly for five times within ten seconds, the U2000 changes the severity of the alarm to major. If the repeated alarms generated due to certain faults or under certain circumstances are redundant to maintenance engineers, lower the alarm severity, sort the repeated alarms, or directly mask these alarms. Repeated events are the events that are reported repeatedly within the preset interval. Alarms or events that are reported repeatedly within a short period due to certain faults may be redundant to maintenance engineers. For these alarms or events, you can set analysis rules for transient alarm and repeated events on the U2000. Then, the U2000 displays only the first repeated event or cleared transient alarm and discards the rest.
Alarm/Event frequency analysis Alarms of the same type that are generated within a period may be relevant to each other. After you enable the alarm/event frequency analysis, if the number of the same alarms generated within a period reaches a certain number, it can be concluded that those alarms are relevant to each other. After you set rules for the event/alarm frequency analysis, if the number of specified alarms generated within a specified period exceeds the preset threshold, it can be concluded that these alarms are relevant to each other. Then, the U2000 handles these alarms according to the preset method.
Analysis on duration of acknowledged but uncleared alarms Major alarms are normally cleared within 30 minutes after they are handled. If a major alarm is not cleared in 30 minutes after it is processed, further actions are required. To ensure that major alarms are handled in time, enable the analysis on duration of
5-24
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
acknowledged but uncleared alarms. If a major alarm is not cleared in 30 minutes after it is handled, the U2000 changes the severity of the alarm to critical. Enable this analysis function for the acknowledged alarms that are not cleared for a long time. The U2000 changes severities of the alarms to a higher level to remind maintenance engineers of handling the alarms in a timely manner. l Alarm Correlation on NEs Alarm correlation rules on NEs are an inherent alarm performance monitoring mechanism of a logical function block of an NE. These rules cannot be modified. Understanding the monitoring mechanism helps you to correctly analyze and identify faults, thus improving the maintenance efficiency. A root alarm is directly caused by an abnormal event or a fault on the network. A root alarm generally causes correlative alarms whose severities are lower. For example, when a fiber is cut, the SDH physical interface (SPI) functional module of an optical board detects the R_LOS alarm (root alarm). Then, the regenerator section termination (RST) function module of the regeneration section generates correlative alarms, such as the R_LOF, R_OOF, B1_SD, and B1_EXC. To prevent the generation of correlative alarms, you can set the preceding alarm correlation analysis rules and enable the alarm correlation analysis on the NE to suppress correlative alarms. In this manner, the NE reports only the root alarm R_LOS to the U2000. l Alarm Correlation on the NMS After you set alarm correlation analysis rules on the U2000 and enable the alarm correlation analysis, correlative alarms are masked.
CAUTION
l Alarm correlation analysis depends on alarm correlation rules. The rules will affect the analysis result. Exercise caution when setting the rules. l The default correlation analysis rules on the U2000 are recommended. l By default, the alarm correlation analysis is disabled. Manually enable this function if necessary.
Alarm Dumping and Acknowledgment

Alarm acknowledgment enables you to check whether alarms are handled according to the acknowledgment status of the alarms. Then, you can handle alarms in a timely manner. l l Alarm dumping: Automatic dumping and manual dumping of alarms are supported. Automatic dumping is classified into overflow dumping and periodic dumping. Alarm acknowledgment: Alarms can be acknowledged manually or automatically.
NOTE
Alarm logs can be saved in various formats, such as TXT, HTML, PDF, CVS, and XLS.
Alarm Synchronization
After communication between the U2000 and an NE recovers from an interruption, or the U2000 is restarted, some alarms on the NE are not reported to the U2000. The NE alarms on the U2000 are different from the actual alarms on the NE. In the case, you need to synchronize
5 Basic Functions
alarms. Manual synchronization of alarms ensures that the U2000 displays the current operating status of the NE correctly. The U2000 supports the function of synchronizing NE alarms manually or automatically. You can set the policy for automatic alarm synchronization. After you enable automatic alarm synchronization, the U2000 automatically synchronizes alarms to ensure alarm consistency between the U2000 and NEs after the communication between the U2000 and NEs recovers or the U2000 is restarted. Figure 5-17 shows the implementation of alarm synchronization. Alarms are synchronized according to the following rules: l l If an alarm is cleared from an NE but uncleared on the U2000, the alarm will be cleared from the U2000. If an alarm is present on an NE but absent on the U2000, the alarm will be added to the U2000.
Figure 5-17 Alarm synchronization
Alarm Redefinition
The U2000 allows you to redefine the severities of alarms on NEs according to the requirements. This function changes the alarm severity displayed on the U2000, highlighting only the required alarms.
Alarm Suppression
The U2000 supports the function of suppressing NE alarms. If you set the status of an alarm to Suppressed, the NE does not report the alarm. The difference between alarm suppression and alarm masking is as follows: If you enable alarm masking, an NE still reports the masked alarm but the U2000 does not receive the alarm. If you enable alarm suppression, the NE does not report the suppressed alarm. For details, see Figure 5-18.
5-26
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-18 Difference between alarm masking and alarm suppression
Various Alarm Notification Means

The U2000 provides various alarm notification means. It can notify maintenance engineers of alarms at any time from anywhere. Therefore, the maintenance engineers will locate and rectify faults quickly and effectively. The U2000 also supports two remote notification means: email and short message service (SMS). When a fault occurs in a network, the U2000 notifies non-onsite maintenance engineers of the fault. Then, the maintenance engineers will locate and rectify the fault promptly. l l Different filter criteria can be set to enable the U2000 to notify maintenance engineers of only the required alarms. For the alarms that are cleared within a period (a customized delay), the U2000 does not notify maintenance engineers of these alarms because they do not affect services any more.
Figure 5-19 shows the alarm notification means. Figure 5-19 Various alarm notification means
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-27
5 Basic Functions
Alarm Association
The U2000 supports the function of locating alarms, that is, associating alarms with the topological object (NE or NE panel) where the alarms are generated. This function improves fault locating efficiency. Figure 5-20 shows the alarm association function. Figure 5-20 Alarm association
Alarm association
Alarm source: NE, board, or port etc
Alarm Maintenance Experience Base

You can obtain the alarm handling information from the alarm maintenance experience base. This base is a database that stores alarm details. For details, see Figure 5-21.
5 Basic Functions
Alarm maintenance experience is summarized and recorded on the U2000 by users during maintenance. If a similar fault occurs, relevant alarm handling information is available in the base for reference to achieve quick and efficient alarm handling. By using the function of importing alarm/event maintenance experience, you can import the previously exported alarm/event maintenance experience to the U2000. By using the function of exporting alarm/event maintenance experience, you can export alarm/ event maintenance experience on the U2000 to a file. This makes it easier to view alarm/event maintenance experience in the file. Figure 5-21 Alarm maintenance experience base
Alarm Time Localization

The NE that reports an alarm and the U2000 may be in different time zones. For the correct alarm generation time, the U2000 automatically converts the alarm generation time (expressed in the NE time) into the local time of the U2000. The U2000 can display the time when an alarm is generated, acknowledged, cleared, or received as the local time of the U2000 client or server.
5.5 Performance Management

The performance of a network may deteriorate because of internal or external problems and faults may occur. The performance management function enables you to detect the deteriorating tendency in advance and solve the potential threats so that faults can be prevented.
Benefit
NMS provides performance monitoring functions to support performance management at both the NE level and the network level. By creating a performance instance, you can enable the NMS to collect performance data from network devices according to a specified period. l Monitoring NE performance. This function supports the monitoring of performance indicators at the NE level, including: CPU usage Memory usage Hard disk usage Total of online accesses
5 Basic Functions
Number of PPPoE online accesses Number of packets received or forwarded by devices l Monitoring network traffic. This function is used to collect the traffic statistics of network ports and is implemented by collecting the statistics of the following performance indicators: Inbound traffic Outbound traffic. Inbound bandwidth utilization Outbound bandwidth utilization Error Packet Rate l Monitoring SLA data. This function supports multiple types of SLA data monitoring and is implemented by monitoring the following performance indicators: Delay and loss ratio of ICMP, TCP, UDP, and SNMP packets between network nodes Delay, jitter, and loss ratio of packets between network devices Connection delay and download speed of Internet services such as the HTTP and FTP services l Collecting interface-based traffic and performance indicators. This function supports the collection of interface-based traffic in BGP/MPLSVPN, VPLS, and PWE3 services, and the collection of performance indicators such as delay, packet loss ratio, and jitter in the BGP/MPLS VPN SLA service. Setting performance thresholds. This function allows you to set the thresholds for specific performance indicators. The NMS also provides default global settings to facilitate batch configuration. You can set the following parameters: Upper and lower thresholds Trend thresholds Non-burst peak thresholds The NMS reports alarms when the values of some indicators are out of the set ranges l Maintaining data. With this function, you can perform the following operations: Storing performance statistics Dumping performance statistics Regularly compressing performance statistics
Process
The U2000 provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to monitor the key indicators of a network and provide statistics on the collected performance data. This facilitates network performance management.
5-30
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-22 Performance management process
Function Description
The following is a function description of performance module.
Performance Monitoring Template Management

Performance monitoring template: a collection of performance indicators. The indicators are included in various indicator groups. By setting a performance monitoring template, you can manage a performance monitoring task easily. The following table describes different types of performance monitoring templates. Table 5-5 Performance monitoring templates Template Data monitoring template Description A data monitoring template is a collection of indicators for collecting performance data. It may contain indicators and indicator groups for collecting performance data of network resources. In the case of network quality analysis (NQA) indicators, set certain service level agreement (SLA) parameters in the template and apply the parameters to data monitoring instances.
5-31
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Template TCA monitoring template
Description A threshold crossing alert (TCA) monitoring template is a collection of indicators with specified thresholds. It may monitor TCAs of the specified resources. TCAs are classified into upper threshold alarms and lower threshold alarms. Thresholds include the upper and lower thresholds for triggering and clearing alarms and the upper and lower alarm severities. In the case of NQA indicators, set certain SLA parameters in the template and apply the parameters to TCA monitoring instances.
Template-Based SLA Parameters

This function collects most SLA parameters into data templates and TCA templates. In this manner, you need not create SLA parameters when creating an instance, which improves operation efficiency.
Monitoring Instance Management

Instance: An instance consists of a resource and a template. By means of an instance, you can collect data of certain performance indicators of a resource. An instance is considered as one or more performance collection tasks. Task: A task is the minimum unit for performance collection. A task consists of a resource and an indicator group. The management of a task is implemented by management of an instance. Figure 5-23 shows the relationships between a template, an instance, and a task. Figure 5-23 Relationships between a template, an instance, and a task
Monitoring instances enable you to collect performance statistics on resources of specified equipment according to a preset monitoring template and schedule policy. One monitoring instance collects statistics on only one resource. A monitoring instance can be either a data monitoring instance or a TCA monitoring instance. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Create monitoring instances for resources, such as NEs, boards, ports, and links, and monitor the IP SLA of the PTN and third-party equipment.
5-32
5 Basic Functions
l l l l l l l l
Modify monitoring instances. Query monitoring instances. Suspend monitoring instances. Resume monitoring instances. Synchronize resources corresponding to monitoring instances. Query TCAs. Query the VPN SLA test result by means of a matrix. Control the management capability, that is, control the number of created monitoring instances by a license.
Schedule Policy Management

The schedule policy enables you to set the time segments and periods at which the data is collected. The schedule policy can be applied to resources when a monitoring instance is created or modified.
Viewing History Performance Data

You can collect the network performance data in a specified period to learn the network performance. History performance data provides reference data for predicting a performance change of the network. You can view the history performance data of a network in a graph, bar chart, or table, and save the performance data in different file formats.
NOTE
l The information displayed in a graph or bar chart can be saved in HTML, CSV, TXT, or PDF format. l The information displayed in a table can be saved in TXT, CSV, or HTML format.
In addition, you can compare the performance data in different periods in a graph or bar chart or compare the indicators of different resources in the same diagram.
Viewing Real-Time Performance Data

You can view real-time performance data in a table, graph, or bar chart, and save the performance data in different file formats.
NOTE
l The information displayed in a graph or bar chart can be saved in HTML, CSV, TXT, or PDF format. l The information displayed in a table can be saved in TXT, CSV, or HTML format.
Sorting Resources with Top N Performance

You can view resources with top N performance sorted by indicators, and the result will be refreshed in real time.
Sorting Resources with Top N Deteriorated Performance

You can sort resources with top N deteriorated performance by alarms of the resources.
5 Basic Functions
Query of Top N Deteriorated Resources

This function sorts resources by TCA duration according to the preset conditions, enabling you to locate the current deteriorated resources quickly. In addition, this function enables you to learn the health status of the entire network and solve problems accordingly.
Data Lifecycle Management

You can back up performance data to a specified storage medium manually or automatically when excessive performance data is saved in the database of the U2000. Data can be dumped in the following two ways: l l Automatic Dumping: Performance data is dumped automatically based on the preset parameters, such as different periods and the database usage. Manual Dumping: Performance data is dumped based on the user-defined conditions according to the dump type before the end date.
Monitoring Network Performance

You can view the performance data of NEs, interfaces, IP links, L2 links, static, tunnels, dynamic tunnels, and test cases on the same network through network grouping. In addition, you can perform various tests on a network, such as the tests of UDP jitter and FTP ping, to evaluate the quality of networks and services and analyze correlation between the quality of networks and services. l Creating a network group Associate the monitoring instances of resources of different types within the same network according to the customized grouping rules, such as an area-based rule or service-based rule. Then, you can browse and compare data easily. l Analyzing the interface performance trend After the network interface indicators are set, a performance trend analysis graph for either the current time, or 12 hours before and after the current time can be generated. The performance trend analysis graph helps you understand the general change trend of the interface performance in a timely manner. l Viewing the results of network monitoring test cases in a matrix You can view the results of network monitoring test cases in a matrix. In this manner, you can understand the information about network-related indicators, evaluate network performance, and analyze correlation between the indicators and network performance.
5.6 Inventory Management

The U2000 supports unified inventory management of physical resources and service resources on the entire network. On the U2000, you can quickly and clearly view information about various resources network-wide. The inventory information serves as a reference for service planning and expansion planning. l You can perform the following operations on the U2000: Maintain inventory information Query inventory information Collect statistics on resource inventories according to the preset statistical items
5 Basic Functions
Save inventory information to XLS, TXT, HTML, or CSV files Print inventory information l The U2000 supports auto-discovery of a new asset (such as a new device, board, etc). If an existing asset is updated, an NE icon would remind you of that the data on the U2000 is asynchronous with the data on the NE. With the U2000, you can quickly identify the causes of the data asynchronization.
Figure 5-24 shows the inventory management window of the U2000. Figure 5-24 Inventory management window and its functions
View inventory resources by type Collect statistics on inventory resources
Perform operations on inventory records
Table 5-6 Statistical items for resource inventory management Resource Telecommunic ations Room Rack Statistical Item Telecommunications Room Name, Relevant Station, Country, Province, City, Location, Room Number, Cabling Mode, Antistatic Floor or Not, Thickness of the Antistatic Floor (mm). Rack Name, Relevant Telecommunications Room, Rack Type, Height (mm), Width (mm), Depth (mm), Power Box Type, Voltage, Number of Batteries, Internal Battery or Not, Internal Power Supply or Not, Internal MDF or Not, Internal Transmission or Not, Number of Shelves . Shelf Name, Shelf Type, Relevant NE, Shelf ID, Software Version, Alias, Relevant Telecommunications Room, Relevant Rack, Shelf No., Equipment No.. NE Name, NE Type, NE IP Address, NE MAC Address, NE ID, Software Version, Physical Location, Create Time, Fiber/Cable Count, Run Status, Relevant Subnet, Relevant Subnet Path, Alias, Patch Version List. Board Name, Board Type, Relevant NE, NE Type, Shelf ID, Slot ID, Hardware Version, Software Version, Serial Number, Alias.
Shelf
NE
Board
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Resource Subboard
Statistical Item Subboard Name, Subboard Type, Slot Number, Sub-Slot Number, Relevant NE, Hardware Version, Software Version, Serial Number, Alias, Subboard Description, . Port Type, NE Type, Device Name, Frame, Slot, Port, Name. Port, Logical Card, Physical Card, Serial Number, CLEI Code, Part Number, Date of Manufacture, User Label. NE Type, Total Slot Number, Used Slot Number. Terminal Type, ONU Version, Amount. Name, Level/Capacity, Direction, Source NE, Source Port, Sink NE, Sink Port, Length, Attenuation, Fiber/Cable Type, Medium Type, Created on, Creator, Maintainer, Alarm Severity, Disabled Status. Alarm Severity, Link Name, Type of Borne Network Protocol, Source NE, Source Port, Source IP, Sink NE, Sink Port, Sink IP, Link Level, Link Rate, Up Band Width, Down Band Width, User Label. Name, NE Name, Description, IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, MAC Address, Type, Rate, Administrative Status, IPv4 Operating Status, IPv6 Enable Status, IPv6 Operating Status. OLT Device Name, Name, Optical Split, Used Optical Split, Idle Optical Split, Remaining Bandwidth.
Port Optical Module Slot Used Statistics ONU Fiber/Cable
Link
Router/Switch Interface PON Port Splitting Status
5.7 Log Management

Logs record the information about operations performed on the U2000 and important events that occur in the U2000. The U2000 allows administrators to query and save logs and collect statistics on logs periodically. This facilitates detection of unauthorized logins and operations and fault analysis. Specifically, by browsing and collecting statistics on logs, you can query the client from which a U2000 user logs in to the U2000 server and query the operations performed by the user after login. You can also dump and print logs. Logs also can record operations that the OSS performs on NEs through NBIs. Figure 5-25 shows the log management window and functions of the U2000.
5-36
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-25 Log management window and functions
Log Classification
The logs of the U2000 are classified into operation logs, system logs, security logs, and NE logs. The logs can be saved to TXT, HTML, CSV, PDF, and XLS files. l l l l l Operation logs record the non-security-related operations that users perform, such as creating a subnet and enabling or disabling the alarm sound. System logs record the operations that the U2000 automatically performs, such as scheduled tasks and system tasks. Security logs record the security-related operations that users perform, such as login, logout, lockout, and unlocking. NE Syslog operation logs record operation results of managed NEs. You can learn the operation logs of NEs on the U2000 client instead of from each NE. NE Syslog running logs record the operating information of NEs managed by the U2000. The U2000 obtains from NEs all Syslog running logs of NEs. You can browse the Syslog running logs of the managed NEs on the U2000 instead of from each NE.
Querying and Collecting Statistics on Logs

U2000 administrators can set query conditions to query logs by operation user, operation terminal, operation result, risk level, operation time, operation name, operation object, or a combination of all of the preceding items according to the requirements. The administrators can learn about the operations performed on the U2000 by the current user.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-37
5 Basic Functions
Forwarding Logs
l U2000 log forwarding: The U2000 can forward its operation logs to the Syslog server to save the operation information, which releases storage space on the U2000 server. The logs serve as a reference for maintenance. NE log forwarding: The U2000 can forward the information about various NEs in the format that complies with the system log protocol to the Syslog server. Then, U2000 administrators and maintenance engineers can view the status of NEs according to the importance of the NE information.
Dumping and Exporting Logs

The log dumping function enables you to delete the logs that are not required, automatically at a scheduled time or manually. This function prevents logs from occupying too much space. The log exporting function enables you to export logs to a file for logs viewing or fault locating. Figure 5-26 shows the window and functions of the U2000 for dumping and exporting logs. Figure 5-26 Window and functions of dumping and exporting logs
Dumping logs Operation logs, system logs, and security logs can be dumped periodically and automatically or dumped manually. The logs can also be dumped upon an overflow when the size of the logs exceeds the preset threshold. The U2000 provides only one default system task for each type of logs. You cannot delete the system tasks or create new dumping tasks. You can only modify the parameters of the system tasks. Dumped logs are saved to CSV or XML files. You can compress the files into a ZIP file. By default, logs are dumped to the $IMAP_ROOT/dump/ThresholdExport/ Log (Solaris/Linux) or %IMAP_ROOT%\dump\ThresholdExport\Log (Windows) path.
5-38
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
After the logs are dumped, they are deleted from the database to release the database space. l Exporting logs The U2000 provides only one default system task for each type of logs. You cannot delete the system tasks or create new exporting tasks. You can only modify the parameters of the system tasks. Exported logs are saved to CSV or XML files. You can compress the files into a ZIP file. By default, logs are exported to the $IMAP_ROOT/dump/fileint/syslogs (Solaris/ Linux) or %IMAP_ROOT%\dump\fileint\syslogs (Windows) path. After the logs are exported, they are not deleted from the database.
5.8 Database Management

Database management involves the management of NE databases and U2000 databases, and maintenance of data consistency between the U2000 and NEs.
NE Database Management
To ensure NE data security, the U2000 provides the functions of backing up and restoring NE data. In NE software management, you can back up and restore NE data on a server. l l Back up the NE database to a local or remote server in a manual or scheduled manner. Restore the NE database from a local or remote server.
You can use the system control and communication unit (SCC) or CF board on the NE to back up and restore the NE database for the transport access NEs. l l l Back up the NE database to the SCC board manually. Back up the NE database to the CF board manually or automatically. Restore the NE configuration data from the SCC board or CF board.
NMS Database Management

The database of the U2000 supports two types of storage files. One type is used to store data and the other type is used to store the logs that record the operating information of the database. To ensure data security, periodically back up the database. See Figure 5-27.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-39
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-27 NMS database management

NMS Database Storage Device Automatically Back Up Manually Back Up
All important system data are stored in the NMS database.

Alarm Configuration
Performance
Log
Security
The U2000 provides a database backup and restoration tool. The tool facilitates database maintenance and ensures the stability and security of the U2000. It provides the following NMS database management functions: l Back up the U2000 database to a local or remote server in the following ways: Immediate backup Scheduled backup through task scheduling l l Restore the U2000 database from a local or remote server. Dump data in the U2000 database, including logs (such as operation logs, system logs, security logs, and alarm/event logs) and other data (such as performance data). Manual dump Periodic dump l Import or export script files: Export the configuration data in the U2000 to script files, or import the configuration data to the U2000 from script files. The configuration upgrade wizard instructs users to restore the U2000 database by using the configuration data script that has been backed up. The functions of importing and exporting script files are applicable to only the PTN MSTP, WDM, and microwave NEs. Script files can be exported in a scheduled manner through task scheduling. The U2000 information about the MSTP and WDM NEs can be exported to a TXT file so that the information can be used by the MDS 6600. In addition, the U2000 can import a TXT file that contains the MDS 6600 data. l Initialize the U2000 database: Clear and initialize the U2000 database before restoring the database in the case where the database data is in disorder or damaged.
Keeping Data Consistency Between the U2000 and NEs

If the configuration data is not synchronous between the U2000 and the NE, the NE icon has a sign. The U2000 provides rich functions to ensure the security and consistency of the NE
5 Basic Functions
configuration data, such as the uploading, downloading, consistency check, synchronization, duplication, preconfiguration, and the initialization of the NE data on the U2000. l l l l Uploading: Data on NEs is reported to the U2000 to overwrite the NE data on the U2000. The data that is present on the U2000 but absent on NEs is not deleted. Downloading: The NE data on the U2000 is applied to the NEs to overwrite the data on the NEs. Consistency check: Check whether the NE data on the U2000 is consistent with the data on NEs. If it is inconsistent, synchronize or upload the NE configuration data. Synchronization: Upload the inconsistent data (including the conflicting data, and the data that is present on NEs but absent on the U2000) to the NE layer on the U2000. The data that is present both on the U2000 and NEs is not uploaded, and the data that is present on the U2000 but absent on NEs is not deleted. Duplication: When NEs are of the same type and of the same software version, if the configuration data of an NE to be configured is the same as that of a configured NE, you can configure the new NE by duplicating the data of the configured NE. Duplicating the NE data only changes the data on the U2000 and does not affect the data on the NE. To make the duplicated data take effect on the NE, you need to apply the configuration. Preconfiguration: The configuration data of an NE is saved only at the NE layer on the U2000 and does not affect the actual configuration data on the NE. The preconfiguration function is generally used for the large-scale service adjustment or expansion. Initialization of the NE data on the U2000: The NE data on the U2000 is deleted and the NE becomes unconfigured after the initialization.
NOTE
The PTN RTN, NA WDM, and NG WDM product series do not support preconfiguration and the downloading of configuration data. The U2000 provides more reliable functions, that is, the database package backup and restoration, to resolve the data restoration problem. This is because: l l The configuration data does not contain complete NE data. The complete data can be obtained by using the database package restoration function. During the downloading of configuration data, the U2000 converts the configuration data to the Qx interface information. Then, the data can be exchanged between the U2000 and the NE, but the efficiency is relatively low. In the database package restoration mode, databases are directly downloaded to the NE, which ensures a high efficiency. On the U2000, only one set of configuration data can be saved, but the database package can have many backup copies. Select the backup package as required.
5.9 NE Communication Parameter Management

The U2000 communicates with managed NEs successfully only after you correctly set the connection parameters of the U2000 and the managed NEs. You can query or set the following parameters on the U2000: l l l l Query and set the NE access protocol parameters. Manage the default access protocol parameters. Query and set the NE Telnet or STelnet parameters. Manage the Telnet or STelnet parameter template.
DCN management is applicable to PTN NEs. The U2000 communicates with NEs, and manages and maintains network nodes through a DCN network. In the DCN network, the U2000 and NEs are considered as nodes. These nodes are connected through Ethernet or data communications
5 Basic Functions
channel (DCC). In an actual network, the U2000 and NEs may be located at different floors of the same building or in different buildings or cities. Hence, the U2000 and NEs are usually connected through an external DCN network that consists of equipment such as switches and routers. Relatively, the DCN network between NEs is referred to as an internal DCN network. DCN management involves the following operations: l l l l l l l l Modify gateway NE (GNE) parameters. Change the GNE of a non-GNE. Set the secondary GNE of a non-GNE. Convert a GNE to a non-GNE. Convert a non-GNE to a GNE. Check the GNE switching status. Test the communication between the U2000 and a GNE. Check the network communication status.
5.10 DCN Management

DCN management is applicable to MSTP, WDM, microwave, submarine cable NEs. The U2000 communicates with NEs, and manages and maintains network nodes through a DCN network. In the DCN network, the U2000 and NEs are considered as nodes. These nodes are connected through Ethernet or data communications channel (DCC). In an actual network, the U2000 and NEs may be located at different floors of the same building or in different buildings or cities. Hence, the U2000 and NEs are usually connected through an external DCN network that consists of equipment such as switches and routers. Relatively, the DCN network between NEs is referred to as an internal DCN network. DCN management involves the following operations: l l l l l l l l Modify gateway NE (GNE) parameters. Change the GNE of a non-GNE. Set the secondary GNE of a non-GNE. Convert a GNE to a non-GNE. Convert a non-GNE to a GNE. Check the GNE switching status. Test the communication between the U2000 and a GNE. Check the network communication status.
5.11 NE Software Management

The NE software management module (called DC) is an independent subsystem of the U2000 and it is used to manage software and data on NEs. The DC enables you to back up NE data and upgrade or downgrade NE software. l l The DC implements the upgrade and downgrade of NEs in the following ways: Saving: After the system is configured, the data is saved in the memory of NEs. This feature saves the system configuration to the flash memory or hard disk of NEs. This prevents the loss of the configuration file in case of system restart. The DC saves data through:
5-42
5 Basic Functions
Saving operation (manual) Saving task (manual) Saving policy (automatic) l Backup: Backs up the configuration to storage devices other than NEs. The backup data is used for restoring the NE configuration. If the DC has the rights to manage the NE and no loading, backup, or restoration operation is being performed on the NE, the NE accepts the request for backup. The DC then transmits the contents for backup to the specified backup directory on the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server through FTP/TFTP/SFTP. The DC backs up data through: Backup operation (manual) Backup task (manual) Backup policy (automatic) l Loading: Loads software for the upgrade to an NE. If the DC has the rights to manage the NE and no loading, backup, or restoration operation is being performed on the NE, the NE accepts the request for loading. The DC then transmits the contents for loading to the NE through FTP/TFTP/SFTP. The DC loads data through: Loading operation (manual) Loading task (manual) Upgrading task (automatic) l Restoration: Restores NE data from the backup to an NE. If the DC has the rights to manage the NE and no loading, backup, or restoration operation is being performed on the NE, the NE accepts the request for restoration. The DC then transmits the contents for restoration to the NE through FTP/TFTP/SFTP. The DC restores data through the manual restoration operation. Policy and Task: The DC provides different methods for implementing features. For example, you can save and back up data through a policy or a task. A policy is periodic. It is mainly used for the operations that are performed frequently, such as data saving and data backup. A task is not periodic. It is mainly used for the operations that are not performed frequently, such as data upgrading and data loading. Users can select a method according to the actual situation.
5.12 Report Management

The U2000 provides reports about alarms, logs, and resources. You can print the required data or save the data as a file when viewing it. The reports in tabular format can be filtered by equipment type and saved in XLS, TXT, HTML, or CSV files. You can view reports on the U2000 in the following ways: l l Viewing resource reports on the U2000 client Viewing iWeb reports through the IE browser, including alarm reports, log reports, performance reports, and resource reports of equipment in the IP domain
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-43
5 Basic Functions
Table 5-7 Resource Report Type SDH statistics report Report Port statistics report Statistics report of SDH tributary port resources Statistics report of lower order cross-connections SDH fiber/cable or radio link resource usage report Statistics report of trails between SDH NEs Statistics report of SDH protection subnet resources Statistics report of SDH trail resources Microwave report Radio link report Microwave license capacity report MSTP Ethernet report Statistics report of Ethernet port resources Statistics report of services resources between Ethernet NEs WDM statistics report Report on WDM protection group switching status WDM NE master/slave shelf info report Statistics report of WDM client-side port resources Statistics report of WDM link resources Statistics report of inter-station wavelength resources Statistics report of WDM bandwidth resources WDM channel resource report Wavelength resource usage report xPON statistics report PTN statistics report Project document Report on PON port splitting status Interface resource report Board manufacturer information Export electronic labels Clock tracing diagram Networking diagram Timeslot allocation diagram
5-44
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5 Basic Functions
Resource Report Diagram

Figure 5-28 and Figure 5-29 show the diagrams of the NE-level resource report and the networklevel resource report. Figure 5-28 Diagram of the NE resource report
Display the NEs on NMS The resource report shows the statistical value of each parameter
The buttons for querying and setting parameters and the print and save buttons are displayed
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-45
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-29 Diagram of the network resource report

Display the NEs on NMS The resource report shows the statistical value of each parameter
The buttons for querying and setting parameters and the print and save buttons are displayed
iWeb Report
The iWeb report system provides a complete set of flexible and convenient services. It allows you to generate, distribute, and manage reports based on the Web. The powerful report system helps you to monitor, analyze, and improve network performance, and make decisions accordingly. The iWeb report system supports the following alarm and log reports: l l l l l Details report on equipment alarm severity distribution Report on equipment alarm severity distribution Equipment connectivity statistics report General alarm information report History change record report
For information on the functions of the iWeb report system, see 10.9 Report Subsystem Management.
5.13 System Monitoring

The U2000 provides a GUI-based system monitoring tool, which is used to manage the U2000 and query the system information. The function of managing system processes enables you to perform the following operations as shown in Figure 5-30.
5 Basic Functions
l l
Monitor the processes, databases and server information about the U2000 in real time. For the running status of the U2000 server, see System Information Monitoring. Start and stop processes automatically or manually. When the U2000 is started, all the processes start automatically. The U2000 restarts a process automatically if this process stops abnormally. Processes can be started or stopped manually as required.
Set the security communication mode.
Figure 5-30 System monitoring processes
System Information Monitoring The U2000 provides a GUI-based system monitoring function. Users can view the service process status and resource usage (such as the CPU, memory, hard disks, and database) of the U2000 in real time, and the running status of all the components installed on the U2000 server. When items monitored by the U2000 are abnormal, the corresponding status icons turn red. By default, the U2000 sets thresholds for certain monitored items such as the CPU usage and database usage. When a value of the monitored item reaches the corresponding threshold, the system sends an alarm and the corresponding status icon turns red. Users can modify the thresholds if necessary. The system monitoring tool of the U2000 also provides the function of querying system information, as shown in the following figure. l l l l l l Query process information. Query hard disk information. Query database information. Monitor the server. Query component information. Query operation logs.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
5-47
5 Basic Functions
Figure 5-31 System monitoring information
5-48
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
6 MSTP Network Feature Management
MSTP Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functional features of MSTP NE management and network management. 6.1 MSTP NE Management NE management refers to the management of configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, communication, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration data is saved to the database of the U2000 and to the database of the NE. 6.2 MSTP Protection Subnet Management A protection subnet is a network structure with the comprehensive self-protection function. In the U2000, the protection subnet is a generalized concept that includes not only the network structure with the comprehensive self-protection function, such as an MSP ring and a path protection (PP) ring, but also the network structure without the self-protection function, such as an unprotected ring and an unprotected chain. 6.3 E2E MSTP Management E2E network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data of E2E network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all the related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is faster and more convenient. 6.4 SDH ASON Management The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of optical network that integrates the exchange and transport functions. After a user initiates a service request, the ASON selects a route automatically, establishes and removes connections through the signaling control, and performs network connections automatically and dynamically. An ASON NE refers to the equipment that is equipped with both SDH and ASON features. An ASON is managed by the U2000 that combines ASON and SDH features.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
6-1
6.1 MSTP NE Management

NE management refers to the management of configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, communication, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration data is saved to the database of the U2000 and to the database of the NE.
Basic NE Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Modify NE attributes such as: NE name NE ID Extended NE ID Remarks NE pre-configuration
NOTE
For the NE whose ID needs to be set through the DIP switch, modify the NE ID on the U2000.
l l
Synchronize NE time: Align all NEs with the system time of the U2000 server automatically. Query physical resources in the following lists: NE list Board manufacturer information Board list Cabinet list Subrack list Equipment room list
l l
Use the board plug and play function: After a board is inserted into the slot, the NE Panel automatically displays the board icon and board information. Replace a board. You can replace a board with a board of another type on the U2000. Query the actual physical board type of a board that is used as a board of another type. The user can replace board A with board B whose rate and number of ports is the same or less as of board A.
Enable the function of automatically disabling the NE: periodically disable some NE functions that may affect services, such as loopback and automatic laser shutdown (ALS). When the time expires, these operations will stop automatically. Environment monitoring information. The following items can be set: PMU interface EMU interface CAU interface NE fan speed
Virtual NE management Create a virtual NE.
6-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Add a board. Create fibers between the virtual NE and other NEs. Create SDH services. Create protection subnets. Search for and create trails on the virtual NE. l l l l Support the replacement of the boards. Supports the management of inband DCN. Support graphical display of performance events relevant to the optical power. Create a board with adjustable bandwidth for a preconfigured NE.
Orderwire Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Set and query the orderwire phone numbers, call waiting time, and orderwire phone port availability. Set and query the network-wide conference call number. Set and query the length of the subnet ID and the related subnet of the optical interface. Configure and query the SDH network node interface (NNI) connection for orderwire. Configure and query the F1 data port. Configure and query the broadcast data port.
Board Protection Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure board 1+1 protection. Configure 1:N tributary protection switching (TPS) protection for a tributary board. Configure board level protection. Configure port protection. Query the data backup status between the active and standby SCC boards.
SDH Interface Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Interface board management: query and set the SDH interface boards installed on NEs. Set the parameters of SDH interfaces. Set the parameters of CES interfaces. Set the parameters of PDH interfaces. Modify the optical/electrical attributes of the port. Set overhead interfaces, including: Orderwire Hotline number Special line number Conference call number
Subnet number length F1 data port Broadcast data port Communication port Data port Out-ring route l l l Set the optical amplifier board interface. Manage the optical power of a board. Set tone and data access (TDA) interfaces, including: TDA clock source TDA power feeding l Query and set the overhead including: Regenerator section overhead (J0) Lower order path overhead (V5, J2) VC4 higher order path overhead (J1, C2) and its pass-through or termination VC3 higher order path overhead (J1, C2) l l l l l l l Enable the PRBS function. Enable the function of pre-alerts for the port optical power. Set and query the TUG structure in the transmit and receive directions. Perform lower order loopbacks. Query the in service (IS) port status and the out of service (OOS) port status of a line board or a data board. Manage the power consumption. Set and query the optical power threshold of a line board.
Configuration for SDH Services and Protection

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Configure VC12, VC3, or VC4 services and select protection groups for them. In the platform 4.0 equipment, select protection groups of these services. Manage Transmux services, including M13/E13 Transmux and M13/E13 Transmux Server services. Configure VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C, or VC4-64C concatenated service; bind or unbind services, and select protection groups for them. Configure other services: enterprise system connection (ESCON) services, 64 kbit/s services (including TDA board services, Nx64 kbit/s services), and DSL services. Manage subnetwork connection multiple protection (SNCMP) services. Activate or deactivate services. Manage subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) services. Manage subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP) services. Convert an SNCP service to a normal service or convert a normal service to an SNCP service.
6-4
Configure multiple multiplex section protection (MSP) rings at a single optical port. Configure multiple MSP rings by VC4 at an optical port to increase the usage of network resources. Configure REG. After the line board is set as REG, each pair of optical interfaces of the line board provides a special receive or transmit function. Through the internal switch, the SDH signals from the receiving optical interface are sent out directly to the corresponding transmitting optical interface after passing through the regenerator section layer and being amplified. The REG function is completely implemented by the board without the cooperation of the SCC board and a cross-connect board. Query the capacity of higher order and lower order cross-connections on an NE.
Configuration for ATM Interfaces, Services, and Protection

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Query and configure the ATM interface board on an NE. Query the bandwidth of ATM board. Set the parameters for an ATM interface. Configure ATM traffic. Configure ATM cross-connections. Create a network to network interface (NNI) on the ATM processing board. Configure ATM cross-connections. Configure ATM protection groups. Configure ATM protection pairs. Configure ATM services from ATM board to SDH line. Activate or deactivate ATM cross-connections. l l Configure ATM bound path. Perform ATM operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). Set or query the section-end attribute of a connection point. Set or query the continuity check (CC) activation status of the connection point. Perform a remote loopback test. Set or query the NE loopback location identifier (LLID). Upload, download, duplicate the OAM data of the NE or perform the related consistency check. l Configure an inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) group.
Configuration for Ethernet Interfaces and Services

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Query and configure the Ethernet interface board on an NE. Configure fast Ethernet transparent transmission board. Set the parameters of the Ethernet internal interfaces, including: Basic attributes TAG attributes
Network attributes Encapsulation/mapping Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Bound path Advanced attributes l Configure the parameters of the external ports of Ethernet interface, including: Basic attributes Flow control TAG attributes Network attributes Advanced attributes l l l Configure point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT. Configure E-Line services, including Ethernet private line (EPL) and Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL). Create a new service and configure a bound path. Configure Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services. Create a new virtual bridge (VB) and configure the following parameters: service mount, VLAN filtering table, VLAN unicast, MAC address disabling, bound path, self-learning MAC address, VB port MAC address table capacity, and VLAN MAC address table capacity. Configure the parameters of Ethernet Layer-2 switching, including: Aging time Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP snooping protocol l Configure QinQ service: QinQ is an embedded technology in VLAN, and tags users with multi-layer VLAN ID, so that VLAN can be extended. Perform operations such as adding, stripping and exchanging of tags in different scenarios. Configure Ethernet link aggregation group (LAG), which contains intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG. Create or delete an LAG. Add or delete LAG ports. Query LAG ports and aggregation state. l Configure the parameters of quality of service (QoS), including: Flow configuration CAR configuration CoS configuration Flow shaping management Port shaping management Differentiated service (DiffServ) domains CAR policy Port WRED Policy V-UNI ingress policy V-UNI egress policy
PW policy Weighted random early detection (WRED) congestion and discarding policy of services QinQ policy Weighted fair queuing (WFQ) schedule policy CoS queue scheduling priority mapping l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Test frame receiving and transmitting on Ethernet boards, including the EGT, EFT, EGS, EFS and EMS boards. Query the opposite NE of the data services on these boards. Use QoS template to simplify the QoS configuration for Ethernet services. Enable the automatic reporting function of RMON performance of Ethernet boards. Support the dumping of history RMON performance of Ethernet boards. Support the protocol diagnosis function. Support the alarm function in the case of no traffic at Ethernet ports. Support the Ethernet port mirroring. Set and query the MAC address of a data board. Support the traffic statistics function at a port. Support traffic monitoring and report for an Ethernet port. Allow the board to respond to the ping command. Create flows in batches. Support the ability to manage multi-protocol label switching (MPLS). The MSTP equipment builds a label switched path (LSP) with a PE router, identifies LSP labels and service priorities, and encapsulates LSPs into virtual concatenation groups (VCGs) for transmission. Configure the static routes and address resolution. Configure E-Line services, E-LAN services, E-AGGR services, and clock services.
l l
RPR Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Modify resilient packet ring (RPR) node information. Set and query the node information of an NE in the RPR. Set the RPR link information of an NE. Query the topology of the RPR that the NE belongs to. Query the protection status, switching status, and switching position of the RPR that an NE belongs to. Configure forced switching, manual switching, or clear switching in the RPR that an NE belongs to.
Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Query the clock synchronization status. Set the clock source priority tables, including:
System clock source priority list Priority table for phase-locked sources of 1st external clock output Priority table for phase-locked sources of 2nd external clock output l Set clock source switching, including: Clock source restoration parameters Clock source switching condition Clock source switching l Configure clock subnets, including: Clock subnet Clock quality Synchronization status message (SSM) output control Clock ID status l Set phase-locked sources output by external clock, including: External clock output phase-locked source 2 Mbit/s phase-locked source external clock attributes
IEEE 1588 Packet Clock

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Configure the selection mode of a frequency source. Set the PTP clock source port. Set the quality level of the clock source. Set the PTP clock source priority. Configure a PTP clock service. Set the clock interface configuration. Set the external clock interface configuration.
Ethernet OAM Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 for configuring the 802.1ag Ethernet OAM: l l l l l l Create and configure maintenance nodes. Perform a continuity check (CC) check. Perform a loopback (LB) check. Perform a link trace (LT) check. Perform a ping test. Perform performance detection.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 for configuring the 802.3ah Ethernet OAM: l l Query remote OAM parameters. Set link monitoring parameters. This function helps to detect the events of frame error, frame error period, and frame error seconds.
6-8
l l
Perform a remote loopback test. Enable the reporting of Ethernet OAM loopback events.
Peform OAM management for MPLS tunnels.
MPLS Tunnel Protection Group Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 for configuring an MPLS tunnel protection group: l l l Create an MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection group and an MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group, including the switching mode, return mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, and hold-off time. Perform MPLS tunnel protection switching. Query the protection switching status of an MPLS tunnel.
MS PW Configuration
By creating a multi-segment pseudowire (MS-PW) to transmit services, tunnel resources and transmit services over different networks can be saved.
CES Service Configuration

CES is mainly used for service transparent transmission of TDM trail switching data in the PTN network. You can perform the following operations on the U2000 for configuring CES services: l l l l l l Create the corresponding PW when creating a CES service. Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI CES services. Create CES services of structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and of structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). Configure QoS of the CES service. Configure CES service alarm transparent transmission. Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online.
MSTP Configuration
The MSTP can be used to clear loops in a network. The MSTP uses a specific algorithm to block some redundant trails and change a loop network to a non-loop tree network. This function prevents packet increase in a loop network and generation of broadcast storms in an endless cycle. Different from the STP and RSTP, the MSTP can forward data according to VLAN packets and achieve load balance of VLAN data. You can perform the following operations on the U2000 for configuring the following MSTP attributes: l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure parameters of port groups and bridges. Configure CIST and MSTI parameters. Query CIST status and MSTI status.
OSPF Protocol Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 by using OSPF protocol as the network protocol: l l l Manage the OSPF routes and set relevant parameters. Enable or disable port-level OSPF and LSA. Import static routes.
CES ACR Clock

CES ACR (Adaptive Clock Recover) is based on CES services and recovers the clock of the source at the sink in adaptive mode. The sink equipment can recover the TDM clock (in FIFO mode) according to the change in the buffer for receiving CES services (the change is caused by the packets received on the NNI side).
Packet Function
Implement the packet functions, such as the PW OAM, PW APS, MCSP, MC LAG, MS PW, CES, and bidirectional tunnel.
6.2 MSTP Protection Subnet Management

A protection subnet is a network structure with the comprehensive self-protection function. In the U2000, the protection subnet is a generalized concept that includes not only the network structure with the comprehensive self-protection function, such as an MSP ring and a path protection (PP) ring, but also the network structure without the self-protection function, such as an unprotected ring and an unprotected chain. To perform protection subnet management, the relevant license is required. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Create protection subnets of different types. Linear MSP: 1+1 and M:N. MSP ring: two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, two-fiber unidirectional MS dedicated protection ring, and four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring. PP ring: two-fiber unidirectional PP ring and two-fiber bidirectional PP ring. Dual node connection (DNI) protection. Non-protection (NP) ring and NP chain. l l l l l Search for a protection subnet according to the information of NEs and fibers or cables, to form a complete protection subnet. Transfer an NP chain to a 1+1 linear MSP without interrupting services. Start or stop the MSP protocol of the MSP subnet, such as enabling or disabling the MSP protocols network-wide or the MSP protocol for a single node. Support the automatic generation of the services on the protection channel according to the services on the working channel. Adjust the bandwidth dynamically. To be specific, you can dynamically adjust the MSP bandwidth according to the service demands and how the network bandwidth is used currently to improve the utilization of network bandwidth. For example, for an STM-16
6-10
MSP of an 8 x VC4 bandwidth, if the 6 x VC4 bandwidth is enough, then change the protection bandwidth from 8 x VC4 to 6 x VC4 bandwidth and save 4 x VC4 for the use of non-MSP-protected services. l Expand the capacity of an MSP ring and a linear MSP chain. To be specific, you can expand the link capacity by replacing the line boards on both sides of the link without interrupting active services. For example, upgrade an STM-16 MSP ring to STM-64 smoothly. Change the revertive mode of linear MSP protection without restarting the protocol. Expand and add nodes to multiple types of protection subnets, including MSP, SNCP, PP, NP ring, NP chain and their combinations. Query the names, types and status of all protection subnets. Query and set the switching status, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, and the trigger condition of the protection subnet. Query all the isolated nodes and delete useless nodes. Set and view SDH NNIs. Query the relevant trail by protection subnet. Manage the entire RPR ring network. To be specific, you can create, delete, and search for an RPR ring; you can manage the RPR ring protection parameters and link parameters. RPR ring topology can be displayed through a view. Generate the MSTP protection subnet report to facilitate the statistics and maintenance of the protection subnets.
l l l l l l l l
6.3 E2E MSTP Management

E2E network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data of E2E network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all the related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is faster and more convenient. To perform E2E network management, the relevant licenses is required.
MSTP Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Create and maintain an SDH trail. Create an SDH trail, designate a timeslot, and select the protection priority strategy and the resource usage strategy. The service levels include VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4 server trail, VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C and VC4-64C. Activate or deactivate, and lock or unlock an SDH trail. Join or split, and enable or disable a VC4 server trail. During search of SDH trails, the U2000 retains the attributes of the existing ones as they are. Upgrade an SDH trail to an ASON trail. Downgrade an ASON trail to an SDH trail. Query the service status on a per-NE basis according to SDH trails.
Manage optical power: Query the input power, output power, and power thresholds for SDH boards. Set and query the overhead bytes of all NEs on the trail, such as the trace byte. The U2000 prompts users to configure trace bytes when timeslot out-of-sequence occurs to the MS. Query the status of a lower order service. Set overhead pass-through or termination for all NEs on the trail. Insert alarms such as AIS and remote defect indication (RDI) into the trails at the VC4 level. Set loopback on any nodes on a trail, including VC4 loopback, tributary loopback, optical interface loopback and cross-connection loopback. Perform a PRBS test on a trail. Modify the add/drop ports on a trail and the timeslots occupied by the trail without interrupting services. Adjust the original route partially by changing the NE, board or timeslot that the trail passes through. Modify the route for concatenated services without interrupting services. Set SNCP switching on a trail. Implement the function of automatically generating dually-fed SDH services for 1+1 linear MSP. Duplicate an SDH trail so that SDH trails can be created in batches. Duplicate an SDH trail that is configured with DNI protection, so that SDH trails can be created in batches. Manage discrete SDH services, such as querying or analyzing discrete services. Analyze the connectivity of an SDH trail and locate a fault of an SDH trail. View the usage of VC12 or VC3 trails related to a VC4 server trail in graphical format, and the information about the VC12 or VC3 trails. Convert SDH discrete cross-connections to a mono nodal trail. Manage SDH trails based on permissions and domains. Search for fibers on an SDH trail. l Manage the alarms and performance events related to an SDH trail. Configure alarm suppression or alarm reversion for a trail. Query current and history alarms, current and history performance data, unavailable time (UAT) and performance threshold-crossing records of an SDH trail. Set performance parameters for an SDH trail. Query the SDH trails and customer information affected by an alarm. Display R_LOS alarms in the Transmission Media Layer Route view. l Search for trails. Based on the NE configuration data at the NE layer, and the fiber connection data and protection subnet information at the network layer, the U2000 generates the network layer information about E2E trails. Name trails automatically. Filter trails in three ways. Filter all: Filter all trails and display only the qualified trails.
l l
Secondary filter: Filter those trails that are already displayed according to the filter criteria. Incremental filter: Filter all trails and display the newly qualified trails together with the currently displayed ones.
Ethernet Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Create and maintain an Ethernet trail. Create trunk links at VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4C, VC4-8C and VC4-16C levels. Create an unterminated trunk link. Create an Ethernet trail. The service includes EPL, EVPL, unterminated EPL, EPLAN, EVPL based on QinQ, EVPL based on RPR and EVPLAN based on RPR. Create a protection Ethernet trail that has one source and dual sinks. Create an Ethernet trail that belongs to multiple VLANs.
NOTE
For release 4.0 NEs (version 4.bb.cc.dd), the SDH NNI needs to be created on Ethernet line boards.
l l l l l
Activate or deactivate an Ethernet trail. During search of Ethernet trails, the U2000 retains the attributes of the existing ones as they are. Manage discrete Ethernet services, such as querying or analyzing discrete services. Search for an Ethernet trail. Filter trails in three ways. Filter all: Filter all trails and display only the qualified trails. Secondary filter: Filter those trails that are already displayed according to the filter criteria. Incremental filter: Filter all trails and display the newly qualified trails together with the currently displayed ones.
Manage the alarms and performance events related to an Ethernet trail. Query the Ethernet trails and customer information affected by an alarm. Query current and history alarms related to an Ethernet trail. Implement the RMON performance function for an Ethernet trail.
ATM Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Create and maintain an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) trail. Create an ATM trunk link. Create an ATM trail. Activate or deactivate an ATM trail. Manage ATM discrete services, such as querying or analyzing discrete services. Search for an ATM trail. l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Manage the alarms and performance events related to an ATM trail.

Query the ATM trails and customer information affected by an alarm. Query the current and history alarms related to an ATM trail. l Filter trails in three ways. Filter all: Filter all trails and display only the qualified trails. Secondary filter: Filter those trails that are already displayed according to the filter criteria. Incremental filter: Filter all trails and display the newly qualified trails together with the currently displayed ones.
Management of Packet Services

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Manage PWE3 services. Create an ETH PWE3 service or a CES PWE3 service. Predeploy a PWE3 service. Implement the function of automatically discovering PWE3 services. Modify and delete PWE3 services, and filter PWE3 services to view the desired services. Manage multi-hop PWE3 services. Manage the protection of PWE3 services. View the topology of PWE3 services. View the alarms of a PWE3 service. View the performance of a PWE3 service. Manage discrete PWE3 services. Manage PWE3 services based on permissions and domains. Create PWE3 services by using the duplication function. Manage PWE3 service templates. Implement the function of automatically generating Ethernet OAM for PWE3 services. Set loopback and view the loopback status. l Manage tunnels. Create a tunnel based on the static CR protocol. Predeploy a tunnel. Implement the function of automatically discovering tunnels. Modify and delete tunnels, and filter tunnels to view the desired tunnels. View the topology of tunnels, including working routes and protection routes. View the alarms of a tunnel. View the performance of a tunnel. View the results of testing and checking a tunnel. Manage discrete tunnels. Create, modify, and delete 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups, and implement the function of automatically discovering 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups. Manually switch 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups.
View the topology of a 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection group. Configure OAM. View the tunnel names in the global LSP view. Manage bidirectional tunnels. l Manage VPLS services. Create a VPLS service. Predeploy a VPLS service. Implement the function of automatically discovering VPLS services. Modify and delete VPLS services, and filter VPLS services to view the desired services. Manage VPLS services. View the topology of VPLS services. View the alarms of a VPLS service. View the performance of a VPLS service. Manage discrete VPLS services. Manage VPLS services based on permissions and domains. Manage VPLS service templates. Implement the function of automatically generating Ethernet OAM for VPLS services. Set loopback and view the loopback status. l Manage E-AGGR service. Create an E-AGGR service. Predeploy an E-AGGR service. Implement the function of automatically discovering E-AGGR services. Modify and delete E-AGGR services, and filter E-AGGR services to view the desired services. View the topology of an E-AGGR service. View the alarms of an E-AGGR service. View the performance of an E-AGGR service. Manage discrete E-AGGR services. Manage E-AGGR services based on permissions and domains. Manage E-AGGR service templates. Configure OAM. Set loopback and view the loopback status. l Manage composite services. Manage composite services in the scenarios where an EPL service accesses a PWE3 service, a PWE3 service accesses another PWE3 service, and a PWE3 service accesses an E-AGGR service. Modify and delete composite services, and filter composite services to view the desired services. Implement the function of automatically discovering composite services. View the topologies of composite services and the internal connections between composite services.
View the status of composite services.
Network Expansion and Service Handover Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Expand a PTN by adding nodes, deleting nodes, and upgrading or adjusting link capacities. Implement the handover of PWE3 trails at present. Prepare a manual or automatic service handover plan. Prepare a service handover plan by using either the rollback handover policy or the besteffort handover policy. Hand over, restore, and verify the trails of handover groups in batches. Create and modify handover groups and handover plans, and delete handover groups and handover plans in batches. Create and delete active and preconfigured services in handover groups.
Clock Topology Management

The U2000 provides the following functions: l l l Supporting the IEEE 1588 V2, SDH, and synchronous Ethernet clocks Displaying the clock trace relationship Displaying the clock alarm status
6.4 SDH ASON Management

The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of optical network that integrates the exchange and transport functions. After a user initiates a service request, the ASON selects a route automatically, establishes and removes connections through the signaling control, and performs network connections automatically and dynamically. An ASON NE refers to the equipment that is equipped with both SDH and ASON features. An ASON is managed by the U2000 that combines ASON and SDH features.
ASON Topology Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l
6-16
Discover ASON topologies and resources automatically. Synchronize NEs in a domain: The U2000 can obtain the topology of the network through the active NE. Set an account and a password for NE management, and implement the function of automatically uploading the configuration data of NEs that are already created. Set the active and standby NEs. Synchronize cross-connections for NEs. Manage domains, including creating and deleting domains, and changing the domain name. Query the ASON NE software version. Search for ASON discrete signaling. Manage the node IDs of ASON NEs.
l l
Enable or disable the optical virtual private network (OVPN) status of the NE. Query SRGs relevant to an NE.
Control Link Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Synchronize network-wide control links. Filter links by domain or source/sink information. View control links. Query the current alarm and history alarm about a control link. Set alarm suppression for a control link. Customize whether to display the color of alarms in the SDH Control Link Management window. Print or save the report list about control links information.
Component Link Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Synchronize network-wide component links. Filter component links by domain or source/sink information. View component link information. Create component links. Delete component links. Set resources reservation. Query VC4 timeslot usage status. Query link timeslot segmentation. Print or save the report list about component links information.
TE Link Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Synchronize network-wide traffic engineering (TE) links by domain. Filter TE links by domain, source/sink information or OVPN customer. View TE links. Create virtual TE links. Delete virtual TE links. Create fibers. Set the distance for a TE link. Set the risk link group number. Create a link resource report. View bandwidth usage. Allocate TE links to an OVPN customer.
l l l l l l l
Query the alarms of a TE link. Set alarm suppression for a TE link. Query the performance of a TE link. View the interrupted TE links. Query SRGs relevant to a TE link. Customize the cost for a TE link. Query the affected TE links according to control plane alarms.
ASON Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Filter ASON services by actual route, original route or shared mesh restoration trail. Synchronize ASON trails by domain or basic attributes. View ASON trails. View the details of an ASON trail. Create an ASON server trail of the diamond, gold, silver, or copper class. Create an ASON trail of the diamond, gold, silver, copper or iron class. Set the OVPN customer of an ASON trail. Activate or deactivate ASON trails or SDH ASON server trails. Delete inactive SDH ASON trails or inactive SDH ASON server trails. Delete SDH ASON trails or SDH ASON server trails on the NMS side. Duplicate ASON trails. Optimize ASON trails. Pre-calculate and optimize service trails. Set routing attributes of ASON trails, including rerouting lockout status, revertive lockout status, rerouting priority, rerouting revertive mode, WTR time, schedule revertive time, rerouting policy, trigger condition, crankback and rerouting triggered by B3 bit error. Query the rerouting reversion status of a revertive ASON trail. Create the associated trails with a same initial node or different initial nodes. Set association for ASON trails. Remove association for ASON trails. Set the association source for ASON trails. Query the related SDH trails for ASON trails. Set a preset restoration trail for an ASON trail. Downgrade an ASON trail to an SDH trail. Migrate a trail without interrupting services. View the actual route, original route or associated route of an ASON trail. View the preset restoration trail or shared mesh restoration trail of an ASON trail. Revert ASON trails manually. Switch the working or protection trail of a diamond trail manually. View the alarms of an ASON trail.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
6-18
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Set alarm suppression for the selected ASON trail. View the control plane performance of an ASON trail. View the performance events of an ASON trail. Create the ASON trail report. Refresh the original route, actual route or associated route of an ASON trail. Refresh the preset restoration trail or shared MESH restoration trail for an ASON trail. Set an actual route as an original route. Restore to the original route in batches. Set names for ASON trails in batches according to the naming rules. Query the service level agreement (SLA) conformity of ASON trails. View actual routes of gold services after MSP switching. Save the attributes of the service after you create an ASON service successfully. Restore the default attributes of an ASON service when you create the ASON service. Set SNCP access to an ASON trail. Manage creators of SDH ASON trails. Reroute the preset SDH ASON restoration trail in case of a fault. Implement the function of automatically refreshing routes after a diamond trail protection switching. Set the associated route attribute of the associated ASON trails.
UNI Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Synchronize UNI services by domain. View the information about a UNI service. Filter UNI services by domain or source/sink information. Deactivate a UNI service. Delete a UNI service.
ASON Clock Subnet Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Create an ASON clock subnet. Create a preconfigured ASON clock subnet. Convert a preconfigured ASON clock subnet into an ASON clock subnet. Convert a traditional clock subnet into an ASON clock subnet. Manage a hybrid network composed of an ASON clock subnet and a traditional clock subnet. Manage the startup time for the SDH ASON clock recovery.
SRG Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000:
l l
Create, delete and modify an SRG. Manage SRGs of the pipe type, fiber type, NE type, site type, and customized type.
One-End Terminated ASON Server Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Create and delete a one-end terminated ASON server trail. Activate and deactivate a one-end terminated ASON server trail. Associate one-end terminated ASON server trails. Create and delete an ASON-SDH trail that contains one-end terminated ASON server trails. Activate and deactivate an ASON-SDH trail that contains one-end terminated ASON server trails. Search for an ASON-SDH trail that contains one-end terminated ASON server trails. Set association relationships between the ASON trails that have different sources and sinks.
Integration of SDH and ASON Trails

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l Specify the explicit route for ASON services when creating an ASON-SDH trail. That is, an ASON-SDH trail includes an SDH trail and an ASON trail. View SDH and ASON trails at the same time in the SDH Trail Management window. Manage overhead bytes, alarms and performance of an ASON-SDH trail in a unified manner. Query the related ASON trails by an SDH trail. Query the related SDH trails by an ASON trail. Downgrade an ASON trail to an SDH trail. Upgrade an SDH trail to an ASON trail. Set the revertive attributes when an SDH trail is being migrated to an ASON trail. Create dually fed and selectively received VC4 ASON server trails. Calculate working and protection routes using the SPC first policy. The alarm in the ASON section of an ASON-SDH trail supports the alarm statistics function.
Script Export and Import for Simulated Network Planning Information

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Export the scripts of the simulated network planning information, including the networkwide configuration file, NE configuration file, network layer information file, ASON information file, TE link information, associated ASON service information, route calculation policy, component link information, ASON resource reservation information, WTR time information, preset restoration trails and route calculation policy for nodes. Import the scripts of the simulated network planning information.
ASON NE Catastrophe Restoration

The U2000 supports an ASON NE catastrophe restoration scheme.
SDH ASON Management on a Per-NE Basis

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Manage the ASON features of NEs. Manage IDs of ASON NEs. Manage the ASON feature of boards. Manage control plane parameters, including the bandwidth occupancy (%), bandwidth weight, distance weight, hop weight, and customized cost weight. In addition, the route selection policy is supported. Manage control channels. Query LMP component links. Query LMP TE links. Set the LMP auto discovery mode. Manage fiber resource thresholds. Query OSPF control links. Query OSPF SDH TE links. Query OSPF component links. Manage OSPF IP addresses. Manage OSPF TE link flood thresholds. Manage OSPF protocol authentication. Manage ASON trail groups. Query ASON trails. Maintain SDH ASON signaling. Maintain SDH ASON switch controllers. Maintain ASON shared mesh switch controllers. Manage the auto-reporting status of control plane alarms. Manage the levels and suppression status of control plane alarms. Manage control plane performance parameters. Query the performance of the control plane. Manage resource reservation. Manage the VC4 timeslot occupation status. Manage the virtual interfaces of ASON links. Manage the inactive PPPoE interfaces.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
6-21
7 WDM Network Feature Management
WDM Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functions and features of WDM NE management and network management. 7.1 WDM NE Management NE management refers to management of the configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration object is a single NE. The data is saved to the NE database on the U2000 and the NE database on the NE. 7.2 WDM NA NE Management NE management includes setting of attributes and configuration of communication, services, protection, and clocks on a per-NE basis. The configuration data is saved at the NE layer on the U2000 and in the database of the NE. 7.3 WDM Protection Subnet Management A protection subnet is a network with holistic self-protection. On the U2000, the protection subnet is a general concept that refers to not only a network with holistic self-protection, such as a multiplex section protection (MSP) ring or a path protection (PP) ring, but also a network without self-protection, such as an unprotected ring or an unprotected chain. 7.4 End-to-End WDM Management End-to-end network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data about end-to-end network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is quicker and more convenient. 7.5 WDM ASON Management The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of optical network that integrates switch and transport functions. After a user initiates a service request, the ASON selects a route automatically, establishes and disconnects connections by using signaling control, and establishes network connections automatically and dynamically. An ASON NE refers to the equipment that is enabled with both WDM and ASON features. An ASON network is managed by the U2000 that combines ASON and WDM features.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
7-1
7.1 WDM NE Management

NE management refers to management of the configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration object is a single NE. The data is saved to the NE database on the U2000 and the NE database on the NE.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Synchronize NE time: Send the computer system time, NTP server time, or standard NTP server time at the U2000 server to all NEs for synchronizing the NE time. You can set the U2000 to automatically synchronize the NE time by specifying the automatic synchronization period. Query the physical inventory information, including information about the telecommunications rooms, racks, NEs, shelves, boards, and ports. Implement the board plug and play feature: After a board is inserted into a slot, the NE Panel automatically displays the board and the board information. Disable NE functions automatically: You can set the time when the U2000 automatically disables certain NE functions that may affect services. At the time specified, these functions are automatically disabled. Modify the following NE attributes: NE name NE ID Extended NE ID Remarks NE pre-configuration l Modify the following attributes of an optical NE: Name Remarks Resources assigned l l Manage environment monitoring information: You can set the PMU interface, NE fan speed, temperature monitoring, and voltage monitoring. Manage network operator information: You can set the information about the network operator, including the international identifier, domestic identifier, and user-defined identifier. Search for and create NEs by discovering NE IP addresses automatically.
l l l
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l
7-2
Set a board as an orderwire board and query the orderwire board information. Set and query the orderwire phone numbers, call waiting time, dialing mode, and orderwire phone port availability. Set and query network-wide conference call numbers.
l l l l l
Set and query the subnet number length and the related subnet of an optical interface. Set and query an NNI orderwire phone. Set and query an F1 data port. Set and query a broadcast data port. Set E1 cross-connections.

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l Configure Ethernet port mirroring. You can monitor packets, perform routine maintenance and in-service commissioning through a mirrored port in a flexible manner. Set the following attributes of an internal Ethernet interface: Basic attributes Flow control Tag attributes Network attributes Bound path Advanced attributes l Set the following attributes of an external Ethernet interface: Basic attributes Flow control Tag attributes Network attributes Advanced attributes l Configure E-Line services such as Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) (QinQ), and VLAN subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) services.
NOTE
l QinQ is a VLAN embedding technique that employs multi-layer VLAN IDs to identify different users. In this manner, VLAN resources are expanded. The U2000 supports the function of adding labels. l A VLAN SNCP service is a VLAN-based E-Line service that is configured with SNCP protection. You can create VLAN SNCP and QinQ VLAN SNCP services, and perform conversion between a VLAN SNCP service and a common Ethernet service.
Configure Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services: You can create a virtual bridge (VB) and set parameters including service mounting, VLAN filtering, VLAN unicast, MAC address disablement, bound path, and MAC address automatic learning. Set the following parameters for QoS: Flow CAR CoS Flow shaping Port shaping
Configure link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS): LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping desired services, so as to satisfy different
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
bandwidth requirements of services. In this manner, bandwidth utilization and robustness of virtual connections are improved. l l l l l l l l l l Configure OAM for Ethernet services. Configure OAM for Ethernet ports. Configure the intra-board LAG function. Configure the inter-board LAG function. Configure the VLAN group function. Configure port MAC address filtering. Test frames received and transmitted on Ethernet boards. Configure the protocol diagnosis function. Configure the QinQ type area. Configure the following attributes for Ethernet Layer 2 switching: Aging time Spanning tree IGMP snooping protocol l Configure the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP): MSTP is compatible with STP and RSTP, and it also addresses the defects of STP and RSTP. MSTP supports fast convergence. In addition, MSTP provides multiple redundancy trails for data forwarding, implementing load balancing of VLAN data during data forwarding. Configure MPLS tunnels: On a PSN network, an MPLS tunnel carries pseudo wires (PWs) where various services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently transmitted among NEs. You can dynamically adjust the required number of virtual containers for service mapping so as to adapt to the requirements for different service bandwidths, at the same time improving bandwidth utilization and robustness of virtual concatenations. Configure link-state pass through (LPT): LPT is used to return the remote-end link status to the near end. The near-end equipment performs operations depending on the remote-end link status. The Ethernet board periodically monitors the network to learn the Ethernet status. When the connection status of Ethernet ports changes due to a link fault, you can use the LPT function to quickly switch services from the working route to the protection route between the two ends. The LPT feature protects transmission of important data. Configure Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS): Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, ERPS uses the ETH OAM function and the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring network. Configure automatic reporting of RMON performance of Ethernet boards. Dump history RMON performance data of Ethernet boards.
l l
WDM Board Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l
7-4
Configure optical transponder boards. Configure service multiplexing and de-multiplexing boards. Configure tributary and line boards. Configure protection boards. Configure optical amplifier boards.
l l l l l l l l
Configure spectrum analysis boards. Configure optical supervisory channel boards. Configure optical add/drop multiplexing boards. Configure variable optical attenuator boards. Configure optical equalization boards. Configure automatic optical fiber monitoring boards. Configure dispersion compensation boards. Configure wavelength management boards.
Dynamically manage ports. Query the line rate of an optical transport network (OTN).
Overhead Configuration
You can configure OTN overheads as follows on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure and query section monitoring (SM) overheads. Configure and query optical transmission section (OTS) overheads. Configure and query path monitoring (PM) overheads. Configure and query tandem connection monitoring (TCM) overheads. Query optical channel payload unit (OPU) overheads. Configure and query fault type and fault location reporting channel (FTFL) overheads.
You can configure WDM overheads as follows on the U2000: l l l l l Configure optical channel (OCh) overheads at SDH interfaces. Configure optical transponder unit (OTU) overheads at OTN interfaces. Configure optical demultiplexer unit (ODU) overheads at OTN interfaces. Query OPU overheads at OTN interfaces. Configure OTS overheads at OTN interfaces.
You can configure SDH overheads for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64 as follows on the U2000: l l l l Configure regenerator section overheads (J0). Configure lower order path overheads (V5 and J2). Configure VC4 higher order path overheads (J1 and C2) and pass-through or termination. Configure VC3 higher order path overheads (J1 and C2).
WDM Service Configuration

At an optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station, you can perform ADM configurations for Gigabit Ethernet (GE)/fiber channel (FC) services by using the OTU board as follows: l l Configure several WDM service boards in specified slots to form a cross-connect unit group. Perform the add/drop, pass-through, and loopback operation on GE/FC services in each cross-connect unit group.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Implement wavelength cross-connection protection (WXCP), with working and protection cross-connections configured on the sink NE.
Configure electrical cross-connections: l The U2000 allows you to configure electrical cross-connections to control the service flow at the electrical layer, and to dynamically groom, converge, and split sub-wavelength services. In this manner, the network structure and network survivability are enhanced. The U2000 supports integrated grooming of GE, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 services implemented by the XCS. The U2000 supports distributed grooming of GE, ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 services and Any services. The U2000 supports unidirectional and bidirectional SNCP at the ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0 level.
l l l
Configure optical cross-connections: l l l Create optical cross-connections dynamically, and manage optical cross-connections by board or NE, including creation, activation, deactivation, deletion and query. Create, query, and delete edge ports. Configure optical broadcast cross-connection services on a per-NE basis.
Perform service management operations: l l l Lock WDM trails and view the lock status of the corresponding trails in the Service Management window of the NE Explorer. View the name of the trail that a service belongs to. Query the trail that a service belongs to.
Perform service package management on the OptiX OSN 1800. The service package module helps you perform typical service configurations. In this manner, you need not perform onsite commissioning. This reduces costs in deployment commissioning and product maintenance. In addition, the equipment can be configured in a one-key manner. Manage licenses for service types and cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
ROADM Configuration
By using the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function on the U2000, you can perform add/drop and pass-through configuration for optical channels. The WDM equipment uses the DWC and wave selective switch (WSS) to implement the ROADM function. l Configure ROADM boards based on DWC boards: Wavelength grooming is implemented by using the DWC boards. This configuration method is often used for common nodes on a chain or ring network. Configure ROADM boards based on WSS boards: There are two types of network structures, WSSD+WSSM and WSS+RMU/ROAM. This configuration method is often used for cross-connect nodes on a ring network. Configure ROADM boards based on multiplexing and demultiplexing boards: Wavelengths cannot be groomed dynamically. This configuration method is often used for common nodes on a chain network.
7-6
Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Configure a clock source for a board. Configure transparent transmission for an external clock. Configure a clock for the SCC board. Configure a clock for the optical supervisory channel unit. Specify the clock source traced by the SCC board. Define clock source priorities.
PTP Clock (1588V2 Clock) Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure the frequency source mode. Configure PTP clock synchronization attributes. Query the clock source received at a port. Configure the PTP clock subnet. Configure PTP packet attributes. Configure an external time interface.
Physical Clock Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure input attributes of external clocks. Configure the system clock source priority table. Configure clock source protection and clock source switching. Configure phase-locked source output of external clocks. Configure the quality of clock sources.
WDM Protection Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l Configure optical line protection. Configure an optical wavelength protection group. Configure port protection. Configure 1:N (N 8) optical channel protection. Configure 1+N (N 48) optical channel protection. Configure protection for clock transparent transmission. Configure optical wavelength share protection (OWSP) with the Metro WDM equipment and the NG WDM equipment. Configure WXCP protection for GE/FC services. Configure a WXCP protection group for the sink NE. Configure and query WXCP protection parameters.
Query the status of WXCP protection switching. Query services with WXCP protection. Perform WXCP protection switching. l l l Configure a TPS protection group. Configure a DPPS protection group. Configure 1+1 protection for boards. Configure 1+1 protection for SCC boards. Configure 1+1 protection for cross-connect and synchronous timing (XCS) boards. Perform working/protection switching. Query the switching status. l Configure SNCP protection. Configure sub-wavelength (SW) SNCP for GE services or Any services on an OTU board. Configure SNCP for optical channel data unit (ODUk) services. Configure MS SNCP. Configure VLAN SNCP for an Ethernet board. Perform protection switching. Query the switching status. l l l l Configure board protection switching (BPS). Configure distribute board protect system (DBPS). DBPS protects 10GE and GE ports on a TBE board. The cross-connection granularity is the GE service. Configure ODUk SPRings at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels. In 1+1 protection for SCC boards, you can query the data backup status between the active and standby SCC boards.
Optical Power Adjustment

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Manage the optical power. For example, query the input power, output power, and power threshold of each WDM board. Perform intelligent power adjustment (IPA). When a fiber is cut, the optical amplifier board detects signal loss at the local station. The local station reports an exception event to the U2000. After the user confirms the event, the optical amplifier boards at the upstream and downstream stations reduce their output power to a safe value to prevent a fiber maintainer from being injured by the laser emitted from the cut fiber. After the fiber is reconnected, the optical signals recover to normal and the optical power of each optical amplifier board automatically returns to a normal value. Perform automatic level control (ALC). The U2000 supports adjustment modes including wavelength count detection, power detection, and link attenuation (gain mode). In wavelength count detection mode and power detection mode, you can manually control whether to enable the ALC function. The wavelength count detection mode applies to a transmission link where no service is added or dropped or where the number of wavelengths added and dropped are the same at an OADM station. When the spectrum analyzer unit detects that the total optical power of the wavelengths greatly differs from the standard power corresponding to the
wavelength count, an exception event is reported to the U2000. After the user confirms the event, the user needs to manually issue a command to adjust the attenuation of each station on the link. The power detection mode applies to a transmission link where the number of add wavelengths differs from the number of drop wavelengths at an OADM station. When the optical amplifier board detects that the output power is abnormal, the station automatically issues a command to adjust the attenuation of each station on the link. This mode does not involve a spectrum analyzer unit and is therefore cost-effective. The link attenuation adjustment mode also applies to a transmission link where the number of add wavelengths differs from the number of drop wavelengths at an OADM station. When the optical power is attenuated to the detection threshold, a command is automatically issued to adjust the attenuation of each station on the link.
NOTE
The link attenuation adjustment mode is also referred to as the gain mode, which compares line attenuation with amplifier gain, and then compares the difference between line attenuation and amplifier gain with node gain compensation offset. After the nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit and the attenuation of the attenuation adjustment unit are adjusted, the attenuation is equal to the gain, ensuring the power budget of the entire link.
Perform automatic power equilibrium (APE). If the MCA board at the receive end detects that the optical power of certain channels is abnormal, the station reports an exception event to the U2000. After the user confirms the event, the U2000 issues a command to the optical attenuation adjustment board of the upstream station. This board adjusts the optical power of the abnormal channel so that the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel at the receive end is equalized. Perform ROADM optical power equalization. After ROADM is enabled for dynamically configuring wavelength services, the WDM equipment outputs multiplexed wavelengths. The optical power between each channel, however, may be greatly different, especially for new add wavelengths. To avoid negative impact on transmission performance, the ROADM optical power equalization mechanism is provided. The ROADM first distinguishes between pass-through wavelengths and the add wavelengths. Then the DWC/WSS adjusts the optical power of the pass-through wavelengths, and the optical attenuation adjustment board adjusts the add wavelengths based on wavelength flags. Configure pre-alerts for optical power at ports.
Dispersion Compensation
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Perform dispersion compensation (with the help of the DCM board) at each band to implement dispersion equalization. Use tunable dispersion compensators (TDCs) to adjust dispersion precisely. In the submarine system, use a separate dispersion compensation board, such as the TDC1 or TDC2 board, to perform dispersion compensation for signals on the line side of an OTU board.
Wavelength Monitoring
By using the U2000, you can perform wavelength monitoring management for the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, and OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
WDM PRBS
By using the U2000, you can perform a pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test on a board to check the path quality. You can also check whether a WDM link functions properly before a service is provisioned.
SDH Board Configuration

By using the U2000, you can configure SDH line boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64. You can perform the following operations: l l l Configure dynamic SDH ports. Adjust the rates of optical ports on SDH boards. Query the status of a port.
Configuration for SDH Services and Protection

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Configure SDH line boards, SDH services, and SDH service protection for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Configure VC12, VC3, or VC4 services and select protection groups for them. Activate or deactivate services. Configure SNCP services. Switch between an SNCP service and a common service. Query the capacities of higher order and lower order cross-connections on an NE. Configure subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP). SNCTP provides protection channels at the VC4 level. When the working channel is faulty, all its services are switched to the protection channel. Configure linear multiplex section protection (MSP). In the MSP protection, bytes K1 and K2 in the SDH multiplex section overhead (MSOH) are used to transmit protocol information to control the transmit and receive routes of services on a chain network. Configure MSP rings, including two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings. Configure transoceanic MSP rings. A transoceanic multiplex section (MS) is an MS based on the transoceanic MSP protocol and used to provide path protection for higher-order services on a transoceanic ring network.
l l
Power Consumption Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l
7-10
Manage NE power consumption to achieve energy conservation and environment protection when the NE runs in the normal state. Query power consumption of a board or an NE. Configure energy conservation for an NE. You can dynamically adjust NE power consumption to achieve environment protection and energy conservation. View network-wide NE power consumption reports.
Submarine Line Management

You need to create a line group for actual submarine lines on the U2000. Hence, you can measure and analyze line data, and monitor the working status of lines. By using the U2000, you can perform submarine line management as follows: l l l l Create a submarine line. Modify a submarine line. Activate a submarine line. Delete a submarine line.
Submarine Line Monitoring

You can monitor and test the status of fibers and repeaters and analyze test data to monitor the working status of a submarine system and identify faults. By using the U2000, you can perform submarine line monitoring as follows: l l l l l l l l Managing submarine line thresholds. Monitor submarine lines and the status of a repeater in in-service mode. Use the fast fault identification function. Identify a fault on a submarine line in off-service mode. Perform tests of multiple types: manual test, comparison test in single-test mode, and comparison test in periodic mode. Synchronize, query, and analyze the test data. Refresh monitoring information in real time. Query the gain report and performance report.
PFE Management
By using the U2000, you can manage the PFE 1670. The PFE 1670 is the power supply equipment for the submarine transmission system.
FC Service Test
The FC service test uses the 12LOM board to replace the FC test equipment (such as the SmartBits) for running the test. The FC service test verifies whether the FC service line and the equipment under test are in the normal state. By using the U2000, you can perform FC service tests.
7.2 WDM NA NE Management

NE management includes setting of attributes and configuration of communication, services, protection, and clocks on a per-NE basis. The configuration data is saved at the NE layer on the U2000 and in the database of the NE.
By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations:
Synchronize the NE time: Send the computer system time and NTP server time at the U2000 server to all NEs for synchronizing the NE time. You can configure the U2000 to automatically synchronize the NE time by specifying the automatic synchronization period. Query physical resources in the following items: NE list Bard manufacturer information board list Shelf list Telecommunications room list
l l
Implement the board plug and play feature: After a board is inserted into a slot, the NE Panel automatically displays the board and the board information. Disable the NE functions automatically: You can set the time when the U2000 automatically disables certain NE functions that may affect services, such as the loopback and automatic laser shutdown (ALS) functions. At the time specified, these functions are disabled automatically. Configure or modify the NE attributes: Modify the NE name. Modify the NE remarks. Enable or disable automatic board installation. Enable or disable LAN port access control. Set start time for 24-hour performance monitoring. Enable or disable daylight saving time (DST). Modify the IP address and subnet mask of an NE. Enable or disable ARP proxy. Enable or disable the OSI protocol. Modify a shelf name. Modify shelf remarks. Set the time zone and DST. Perform a cold reset or warm reset on an NE. Reset the NE in DBERASE mode, with the NE database erased. Reset the NE in SWDL mode after the NE software is downloaded. Enable or disable performance reporting. Enable or disable alarm reporting. Enable or disable database change (DBCHG) reporting. Clear audible and visual alarm indication of an NE in a cabinet. Set the NE alarm delay time, including the delay time for alarm start and the delay time for alarm end. Set the longitude and latitude of an NE. Set the affiliated gateway IP address. Set the affiliated gateway port. Set the state model of an NE.
7-12
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Set the country code and national segment code of an NE. Enable or disable the buzzer of an NE. l Modify the following attributes of an optical NE: Type Name Remarks Vendor Resources assigned l Query and modify the parameters in the Card Attribute window. Set the primary and secondary states. Query logical boards and physical boards on an NE. Query the PCB version, software version, FPGA version, and BIOS version of a board. Query the CLEI code, vendor ID, part number, serial number, date of manufacture, and board description. Query the backup power and rated power voltage. Set the upper temperature threshold and lower temperature threshold. Set the fan speed, working mode, and LED state. Perform a cold reset on a board. Perform a warm reset on a board. l l Manage environment monitoring information: You can set the fan speed mode and speed level on an NE. Manage fibers and cables as follows: View fiber cable information. Create or delete a fiber cable. Create a fiber cable report. l l Dynamically add a port: SFP/XFP client-side colored ports support the new functions of dynamically add, delete, and modify. Search and create NEs by discovering NE IP addresses automatically.
By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l l Set and query orderwire phone numbers and call waiting time. Set and query network-wide conference call numbers. Set and query the subnet number length.

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure Ethernet port mirroring. You can monitor packets, perform routine maintenance, and in-service commissioning through a mirrored port in a flexible manner. Set the following attributes for an internal Ethernet interface:
Basic attributes Tag attributes Network attributes Advanced attributes Flow control l Set the following attributes for an external Ethernet interface: Basic attributes Flow control Tag attributes Network attributes Advanced attributes l Configure Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) (QinQ), and VLAN subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) services.
NOTE
l QinQ is a VLAN embedding technique that employs multi-layer VLAN IDs to identify different users. In this manner, VLAN resources are expanded. The U2000 supports the function of adding labels. l A VLAN SNCP service is a VLAN-based E-Line service with SNCP protection. You can create VLAN SNCP and QinQ VLAN SNCP services, and perform conversion between a VLAN SNCP service and a common Ethernet service.
Configure Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services: You can create a virtual bridge (VB) and set parameters including service mounting, VLAN filtering, VLAN unicast, MAC address disablement, bound path, and MAC address automatic learning. Set the following parameters for QoS: Flow CAR CoS Port shaping
l l l l l l l l l l
Configure OAM for Ethernet services. Configure OAM for Ethernet ports. Configure the intra-board LAG function. Configure the DLAG function. Configure the VLAN group function. Configure port MAC address filtering. Test frames received and transmitted on Ethernet boards. Configure the protocol diagnosis function. Configure the QinQ type area. Set the following parameters for Ethernet Layer 2 switching: Aging time Spanning tree IGMP snooping protocol
l l
7-14
Configure automatic reporting of RMON performance of Ethernet boards. Dump history RMON performance data of Ethernet boards.
WDM Board Configuration

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l l l l l l l l l l Configure optical transponder boards. Configure service multiplexing and de-multiplexing boards. Configure tributary and line boards. Configure protection boards. Configure optical amplifier boards. Configure spectrum analysis boards. Configure optical supervisory channel boards. Configure optical add/drop multiplexing boards. Configure variable optical attenuator boards. Configure wavelength monitoring. Configure optical equalization boards.
Overhead Configuration
By using the U2000, you can configure OTN overheads as follows: l l l l l Configure and query section monitoring (SM) overheads. Configure and query path monitoring (PM) overheads. Configure and query tandem connection monitoring (TCM) overheads. Query optical channel payload unit (OPU) overheads. Configure and query fault type and fault location reporting channel (FTFL) overheads.
By using the U2000, you can configure WDM overheads as follows: l l l l l l Configure an optical channel (OCh) overhead management-SONET interface. Configure OTU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface. Configure ODU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface. Configure OPU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface. Configure TCM overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface. Configure OTS overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.
WDM Service Configuration

At an optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station, you can configure ADM for GE/Any services by using the LQG, LOG, and other boards as follows: l l l Configure several WDM service boards in specified slots to form a cross-connect unit group. Perform the add/drop, pass-through, and loopback operation on GE services in each crossconnect unit group. Implement unidirectional and bidirectional WXCP protection with working and protection cross-connections configured on the sink node.
Configure electrical cross-connections: The U2000 allows you to configure electrical crossconnections to control service flows at the electrical layer. In this manner, the network structure and network survivability are improved. The following two features are supported:
l l
Integrated grooming of GE, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 services implemented by XCS. Distributed grooming of GE, ODU1, ODU2, and Any services.
Configure ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, ODU0, GE/Any, and OTU1 cross-connections, and unidirectional and bidirectional SNCP at the ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 levels. l l l l l Create OCh cross-connections dynamically, and manage optical cross-connections by board or NE, including creation, activation, deactivation, deletion and query. Create edge ports. Lock WDM trails and view the lock status of the trails in the Service Management window of the NE Explorer. View the names of the trails that a service traverses. Query the trails that a service traverses.
Perform the following service management operations:
ROADM Configuration
By using the ROADM function on the U2000, you can perform add/drop and pass-through configurations on optical channels. The WDM equipment uses DWC and WSS to implement the re-configuring of optical add/drop multiplexing. l l DWC type of ROADM: DWC is applicable to common nodes on a chain or ring network. WSS type of ROADM: WSS is applicable to cross-connect nodes on a ring. This feature is applicable to grooming of multi-dimensional optical cross-connections. A maximum of eight dimensions are supported.
The U2000 supports optical broadcast cross-connection services on a per-NE basis.
Clock Configuration
By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: Configure the master clock. l l l l l l l Add a clock source. Delete a clock source. Query a clock source. Set the input attributes of a clock for the OTC board. Set the output attributes of a clock for the OTC board. Set the working route of a clock for the OTC board. Set the synchronization clock source.
Configure a clock for the OTC board.
WDM Protection Configuration

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l l
7-16
Configure 1+1 optical channel protection. Configure 1:N optical channel protection. Configure inter-shelf protection.
Configure port protection. Configure optical line protection. Configure intra-board 1+1 protection: This function includes intra-board 1+1 protection implemented by dual-fed OTU boards and intra-board 1+1 protection implemented with the help of the DCP or OLP board. Configure client-side 1+1 protection.
l l l
Configure protection for clock transparent transmission. Configure OWSP protection. Configure WXCP protection for GE/OTU1 services. Configure a WXCP protection group for the board in the sink slot. Configure and query WXCP protection parameters. Query the status of WXCP protection switching. Query services with WXCP protection. Perform WXCP protection switching.
Configure board 1+1 protection. Configure SCC board 1+1 protection. Configure XCS board 1+1 protection. Configure AUX board 1+1 protection. Perform switching between working and protection boards. Query the switching status.
Configure SNCP protection. Configure subwavelength (SW) SNCP for GE or Any services on an OTU board. Configure SNCP for optical channel data unit (ODUk) services. Configure VLAN SNCP for an Ethernet board. Perform protection switching. Query the switching status.
Configure board protection switching (BPS). The BPS protection uses two boards: the working and protection boards. BPS protection protects any single port on the two boards by board-level switching. In 1+1 protection for SCC boards, you can query the status of data backup between the active and standby SCC boards.
Optical Power Adjustment

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l Manage the optical power. For example, query the input power, output power, and power threshold of each WDM board. Perform intelligent power adjustment (IPA). When a fiber is cut, the optical amplifier board detects signal loss at a station. The station reports an exception event to the U2000. After the user confirms the event, the optical amplifier boards at the upstream and downstream stations reduce their output power to a safe value to prevent the fiber maintenance personnel from being injured by the laser emitted from the cut fiber. After the fiber is reconnected,
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
the optical signals recover to normal and the optical power of each optical amplifier board automatically returns to a normal value. l Perform automatic level control (ALC). Link attenuation (gain mode) can be used as the adjustment mode. The link attenuation adjustment mode applies to a transmission link where the number of add wavelengths differs from the number of drop wavelengths at an OADM. When the optical power is attenuated to the detection threshold, a command is automatically issued to adjust the attenuation of each station on the link.
NOTE
The link attenuation adjustment mode is also referred to as the gain mode, which compares line attenuation with amplifier gain, and also compares node gain with compensation offset. After the nominal gain of an optical amplifier unit and the attenuation value of an attenuation adjustment unit are adjusted, the attenuation value is equal to the gain value, ensuring the power budget of the entire link.
Perform automatic power equilibrium (APE). If an MCA board at the receive end detects that the optical power of certain channels is abnormal, the station reports an exception event to the U2000. After the user confirms the event, the U2000 issues a command to the optical attenuation adjustment board at the upstream station. This board adjusts the optical power of the abnormal channel so that the optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel at the receive end is equalized. Perform ROADM optical power equalization. After ROADM is enabled for dynamically configuring wavelength services, the WDM equipment outputs multiplexed wavelengths. The optical power, however, may deviate greatly on channels, especially on new wavelength channels. To avoid negative impact on transmission performance, the ROADM optical power equalization mechanism is provided. The ROADM first distinguishes between pass-through wavelengths and add wavelengths. Then the DWC/WSS adjusts the optical power of the pass-through wavelengths, and the optical attenuation adjustment board adjusts the add wavelengths based on wavelength flags. Configure pre-alerts for the optical power at a port.
Dispersion Compensation
l The G.652 and G.655 fibers have positive dispersion coefficient and positive dispersion slope at the 1550 nm window. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, accumulation of positive dispersion broadens the optical signal pulse and seriously affects system transmission performance. To minimize this impact, a negative DCM is used on the network. The negative DCM uses negative dispersion to compensate the positive dispersion of the transmission fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. An OEQ NE can apply dispersion compensation at each band to achieve dispersion equalization. The U2000 supports 40G dispersion compensation, which uses the TDC to adjust dispersion precisely.
l l
Wavelength Monitoring
Wavelength monitoring uses a wavelength supervisory unit to monitor the wavelengths that are transmitted from a WDM-side optical interface on the OTU board (including the service convergence unit) and to control wavelength shift. By using the U2000, you can perform wavelength monitoring. This function ensures wavelength stability.
7-18
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
WDM PRBS
By using the U2000, you can perform pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) on a board to check the path quality. You can also check whether a WDM link functions properly before a service is provisioned.
Housekeeping Configuration
By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l Set and query the environmental alarm property. Create environmental alarm attributes. Set the normal state of the environmental alarm property. Query environmental alarm attributes. Modify environmental alarm attributes. Delete environmental alarm attributes. l Set and query the external control property. Create external control attributes. Query external control attributes. Modify external control attributes. Delete external control attributes. Set the control time of the external control relay.
Query of AO Buffer Records

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l Query the records in the automatic output (AO) buffer. The record information includes: Time at which the record is generated Autonomously generated correlation tag (ATAG) of the record Type of the record Description of the record l l l Filter the records in the AO buffer. Save the records in the AO buffer to a file. Export the AO buffer information to the browser of the operating system for printing.
EAPE Management
Enhanced automatic power equalization (EAPE) management can reduce the bit error rate (BER) of a service. By using the U2000, you can query the EAPE function of an OCh trail.
Power Consumption Management

By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Manage NE power consumption to achieve energy conservation and environment protection when the NE runs in the normal state. Query the power consumption of a board or an NE.
l l
Configure energy conservation for an NE. You can dynamically adjust NE power consumption to achieve environment protection and energy conservation. View network-wide NE power consumption reports.
ASON Management
Topology Management By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l l l l l l l Discover ASON topologies and resources automatically. Synchronize NEs in a domain: On the U2000, you can obtain the topology of a network from the active NE. Set the active and standby NEs. Manage domains, including creating and deleting domains, and changing domain names. Query the ASON NE software version. Manage IDs of ASON NEs. Query the status (enabled/disabled) of the ASON NE software. Enable or disable the ASON feature of an ASON NE.
TE Link Management By using the U2000, you can perform the following operations: l l l l l l l Synchronize network-wide links by domain or payload type. Filter links by domain, link signal type, payload type, or source/sink information. View TE links. Create fibers. Manage TE links whose payload type is OCh. Set the length of a TE link. Create a link resource report.
7.3 WDM Protection Subnet Management

A protection subnet is a network with holistic self-protection. On the U2000, the protection subnet is a general concept that refers to not only a network with holistic self-protection, such as a multiplex section protection (MSP) ring or a path protection (PP) ring, but also a network without self-protection, such as an unprotected ring or an unprotected chain. To perform protection subnet management on the U2000, the relevant license is required. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Search for a wavelength protection subnet. Create a 1:N wavelength protection subnet by using the search function. Create ODUk SPRings at ODU1 and ODU2 levels by using the search function. l Manage a wavelength protection subnet. Set parameters of a 1:N wavelength protection subnet. Perform and verify 1:N wavelength protection switching.
Set parameters of an ODUk SPRing protection subnet. Perform and verify the ODUk Wavelength Protection Switching Query and delete a protection subnet. Query and delete an isolated node. Query protection subnet resources.
7.4 End-to-End WDM Management

End-to-end network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data about end-to-end network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is quicker and more convenient. To perform end-to-end network management on the U2000, the relevant license is required. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Search for a trail. Based on the NE configuration data and fiber connection data at the NE layer, the U2000 generates the network-layer information about end-to-end trails, including OTS trails, OCh client trails, OCh trails, optical multiplex section (OMS) trails, optical supervisory channel (OSC) trails, ODUk trails and optical channel transport unit (OTUk) trails. Manage conflicts trails generated during the search process. Joint trails automatically during the trail search process. Reserve user-defined information about trails during WDM trail search. Search for inverse multiplexing trails for 40G and 10G services. Optimize OMS trails search. l Create a trail. The U2000 automatically generates an OTS trail after fibers are correctly connected between specified boards. Select an NE in the topology and view relevant alarms when creating a trail. Analyze failure causes when a route fails to be computed at the optical or electrical layer during trail creation. Create and manage third-party WDM wavelength trails (OCh trails). Create ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 or ODU3 trails, and create ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 or ODU3 cross-connections by using the trail management function. Search for and manage ODU3 trails. View detailed information about a route during WDM trail creation. Create a client trail, and create GE, FC, and FE services based on OCh or ODUk trails by using the trail management function. Create SNCP or WXCP by using the trail management function. Create a WDM trail by double-clicking an NE and select the source and sink nodes. Select the explicit route for protection when creating a WDM trail. Use the end-to-end management function for ASON-WDM trails.
Create multi-layer WDM trails, and create client and ODUk cross-connections by using the trail management function. Create trails by means of duplication. That is, create multiple trails by duplicating a trail. In addition, generate client and ODUk cross-connections in batches by using the trail management function. Create WDM trails where fiber jumpers are connected inside a station. Set port attributes. View new cross-connections. l Manage customers that trails belong. Create a customer and customer group. View and modify customer information. View the trails related to a customer. View current and history alarms for a customer. Delete a customer. l View trails. Join trails of the same level. Split a trail into trails of the same level. Query the route information about a trail. Display the signal flow diagram of a trail. Query the transmission media layer for a trail. Query the client trail for a trail. Query the server trail for a trail. Query detailed information about a trail, including its attributes and channel allocation. Query the optical power of a trail. That is, query the optical power of a WDM trail, and the input and output optical power of the source and sink nodes of the trail. Query DPPS protection for a trail. Query valid routes for protected WDM trails. Query the associated working and protection trails for OCh trails. Display intra-site fibers in solid lines and inter-site fibers in dotted lines in the signal flow diagram of a trail. Display working and protection routes in different colors in the signal flow diagram of a trail. Switch from the signal flow diagram of a trail to another window to query alarms. Query the detailed information about a trail group. The information includes the direction, name, trail status, source and sink nodes, source and sink wavelengths, bearer rate, rate, and service type. Enable or disable service alarms. Switch between the window for viewing WDM trails and the window for viewing associated SDH trails. Support lockout of WDM trails. l Manage the alarms and performance events related to a trail. Query current alarms of a trail.
Query history alarms of a trail. Query current performance data of a trail. Query history performance data of a trail. Query UAT of a trail. Query performance threshold-crossing records of a trail. Set the performance parameters and performance threshold of a WDM trail. Query Ethernet performance of an OCh client trail with services. Manage in real time network-wide WDM trails with alarms. View alarms in case of a fiber cut in the signal flow diagram. That is, when alarms occur in case of a fiber cut, a fiber is displayed in red in the signal flow diagram. Set the alarm threshold of a trail. Manage service alarms. l Query reports on resource statistics. Collect the statistics on WDM client-side port resources. Collect the statistics on WDM inter-site wavelength resources. Collect the statistics on WDM link resources. Collect the statistics on WDM wavelength resources. Generate a statistics report on WDM wavelength resources utilization. Generate a statistics report on WDM bandwidth resources. l Manage trails. Query 1+1 protection of optical-layer trails and perform 1+1 protection switching for the optical-layer trails. Query trails with WXCP and SNCP protection, and perform protection switching for the trails. Use the TTI byte to check fiber connection relationships over an OCh trail. Apply the automatic naming rule for WDM trails. Modify the source and sink of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3) trails and client trails. Support ODU trail end-to-end management. Search for and end-to-end manage GE trails based on ODUk. Manage optical-layer alarms and configure optical-layer overheads on a trail. Analyze connectivity of a WDM trail and identify a fault on a WDM trail. Enable and disable WXCP or SNCP protection for an ODUk trail or a client trail. Set the end-to-end optical power mode. Implement the "save as" and "print" functions for channel allocation of a WDM trail. Save the signal flow diagram of a WDM trail. Manage WDM trails base on rights and domains. Manage WDM discrete services. Manage WDM platinum trails. Create WDM trails by using eight clients at the same time. View relevant fibers based on trails.
View directly the timeslots and wavelengths that are used by a configured client service trail in the signal flow diagram. Add a column in the WDM Trail Management window to indicate whether protection is configured. Identify whether an OCh trail is used by a client trail. l l Delete a trail. You can delete a WDM trail (except an OTS trail) from the NE layer and network layer of the U2000. Implement enhanced automatic power equilibrium (EAPE) based on OCh trails. The EAPE function automatically adjusts the transmitted optical power of each channel according to the signal quality of each channel monitored by the OTU board at the receive end, to ensure that the quality of signals in each channel at the receive end satisfies the preset requirements. In this way, service availability is ensured. Filter trails in the following ways: Filter all: Filter all trails and display only the qualified trails on a network. Secondary filter: According to filter criteria, filter trails from those that are already displayed. Incremental filter: Filter the newly added trails and display the qualified trails, which should also be the trails included in the currently displayed trails.
7.5 WDM ASON Management

The automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new generation of optical network that integrates switch and transport functions. After a user initiates a service request, the ASON selects a route automatically, establishes and disconnects connections by using signaling control, and establishes network connections automatically and dynamically. An ASON NE refers to the equipment that is enabled with both WDM and ASON features. An ASON network is managed by the U2000 that combines ASON and WDM features.
Topology Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Discover ASON topologies and resources automatically. Synchronize NEs in a domain: The U2000 can obtain the topology of an ASON domain from the active NE. Set the active and standby NEs. Manage domains, including creating and deleting domains, and changing domain names. Query the ASON NE software version. Manage IDs of ASON NEs. Query the version of the ASON software. Manage the OVPN status of ASON NEs. Disable the ASON feature at the electrical layer.
Control Link Management

l l l l l l
Synchronize network-wide control links. Filter control links by domain or source/sink information. View control links. Query the information about current or history alarms on a control link. Set alarm suppression for a control link. User-define whether to display the color of alarms in the Control Link Management window.
TE Link Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Synchronize network-wide TE links by domain or payload type. Filter TE links by domain, link signal type, payload type (optical layer or electrical layer), OVPN customer, or source/sink information. View TE links. Query relevant ASON trails for a TE link. Create fibers according to the TE link whose payload type is OCh. Create a virtual TE link. Delete a virtual TE link. Manage TE links whose payload type is OCh, ODUk, ODU1_ODU2, or client (GE/Any). Set the length of a TE link. Set the risk link group number. Create a link resource report. View resource usage. Query the information about current or history alarms on a link. Set alarm suppression for control-plane alarms. Query the status of a TE link. Delete an interrupted TE link. Query relevant TE links according to control-plane alarms. Customize the cost for a TE link. Allocate optical-layer TE links to OVPN customers.
ASON Trail Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Filter relevant WDM ASON trails by domain, name, actual route, original route, creation time, planning time, activation status, protection type, service level, alarm level, management status, whether the original route is active, and whether inverse multiplexing is available. Synchronize network-wide WDM ASON trails by domain, service level, or attributes. View WDM ASON trails. Query detailed information about WDM ASON trails. Create WDM ASON trails of the diamond, gold, silver, or copper class.
l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
l l l l l l l l l l
Create WDM ASON trails of the OCh, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, or client level. Create an inverse multiplexing WDM ASON trail. Create associated WDM ASON trails with the same source node or different source nodes. Duplicate WDM ASON trails. Pre-compute routes when creating or optimizing WDM ASON trails. Activate or deactivate WDM ASON trails. Apply planning data to an ASON trail. Delete inactive WDM ASON trails. Delete a WDM ASON trail from the NMS. Set routing attributes, including rerouting lockout status, reversion lockout status, rerouting priorities, revertive mode, WTR time, scheduled revertive time, rerouting policy, trigger condition, crankback times, rerouting triggered by SD, and rerouting hold-off time. Set association source for WDM ASON trails. Set association for WDM ASON trails. Cancel association for WDM ASON trails. Downgrade a WDM ASON trail to a traditional trail. Query relevant server-layer trails for WDM ASON trails. Query relevant client-layer trails for WDM ASON trails. Query relevant trails for ASON trails. Migrate an electrical-layer ASON trail in-service. Enable or disable optical parameters verify of WDM ASON OCh trails, including OSNR, PMD, and dispersion. Revert a WDM ASON trail to the original route. Optimize WDM ASON trails. Switch services in the working or protection diamond trail manually. Revert WDM ASON trails manually. Refresh the actual route, original route, associated routes, or signal flow diagram of a WDM ASON trail. Set the current route as the original route. Refresh the preset restoration trail for a WDM ASON trail. Set one or two preset restoration trails for a WDM ASON trail. Delete the preset restoration trail for a WDM ASON trail. View the actual route, original route, or associated routes of a WDM ASON trail. View the preset restoration trail for a WDM ASON trail. View alarms of a WDM ASON trail. View the control-plane alarm suppression information about WDM ASON trails. Set control-plane alarm suppression for WDM ASON trails. View performance events of WDM ASON trails. View control-plane performance of WDM ASON trails. View the control-plane performance parameters of WDM ASON trails. Create WDM ASON trail reports.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
7-26
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Revert to original routes in batches. Set names for WDM ASON trails in batches according to the naming rules. Save the attributes of a service after creating a WDM ASON service successfully. Restore the default attributes of a service when creating a WDM ASON service. Manage creators of WDM ASON trails. Refresh routes automatically after diamond trail protection switching. Set the OVPN customer when creating an ASON OCh trail. Set the OVPN customer of a WDM ASON OCh trail. Implement sharing of wavelengths in the working and protection diamond ASON trails at the optical layer. Implement sharing of wavelengths in associated trails at the optical layer. Set the route attributes of associated ASON trails, including trigger condition for rerouting associated routes and shared policy of associated services. Query the optical power of ASON trails. Refresh wavelengths at the notification of wavelength changes on an OCh ASON trail.
SRG Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Create, delete, and modify an SRG. Manage SRGs of the channel type or customized type.
Combination of ASON Trails and Traditional Trails

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l Create an ASON-WDM trail at the OCh, ODU2, ODU1, or client level. Simplify the layers where multi-layer services are provisioned. To be specific, when you create a client trail, its server-layer ASON-WDM trail is automatically created. Implement the OVPN with colored routes in the WDM. View both WDM trails and managed ASON trails in the WDM Trail Management window. Manage overhead bytes, alarms, and performance events of an ASON-WDM trail in a centralized manner. Query the ASON trails relevant to a WDM trail. Query the WDM trails relevant to an ASON trail. Downgrade an ASON trail to a traditional trail. Upgrade a traditional WDM trail to a WDM ASON trail. Collect the alarm statistics of the ASON section, which is added to the alarm statistics of the ASON-WDM trail. Manage, search for, upgrade, and downgrade ODU3 ASON-WDM trails.
Exchange of Scripts
l l l
Import and export scripts of WDM ASON nodes. Import and export scripts of WDM TE links Import and export scripts of WDM ASON trails.
ASON Management on a Per-NE Basis

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Manage the ASON features of NEs. Manage IDs of ASON NEs. Manage control-plane parameters, including the bandwidth occupancy (%), bandwidth weight, distance weight, hop weight, and customized cost weight. Manage LMP control channels. Manage LMP TE links. Implement LMP automatic discovery. Manage OSPF control links. Manage OSPF TE links. Manage OSPF IP addresses. Authenticate the OSPF protocol. Authenticate the RSVP protocol. Manage the WDM fiber resource threshold. Manage WDM ASON trails. Maintain ASON signaling. Maintain the ASON switching controller. Manage the LMP status. Manage the OSPF protocol status. Manage the automatic reporting status of control-plane alarms. Manage levels and suppression status of control-plane alarms. Query SCN control routes. Manage control-plane performance parameters. Query control-plane performance. Manage resource reservation. Manage the resource occupation status.
By using the U2000, you can configure SDH ASON feature for the OptiX OSN 8800 I and OptiX OSN 8800 II as follows: l l l l l l l
7-28
Query OSPF SDH TE links. Query OSPF member links. Manage the flood threshold of OSPF TE links. Manage ASON trail groups. Query SDH ASON trails. Manage the fiber resource threshold. Maintain SDH ASON signaling.
l l l l l l
Maintain the SDH ASON switch controller. Maintain the ASON-shared MESH switch controller. Manage control-plane performance of SDH ASON trails. Manage control-plane alarms of SDH ASON trails. Manage resource reservation. Manage VC4 timeslot occupation status.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
7-29
8 RTN Network Feature Management
RTN Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functional features of RTN NE management and network management. 8.1 RTN NE Management NE management refers to the management of configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, communication, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration object is a single NE. The data is saved to the NE layer of the U2000 and to the database on the NE. 8.2 RTN Protection Subnet Management A protection subnet is a network structure providing comprehensive self-protection functions. 8.3 End-to-End RTN Management End-to-end network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data of the end-to-end network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all the related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is faster and more convenient.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
8-1
8.1 RTN NE Management

NE management refers to the management of configurations of an NE in terms of attributes, communication, services, protection, and clocks. The configuration object is a single NE. The data is saved to the NE layer of the U2000 and to the database on the NE.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Support the ability to manage the connections between back-to-back RTN NEs. On the Main Topology of the U2000, the connections between back-to-back RTN NEs indicate the relationships between the RTN NEs on the same station that are connected in a backto-back manner through network interfaces. Modify NE attributes such as: NE name NE ID Extended NE ID Remarks l Synchronize NE time: Align all NEs with the system time of the U2000 server. The user can configure the U2000 to automatically synchronize the NE time by specifying the automatic synchronization period. Query physical resources in the following lists: NE list Board manufacturer information Board list Cabinet list Subrack list Equipment room list l l Support the plug and play feature for boards: After a board is inserted into a slot, the NE Panel automatically displays the board and board information. Automatically disable the NE functions: Some NE functions that may affect services, such as loopback and automatic laser shutdown (ALS), can be periodically disabled. When the time expires, these operations automatically stop. Environment monitoring information. You can set the interfaces of environment monitoring. Support the license management function for equipment. Support the press-to-install function for logical boards. Support the hop management function.
l l l l
l l l l
Set and query the orderwire phone numbers, call waiting time, and orderwire phone port availability. Set and query the orderwire occupied bytes. Set and query the F1 data port. Set and query the broadcast data port.
Equipment Protection Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure 1+1 board protection. Configure 1+1 IF protection.
Interface Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Set the parameters for an SDH interface. Set automatic laser shutdown. Set the parameters for a PDH interface. Set the parameters for an IF interface. Set the parameters for a digital interface. Set the parameters for an outdoor unit (ODU) interface. Set overhead interfaces, including: Orderwire Broadcast data port l Query and set the overhead including: Regenerator section overhead (J0). Lower order path overhead (V5, J2) VC-4 higher order path overhead (J1, C2) and its pass-through or termination. VC-3 higher order path overhead (J1, C2). l l l l Enable IEEE 1588 overhead bytes. Support PRBS. Support the features of packet radio. You can configure a microwave interface in terms of basic and advanced attributes, IF attributes, and Layer-2 and Layer-3 attributes. Support the ability to configure the long and short serial numbers for an MP group.
Configuration for RTN Service and Protection

Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 services. Convert between an SNCP service and a normal service. Modify attributes of SNCP services. Perform SNCP protection switching. Support 1+1 linear MSP, 1:N (N 3) linear MSP.
l l l l l l
Support the N+1 protection. Support IF 1+1 protection. Support the REG configuration. Support MSP rings. Support the XPIC feature. Support Hybrid radio and the AM feature, carrying hybrid E1 and Ethernet services and enhancing the availability of radio links.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Configure Ethernet internal interfaces, including: TAG attributes Encapsulation/mapping Network attributes Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Bound path l Configure external Ethernet ports, including: Basic attributes Flow control TAG attributes Network attributes Advanced attributes. l l l l l Configure jumbo frames. Configure QinQ types. Configure Ethernet private line (EPL) services. Configure EVPL (QinQ) services. Configure Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services. You can create a new virtual bridge (VB) and configure the following: service mount, VLAN filtering, VLAN unicast, disable MAC address, bound path, self-learning MAC address, and VLAN MAC address table capacity. Test frame receiving and transmitting on Ethernet boards. Configure quality of service (QoS), including: Flow setting CAR CoS Port shaping Board shaping l Configure Ethernet Layer-2 switching, including: Aging time Spanning tree IGMP snooping protocol.
l l
l l l l l
Support the ability to diagnose protocol faults and to restore protocols. Configure point-to-point LPT management and point-to-multipoint LPT management. Configure intra-board Ethernet LAGs. Configure Ethernet ring protection. Configure the RMON performance functions such as browsing history groups of Ethernet ports, collecting performance statistics of a group, setting an alarm group of Ethernet ports, and setting a history control group.
Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Query the clock synchronization status. Set clock source priority list, including: System clock source priority list Priority table for phase-locked sources of the first external clock output Priority table for phase-locked sources of the second external clock output l Set clock source switching, including: Clock source restoration parameters Clock source switching condition Clock source switching l Configure clock subnets, including: Clock subnet Clock quality Synchronization status message (SSM) output control Clock ID status l Set the external clock output phase-locked source, including: External clock output phase-locked source 2M phase-locked source external clock attributes

You can configure the 802.1ag Ethernet OAM as follows on the U2000: l l l l l l Support maintenance domain (MD), maintenance association (MA), maintenance end point (MEP), and maintenance intermediate point (MIP). Perform CC check. Perform LB check. Perform LT check. Perform Ping tests. Perform performance detect.
You can configure the 802.3ah Ethernet OAM as follows on the U2000: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Support OAM self-loop detection. Enable OAM automatic discovery.

l l
Support link event notification and the adjustment of the OAM error frame monitoring threshold. Perform remote loopback.
IS-IS Protocol Configuration

The U2000 uses the intermediate system-to-intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol as the protocol of the network control plane, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l l Configure an IS-IS protocol instance. Enable the IS-IS protocol for a port. Import routes. Configure link TE information.

The U2000 uses the open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol as the protocol of the network control plane, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l l Configure an OSPF protocol instance. Enable the OSPF protocol for a port. Import routes. Configure the TE information about a link.
MPLS Signaling Protocol Configuration

The U2000 supports the configuration of the following signaling protocols: l RSVP-TE protocol: Resource reservation protocol-traffic engineering (RSVP-TE) is derived from the RSVP protocol. The RSVP protocol is a type of QoS protocol. The RSVP protocol reserves resources for specific services in a network to ensure the service quality. As the TE is generated, RSVP is extended accordingly to support LSP creation and to realize TE. LDP protocol: Label distribution protocol (LDP) is a control and signaling protocol of multi-protocol label switching (MPLS).
RTN equipment supports using the RSVP-TE protocol to create dynamic LSP connection and using the LDP protocol to create PW connection.
Static Route Management Configuration

The U2000 supports the configuration of static route management.
Address Resolution Configuration

The U2000 supports the configuration of address resolution.
IEEE 1588 Packet Clock Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l
8-6
Configure the selection mode of a frequency source. Set the PTP system time.
l l l l
Configure a PTP clock subnet. Configure a PTP clock service. Set the WTR time for a PTP clock source. Set the PTP clock source priority.
ACR Clock Configuration

Configure CES ACR or 1588 ACR clock.
LAG Configuration
Link aggregation group (LAG) aggregates multiple Ethernet physical links to form a logical link of faster rate for transmitting data. This function improves the link availability and increases link capacity. The U2000 supports the configuration of the following LAG attributes: l l l l Configure the load sharing type, including sharing and non-sharing. Configure the LAG type, including manual and static. Configure the service distribution algorithm of the LAG. Configure the port priority and system priority of the LAG.
BFD Configuration
Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) can be used to check the Ethernet link status. BFD is a simple Hello protocol. It is similar to the neighbor detection of those famous protocols in many aspects. A pair of systems periodically sends detection packets on the channel on which session between the two systems was created. If a system does not receive any detection packet from the opposite end within a specific time, the system assumes that a failure occurred in some part of the bidirectional channel of the adjacent system.
QoS Configuration
Quality of service (QoS) indicates the performance of the data flow that travels through a network. The QoS is used to ensure end-to-end service quality. The QoS cannot increase the bandwidth, but it can minimize the delay and jitter in the network by reasonably allocating and monitoring network resources. In this way, the quality of important services is ensured. The DiffServ (DS) domain consists of a group of network nodes that enable the DiffServ function, that is, DS nodes. In a DS domain, all DS nodes use the same service provision policy to realize the same per-hop behavior (PHB). The DS nodes are classified into edge DS nodes and internal DS nodes. The edge DS nodes usually perform complex flow classification on the traffic that enters the DS domain. Traffic of different types is marked with different PHB service types. For internal DS nodes, you need to perform only simple flow classification based on PHB service type. The U2000 supports the following QoS operations: l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure Diffsever domains. Configure ATM CoS mapping. Configure simple flow classification and complex flow classification.
l l l l l
Configure CAR and Shaping. Configure the color blindness mode. Configure the WFQ schedule policy. Configure the port WREQ schedule policy. To simplify the operation and share some common QoS configuration parameters, the U2000 supports creating QoS function point policy. The function point policies are as follows: port policy, ATM policy, and V-UNI ingress policy. Use these function point policies to bind the CAR configuration attribute, shaping configuration attribute, flow classification configuration attributes, WFQ schedule policy and WRED policy attributes.
MPLS Tunnel Configuration

The MPLS tunnel is defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes end-to-end transmission, and carries the PWs related to the service. The U2000 supports the following functions for configuring an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis: l l l l l l Configure basic attributes of the MPLS. Configure static unicast MPLS tunnels. Create forward and backward MPLS tunnels at the same time. Create the E-LSP. Manage PWs. Manage tunnel labels and PW labels.

The U2000 supports the following functions for configuring an MPLS tunnel protection group: l Create a 1+1 MPLS tunnel protection group and a 1:1 MPLS tunnel protection group, containing the switching mode, revertive mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, and hold-off time. Perform MPLS tunnel protection switching. Query the protection switching status of an MPLS tunnel.
l l
PWs with UDP Encapsulation

The U2000 supports the PWs with UDP encapsulation that are carried in IP tunnels.
IP Tunnel and GRE Tunnel Configuration

If the equipment at both ends of an IP network does not support MPLS tunnel, PWE3 services can pass through the IP network by using an IP tunnel or GRE tunnel. An IP tunnel and GRE tunnel mainly applies to the Offload scenarios of mobile communication. The U2000 supports the configuration of bidirectional IP tunnels and GRE tunnels on a per-NE basis. The U2000 supports the Offload protection between MPLS and GRE tunnels.

CES is used for transparent transmission of switching data on TDM circuits in the packet transport network. The U2000 supports the following functions for configuring CES services: l l l l l l Create the corresponding PW when creating a CES service. Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI CES services. Create CES services of structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and of a structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). Configure QoS of the CES service. Configure the recovery value of idle timeslots. Carry CES services over IP/GRE tunnels.
ATM Service Configuration

ATM emulation service is mainly used to transparently transmit ATM services in the packet transport network.. The U2000 supports the following functions for creating ATM services: l l l l l l l Create an ATM service that contains multiple ATM connections. Create UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI ATM services. Create PVP and PVC ATM services. Create the corresponding PW when creating an ATM service. Configure the IMA group. Configure QoS of the ATM service. Configure CoS mapping.
E-Line Service Configuration

The E-line service is a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transmits user packets from the user side to the network side based on Port or Port+VLAN. User data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. The U2000 supports the following functions for configuring E-line services on a per-NE basis: l l l l l l Create UNI-UNI E-Line services. Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on ports. Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on PWs. Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on QinQ links. Configure the service and the QoS of the corresponding PW when creating an L2VPN service. Configure the V-UNI group.
E-AGGR Service Configuration

The E-AGGR service is a multipoint-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment uses several ports to access services from the V-UNI side, and converges the services into one PW at the network side for transmission. User data from multiple points can be converged into one point.
The U2000 supports the following functions for configuring E-AGGR services on a per-NE basis: l l l Configure the VLAN forwarding table items of an E-AGGR service. Configure the service and the QoS of the corresponding PW when creating an E-AGGR service. Configure the V-UNI group.
MPLS OAM Configuration

MPLS OAM is an OAM function of the MPLS network. This function can check the quality of LSPs in an MPLS network. The MPLS OAM scheme can effectively check, acknowledge, and locate a defect inside the network at the MPLS layer. It can report and handle a defect. When a fault occurs, the MPLS OAM provides a trigger scheme of protection switching. The U2000 provides the following functions for configuring MPLS OAM: l l l l l Configure MPLS OAM parameters of a tunnel. Perform CV/FFD checks. Perform LSP ping checks. Perform PW ping checks. Perform LSP traceroute checks.
ATM OAM Configuration

ATM OAM is an end-to-end OAM function for ATM services. This function can check the quality of ATM links that pass through multiple NEs. The ATM OAM function checks an ATM link by inserting some OAM cells of the standard cell structure to the user cell flow. The U2000 provides the following functions for configuring ATM OAM: l l l l Set segment end attributes. Perform CC activation test. Perform remote loopback. Set the LLID.
8.2 RTN Protection Subnet Management

A protection subnet is a network structure providing comprehensive self-protection functions. To perform protection subnet management, you need to have the related license. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l
8-10
Create an RTN protection subnet. Create an IF 1+1 protection subnet. Create an IF N+1 protection subnet. Manage RTN protection subnets. Set the parameters for a protection subnet. Query the switching status of a protection subnet.
l l
Query and delete a protection subnet. Query protection subnet resources.
8.3 End-to-End RTN Management

End-to-end network management is also referred to as trail management. You can construct the configuration data of the end-to-end network management by searching for the data at the NE layer of the U2000, or directly configure the data at the network layer of the U2000, and apply the data to all the related NEs. Compared with configuring NE data on a per-NE basis, configuring NE data by using the trail management function is faster and more convenient. To perform end-to-end network management, the relevant license is required. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Create and maintain an RTN trail Create a PDH microwave trail Create an SDH microwave trail. Activate or deactivate an RTN trail. l Manage the alarms and performance events related to an RTN trail. Query current and history alarms, current and history performance data, UAT, and performance threshold-crossing records of an RTN trail. Set the performance parameters for an RTN trail. Query the RTN trails and customer information affected by an alarm. l Filter trails in three ways Filter all: Filter all trails and display only the qualified trails on a network Secondary filter: Filter the trails that are displayed, according to the filter criteria. Incremental filter: Filter all trails and display the newly qualified trails together with the currently displayed ones
Management of Packet Services

l PWE3 service management Create PWE3 services of multiple types, such as ATM, CES, and Ethernet. Predeploy a PWE3 service. Implement the function of automatically discovering PWE3 services. Modify and delete PWE3 services, and filter PWE3 services to view the desired services. Manage multi-segment PWE3 services. Implement the protection management of PWE3 services. View the topology of PWE3 services. View the alarms of a PWE3 service. View the performance of a PWE3 service. Manage discrete PWE3 services. Manage PWE3 services based on rights and domains. Clone a PWE3 service.
Manage PWE3 service templates. Implement the function of automatically generating Ethernet OAM for PWE3 services. l Tunnel Management Create static CR, RSVP, LDP, and IP tunnels. Create RSVP and LDP tunnels in batches. Predeploy a tunnel. Implement the function of automatically discovering tunnels. Modify and delete a tunnel, and filter tunnels to view the desired tunnels. View the topology of tunnels, including the working and protection routes. View the alarm of a tunnel. View the performance of a tunnel. Manage discrete tunnels. Create, modify, and delete 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups, and implement the function of automatically discovering 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups. Switch services in a 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection group manually. Implement the function of displaying the topology of 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups.
Network-Wide Clock Topology Management

l l l Support the IEEE 1588 V2, SDH, and synchronous Ethernet clocks. Display clock trace relationship. Display clock alarm status.
8-12
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
9 PTN Network Feature Management
PTN Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functions and features of PTN NE management and network management. 9.1 PTN NE Management NE configuration includes the configuration of attributes, communications, services, protection schemes, and clocks on an NE. 9.2 E2E PTN Management E2E network management is also referred to as trail management, which means the trail-based configuration of network management data. The trail-based configuration can be performed by searching for the NE-layer data on the U2000 or by configuring the network-layer data on the U2000. Then, the configuration is delivered to all associated NEs. Compared with the NE-based configuration, the trail-based configuration is easier.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
9-1
9.1 PTN NE Management

NE configuration includes the configuration of attributes, communications, services, protection schemes, and clocks on an NE.
l Modifying NE attributes such as: NE name NE ID Extended NE ID Remarks NE pre-configuration l Synchronizing NE time: NE time can be synchronized by delivering the system time of the U2000 server to all NEs. In addition, you can specify automatic synchronization time and automatic synchronization period on the U2000. Plug and play feature of boards: After a board is inserted into a correct slot, the NE Panel displays the board and board information. Disabling functions automatically: Service-affecting functions, such as loopback and automatic laser shutdown (ALX), can be disabled automatically by specifying an automatic disabling time. When the time arrives, these functions are disabled automatically. Environment monitoring Board replacement Fan management
l l
l l l
Service Interface Types Configuration

The working mode and application scenarios of an interface are determined by the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, and Layer 3 attributes of the interface. Basic attributes are the physical attributes of an interface. Layer 2 attributes are the data link layer attributes of an interface, such as ATM, VLAN, and QinQ. Layer 3 attributes are the network layer attributes of an interface, such as IP attribute. Table 9-1 lists the types of PTN service interfaces supported by the U2000.
9-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Table 9-1 Types of PTN service interfaces Service Interface Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type General attributes Port Type MP Group Supported or Not Not supported Function
SDH interface
Physical port
The general attributes of an SDH interface can be configured according to its Layer 3 attributes or be set to a channelized STM service interface. Carrying ATM services Carrying tunnels after the PPP protocol is enabled Carrying TDM services Carrying IMA signals Added to a multi-link PPP (MP) group after the PPP protocol is enabled The general attributes of an Ethernet interface can be configured according to the Layer 2 attributes and Layer 3 attributes of the interface.
Layer 2 attributes Layer 3 attributes
Physical port Physical port
Not supported Not supported
PDH interface
General attributes Layer 2 attributes Layer 3 attributes
Physical port Physical port Physical port
Not supported Not supported Supported
Ethernet interface
General attributes
N/A
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
9-3
Service Interface
Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type Layer 2 attributes
Port Type
MP Group Supported or Not Not supported
Function
Physical port
Carrying userside or networkside Ethernet services Carrying tunnels The general attributes of an Ethernet interface can be configured according to Layer 2 attributes and Layer 3 attributes. VLAN Sub Interface: carrying Ethernet services l EOA Virtual Interface: carrying IP tunnels or GRE tunnels l VLAN Sub Interface: used for BFD, L3VPN or carrying tunnels l L3 Virtual Interface: carrying IPLINE services
Layer 3 attributes Ethernet virtual interface General attributes
Physical port Logical port
Not supported Not supported
Layer 2 attributes
Logical port
Not supported
Layer 3 attributes
Logical port
Not supported
9-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Service Interface
Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type Advanced attributes
Port Type
MP Group Supported or Not Not supported
Function
Logical port
The advanced attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface can be configured according to attributes of an ADLS2+ interface. Carrying ADSL signals Carrying ADSL signals Carrying G.SHDSL signals Carrying G.SHDSL signals Set according to the bound mode Set according to the bound mode Carrying G.SHDSL signals The general attributes of a serial interface can be configured according to the Layer 3 attributes of the interface. A serial interface can be added to an MP group after the PPP protocol is enabled.
ADSL interface
General attributes DSLTRUNK attributes
Physical port Logical port Physical port
G.SHDSL interface
General attributes Bound mode
N/A
EFM bound group ATM bound group IMA bound group Serial interface General attributes
Logical port Logical port Logical port
Layer 3 attributes
Logical port
Supported
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
9-5
Service Interface
Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type General attributes
Port Type
MP Group Supported or Not -
Function
MP Group
The general attributes of an MP group can be configured according to the IP attributes of the group. Carrying tunnels
IP attributes
Logical port
Microwave Interface Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Configure a microwave interface, including general attributes, IF attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, and advanced attributes. Configure a radio link, including IF 1+1 protection, IF boards, and ODU boards. Configure HOP management.
IS-IS Protocol Configuration

The U2000 uses the intermediate system-to-intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol as the protocol of the network control plane, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l l l l l Configure node attributes Configure port attributes Import routes Configure the TE information of a link Configure GR sessions Configure route aggregation View route forwarding tables

The U2000 uses the open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol as the protocol of the network control plane, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l l l
9-6
Configure node attributes Configure port attributes Configure peer attributes Import routes Configure the TE information of a link
l l l
Configure route aggregation Query peer information View route forwarding tables
MP-BGP Protocol Configuration

The U2000 uses the internal border gateway protocol (IBGP) to implement L3VPN functions, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l Configure MP-BGP instances Configure MP-BGP peers Configure route filtering policies
LDP Protocol Configuration

The U2000 uses the label distribution protocol (LDP) to create LSP connections and PW connections, and provides the following configuration functions: l l l l l l Configure MPLS-LDP peer entities Configure node attributes Configure port attributes Configure IP address filtering tables Configure routing policies Configure label policies
RSVP Protocol Configuration

The U2000 uses the resource reserved protocol (RSVP) to create LSP connections, and provides the following configuration functions: l l Configure node attributes Configure port attributes
Static Route Management Configuration

The U2000 supports the configuration of static route management.
Address Resolution Configuration

The U2000 supports the configuration of address resolution.
Clock Configuration
The U2000 supports the configuration of various clock modes, and provides the following functions: l l l Configure the clock domain Query the status of clock synchronization Configure the IEEE 1588 Packet Clock Configure clock services Configure clock synchronization attributes
Configure the clock source priority table Configure clock subnets Configure external time interfaces l l Configure ACR clocks Configure CES ACR and 1588 ACR clocks Configure physical-layer clocks Query the status of clock synchronization Set clock source priority tables, including System clock source priority list Priority table for phase-locked sources of 1st external clock output Priority table for phase-locked sources of 2nd external clock output Setting clock source switching parameters, including Clock source reversion parameters Clock source switching condition Clock source switching Configure clock subnets, including Clock subnets Clock quality SSM output control Clock ID status Setting phase-locked sources output by external clock, including External clock output phase-locked source 2 Mbit/s phase-locked source external clock attributes
Board-Level Protection Configuration

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Configure TPS protection of a subboard. Configure board 1+1 protection for the SCC and cross-connect boards. Check the switching status. Perform protection switching.
Synchronization Protocol Configuration

In the application scenario of dual-homing, the status of the peer equipment needs to be obtained either for the MC LAG or for the cross-MC LMSP. Meanwhile, the actions on both sides need to be negotiated based on different fault cases. With the method of adding information of the peer end, a channel is established for control status synchronization with the peer end. In this manner, the control packets can be transmitted and received through the channel and link fault detection can be performed.
9-8
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
LAG/MC LAG Configuration

A link aggregation group (LAG) aggregates multiple Ethernet physical links to form a logical link with a higher transmission rate. This function improves link availability and increases link capacity. A multi-chassis (MC) LAG achieves load sharing between NEs. The U2000 supports the configuration of the following LAG/MC LAG attributes: l l l l Load sharing type (sharing or non-sharing) LAG types (manual or static) Load sharing hash algorithm Port priority and system priority
LMSP/MC LMSP Configuration

Linear MSP (LMSP) includes 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP. The protection scheme uses the protection channel to protect services that are transmitted on the working channel. When the working channel fails, services are switched to the protection channel. Linear MSP applies to the POS interface and structured STM interface. The multi-chassis (MC) LMSP can implement the LMSP between NEs. The U2000 supports the following LMSP/MC LMSP functions: l l l Create LMSP groups Check the status of LMSP groups Perform a linear MSP switching
MSTP Configuration
The multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) can be used to clear loops in a network. The MSTP uses a specific algorithm to block some redundant trails and change a loop network to a nonloop tree network. This function prevents packet increase in a loop network and generation of broadcast storms in an endless cycle. Different from the STP and RSTP, the MSTP can forward data according to VLAN packets, achieving load balance of VLAN data. The U2000 provides the following functions: l l l Configure parameters of port groups and bridges Configure CIST and MSTI parameters Query CIST status and MSTI status
IGMP Snooping Configuration

The Internet group management protocol snooping (IGMP Snooping) is the multicast constraint scheme that runs on Layer 2 equipment, and is used to manage and control multicast groups. The U2000 supports the configuration of IGMP snooping for E-LAN services, and provides the following functions: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure IGMP Snooping protocol parameters Configure fast leave ports

l l l
Manage routes Configure route member ports Query statistics of IGMP protocol packets.
BFD Configuration
The bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) protocol can be used to check the Ethernet link status. BFD is a simple Hello protocol. It is similar to the neighbor detection of those famous protocols in many aspects. A pair of systems periodically send detection packets on the bidirectional channel where a session between the two systems is created. If a system does not receive any detection packet from the opposite end in a specific time, the system regards that a failure occurs on the channel. The U2000 supports the BFD detection on IP/GRE tunnels and the interior gateway protocol (IGP).
LPT Configuration
The link state pass through (LPT) protocol is used to return the remote-end link status to the near end. The near-end equipment performs operations according to the remote-end link status. When the intermediate transmission network is faulty, the LPT immediately informs the access equipment at both ends of the transmission network to activate the backup network. In this manner, the normal transmission of important data is ensured.
QoS Configuration
The quality of service (QoS) indicates the performance of the data flow that travels through a network. The QoS is used to ensure end-to-end service quality. The QoS cannot increase the bandwidth, but it can minimize the delay and jitter in the network by properly allocating and monitoring network resources. In this manner, the quality of important services is ensured. The DiffServ (DS) domain consists of a group of network nodes that enable the DiffServ function, that is, DS nodes. In a DS domain, all DS nodes use the same service provision policy to achieve the same per-hop behavior (PHB). DS nodes are classified into edge DS nodes and internal DS nodes. Edge DS nodes usually perform complex flow classification on the traffic that enters the DS domain. Different types of traffic are marked with different PHB service types. Internal DS nodes only need to perform simple flow classification based on PHB service types. The U2000 supports the following QoS functions: l l l l l l l l l
9-10
Configure QoS profile Configure DiffServ domains Configure ATM CoS mapping Configure SVLAN DEI used flag Configure simple flow classification and complex flow classification Configure CAR and shaping Configure the color blindness mode Configure the WFQ schedule policy Configure the port WRED policy
l l
Configure the service WRED policy To simplify operations and share common QoS configuration parameters, the U2000 supports the creation of QoS function point policies, including port policy, ATM policy, V-UNI ingress policy, V-UNI egress policy, PW policy, and QinQ policy. By using these function point policies, you can bind CAR configuration, shaping configuration, flow classification configuration, WFQ schedule policy, WRED policy, and color blindness mode. Configure CoS queue mapping Configure the QoS profile for applying the same QoS policies to multiple NEs.
l l
MPLS Tunnel Configuration

The multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) protocol achieves transparent transmission of data services. MPLS tunnels are the tunnels defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel achieves end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs related to the service. See Figure 9-1. Unicast MPLS tunnel is mainly used to transparently transmit point-to-point PWE3 services. Figure 9-1 Unicast MPLS tunnel
The U2000 provides the following functions associated with MPLS tunnels on a per-NE basis: l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Configure MPLS basic attributes Configure static unicast MPLS tunnels Create forward and backward MPLS tunnels at the same time
l l l l
Create static and bidirectional MPLS tunnels Create the E-LSP Manage PWs Manage tunnel labels and PW labels

The U2000 provides the following functions associated with MPLS tunnel protection groups: l Create MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection groups and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection groups and configuring switching mode, revertive mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, and hold-off time for the groups Perform MPLS tunnel protection switching Query the status of an MPLS tunnel protection group
l l
MS PW Configuration
By creating multi-segment pseudowire (MS-PW) to transmit services, you can save tunnel resources and transmit services over different networks.
PW APS/MC PW APS Configuration

As a network protection mechanism, PW automatic protection switching (APS) is intended to protect the services on the working PW with a protection PW. That is, when the working PW is faulty, the services on the working PW are switched to the protection PW. In this manner, the services on the working PW are protected. The MC PW APS can be used to implement inter-NE PW APS protection. The following PW APS/MC PW APS functions can be performed on a per-NE basis: l l Create protection groups Bind the master and slave protection pairs
IP Tunnel and GRE Tunnel Configuration

If the equipment at the two ends of an IP network does not support MPLS tunnels, PWE3 services can pass through the IP network by using IP tunnels or GRE tunnels. IP tunnels and GRE tunnels mainly apply to the Offload scenarios of mobile communication. The U2000 supports the configuration of bidirectional IP tunnels and GRE tunnels on a per-NE basis.
Dual-Homing Protection Configuration

In the case of dual-homing protection, two PE nodes (dual-homing nodes) are connected to one CE node through attachment circuit (AC) links so that the services received by the PE nodes at both ends of the bearer network can be protected. The following types of dual-homing protection can be configured for ATM and CES services: l l
9-12
1:1 MC-PW APS and 1:1 MC-LMSP 1:1 MC-PW APS and 1+1 MC-LMSP
l l
1:1 PW redundancy and 1:1 MC-LMSP 1+1 PW redundancy and 1+1 MC-LMSP
The following types of dual-homing protection can be configured for E-line services. l l 1:1 MC-PW APS and MC-LAG 1:1 PW redundancy and MC-LAG

Circuit emulation services (CES services) achieve transparent transmission of TDM circuit switching data on the PSN. See Figure 9-2. The 2G/3G stations or Intranet line accesses the PTN equipment by using the E1/ channelized STM-1 line. The equipment divides the E1 signals into pieces, encapsulates the pieces into the Ethernet, and transmits the E1 signals to the opposite end by using the PW. Figure 9-2 CES service application model
The U2000 provides the following functions associated with CES services: l l l Create CES services and corresponding PWs at the same time Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI CES services Create CES services of structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and CES services of structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP) Configure QoS policies of CES services Configure idle timeslot recovery value Configure CES service alarm transparent transmission Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online
l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
ATM Service Configuration

ATM emulation services achieve transparent transmission of ATM services on the PSN. See Figure 9-3. The 3G station accesses the PTN equipment by using the ATM IMA group. The equipment encapsulates the ATM cells into the Ethernet, and transmits the ATM cells to the opposite end by using the PW. Figure 9-3 ATM service application model
The U2000 provides the following functions associated with ATM services: l l l l l l l l Create ATM services that contain multiple ATM connections Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI ATM services Create PVP and PVC ATM services Create ATM services and corresponding PWs at the same time Configure the IMA group Configure QoS policies of ATM services Configure the CoS mapping table. Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online
E-Line Service Configuration

E-line services achieve point-to-point transparent transmission of user data. The equipment transmits user packets from the user side to the network side based on Port or Port+VLAN. See Figure 9-4. Company A has branches in City 1 and City 3. Company C has branches in City 1 and City 2. Branches of Company A or Company C that are in different cities need data communication. The PTN equipment can provide E-line services for Company A and Company C, to meet their communication requirements. In addition, the service data can be completely isolated.
Figure 9-4 E-Line Service
The U2000 supports the following functions associated with E-line services on a per-NE basis: l l l l l l l Create UNI-UNI E-Line services Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on ports Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on PWs Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on QinQ links Configure QoS policies for L2VPN services and corresponding PWs during the creation of L2VPN services Configure the V-UNI group Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online
E-AGGR Service Configuration

E-AGGR services achieve multipoint-to-point aggregation of user data. The equipment uses several ports to access services from the V-UNI side, and converges the services into one PW at the network side for transmission. See Figure 9-5 and Figure 9-6. A carrier wants to construct a 3G network. Services of each Node B are converged and transported to the RNC. The data between each Node B and RNC is regarded as one service. At the convergence point, the QoS parameters such as the overall bandwidth are specified.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
9-15
Figure 9-5 E-AGGR service scenario 1
Figure 9-6 E-AGGR service scenario 2
The U2000 supports the following functions associated with E-AGGR services on a per-NE basis: l l l l Configure the VLAN forwarding table items of an E-AGGR service Configure QoS policies for L2VPN services and corresponding PWs during the creation of L2VPN services Configure the V-UNI group Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online
9-16
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
E-LAN Service Configuration

Based on the self-learning of MAC addresses, E-LAN services achieve packet forwarding between multiple V-UNI and NNI interfaces. See Figure 9-7. The HQ of Company A is in City 3. Company A has Branch A in City 1, City 2, and City 3, and has Branch B in City 1 and City 2. Branch A and Branch B do not have business with each other. Hence, the data should be isolated between the two branches. The HQ has requirements of communicating with each branch and accessing the Internet. Figure 9-7 E-LAN service
E-LAN services use different VLAN IDs to identify service data of different branches. In this way, data is shared within a branch and is isolated from the data for other branches. The Internet data of the HQ is also isolated from the internal service data by using the VLAN. The U2000 supports the following functions associated with E-LAN services on a per-NE basis: l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Create E-LAN services that are carried on port Create E-LAN services that are carried on PWs Create E-LAN services that are carried on QinQ links Configure QoS policies for L2VPN services and corresponding PWs during the creation of L2VPN services Configure the V-UNI and NNI interfaces of an E-LAN service Configure the split horizon group of an E-LAN service Configure the V-UNI group Configure the MAC address learning parameters Configure the unknown frame processing mode Configure the static MAC address
l l l
Disable an MAC address Configure the self-learning of MAC addresses Select the tunnel where a PW is carried online
Service Mirroring Configuration

In service mirroring, all packets that enter a certain port are duplicated and then duplicated packets are transmitted through an observation port. In this manner, the normal service is scarcely affected when packets of the mirrored service are captured and analyzed. You can configure the service mirroring as follows: l l Local service mirroring Remote service mirroring
MPLS OAM Configuration

MPLS OAM is an OAM function of the MPLS network. This function can check the quality of LSPs in an MPLS network. The MPLS OAM scheme can effectively detect a defect inside the network at the MPLS layer, and then report and handle the defect. When a fault occurs, the MPLS OAM triggers a protection switching. The U2000 provides the following MPLS OAM functions: l l l l l l l Configure MPLS OAM parameters of a tunnel Perform CV/FFD check Perform LSP ping check Perform PW ping check Perform LSP traceroute check Perform PW traceroute check Enable and disable FDI
Ethernet Service OAM Configuration

Ethernet service OAM is an end-to-end OAM function for services. This function can check the quality of Ethernet links that pass through multiple NEs. The Ethernet service OAM checks an Ethernet link by sending OAM packets. The OAM packet is handled only at the MAC layer. As a low rate protocol, the OAM protocol occupies very low network bandwidth. Hence, this function does not affect services carried by the link. The U2000 provides the following Ethernet service OAM functions: l l l l Create maintenance domains (MDs), maintenance associations (MAs), maintenance end points (MEPs), and maintenance intermediate points (MIPs) Perform a CC check Perform an LB check Perform an LT check
9-18
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Ethernet Port OAM Configuration

The Ethernet port OAM is mainly used to automatically check the connectivity and performance and locate the faults of the physical links. It is applicable when the physical Ethernet ports are directly connected. The U2000 provides the following Ethernet port OAM functions: l l l Configure OAM parameters Configure the OAM error frame monitoring Query the remote OAM parameters
ATM OAM Configuration

ATM OAM is an end-to-end OAM function for ATM services. This function can check the quality of ATM links that pass through multiple NEs. The ATM OAM function checks an ATM link by inserting some OAM cells of the standard cell structure into the user cell flow. The U2000 provides the following ATM OAM functions: l l l l l Set segment end attributes Perform CC activation tests Perform remote loopbacks Settin the LLID Configure ATM alarm transmission
NMS Server Configuration

After the IP address of the NMS is configured on the gateway NE, all the managed non-gateway NEs can automatically go online after being powered on.
9.2 E2E PTN Management

E2E network management is also referred to as trail management, which means the trail-based configuration of network management data. The trail-based configuration can be performed by searching for the NE-layer data on the U2000 or by configuring the network-layer data on the U2000. Then, the configuration is delivered to all associated NEs. Compared with the NE-based configuration, the trail-based configuration is easier. To perform E2E network management on the U2000, the relevant license is required.
PWE3 Service Management

Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Create PWE3 services of multiple types, such as ATM, CES, and Ethernet services. Predeploys PWE3 services. Implement the function of automatically discovering PWE3 services. Modify and delete PWE3 services, and view PWE3 services by using the filtering function. Manage PWE3 services.
l l l l l l l l l l l l
Implement the protection management of PWE3 services. View the topology of PWE3 services. View the alarms of PWE3 services. View the performance events of PWE3 services. Create a monitoring instance for a PWE3 service. Test and check PWE3 services. Manage discrete PWE3 services. Manage PWE3 services based on authority. Clone PWE3 services. Manage PWE3 service templates. Implement the function of automatically generating Ethernet OAM for PWE3 services. Set and view the status of port loopback at the node of PWE3 services.
VPLS Service Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Create VPLS services. Predeploy VPLS services. Implement the function of automatically discovering VPLS services. Modify and delete VPLS services, and view VPLS services by using the filtering function. Manage VPLS services. View the topology of VPLS services. View the alarms of VPLS services. View the performance events of VPLS services. Create a monitoring instance for a VPLS service. Test and check VPLS services. Manage discrete VPLS services. Manage VPLS services based on authority. Manage VPLS service templates. Implement the function of automatically generating Ethernet OAM for VPLS services. Set and view the status of port loopback at the node of VPLS services.
L3VPN Service Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l
9-20
Create an L3VPN service that supports the BGP/MPLS protocol. Predeploy an L3VPN service. Implement the function of automatically discovering L3VPN services. Modify and delete L3VPN services, and view L3VPN services by using the filtering function. View the topology of L3VPN services. View the alarms of an L3VPN service.
l l l l l l l l l
View the performance events of an L3VPN service. Create a monitoring instance for a L3VPN service. Test and check L3VPN services. Manage discrete L3VPN services. Manage L3VPN services based on authority. Manage L3VPN service templates. Configure the VRRP. Set and view the status of port loopback at the node of L3VPN services. Configure OAM.
Tunnel Management
You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Create static CR, RSVP, LDP, and IP tunnels. Create RSVP and LDP tunnels in batches. Predeploy a tunnel. Implement the function of automatically discovering tunnels. Modify and delete a tunnel, and view tunnels by using the filtering function. View the topology of tunnels, including the working and protection routes. View the alarms of a tunnel. View the performance events of a tunnel. Create a monitoring instance for a tunnel. Test and check a tunnel. Manage discrete tunnels. Manage static CR, RSVP, LDP, and IP tunnels. Create, modify, and delete 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups, and implement the function of automatically discovering 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups. Switch services in a 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection group manually. Implement the function of displaying the topology of 1+1 or 1:1 tunnel protection groups. Create a tunnel and its protection tunnel at the same time. Display the name of a tunnel in the global LSP view. Manage the bidirectional static CR tunnels. Set and view the status of port loopback at the node of tunnel. Configure OAM.
IP Line Service Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Create an IP line service. Predeploy an IP line service. Implement the function of automatically discovering IP line services. Implement the protection management of IP line service.
l l l l l l l
Modify and delete IP line services, and view IP line services by using the filtering function. View the topology of IP line services. View the alarms of an IP line service. View the performance events of an IP line service. Test and check an IP line service. Manage IP line services based on rights and domains. Set and view the status of port loopback at the node of IP line services.
Composite Service Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Manage PWE3 access into PWE3 and PWE3 access into E-AGGR services. Modify and delete composite services, and view composite services by using the filtering function. Implement the function of automatically discovering composite services. View the topology of composite services, including the internal connections between the services. Display the status of composite services.
PTN Network Expansion and Service Cutover Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Expand a PTN by adding nodes, deleting nodes, and upgrading or adjusting link capacities. Implement the cutover of PWE3 trails. Prepare a manual or scheduled service cutover plan. Prepare a service cutover plan by using either the rollback cutover policy or the best-effort cutover policy. Hand over, restore, and verify the trails of cutover groups in batches. Create and modify cutover groups and cutover plans, and delete cutover groups and cutover plans in batches. Create and delete active and pre-configured services in cutover groups.
9-22
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
10 Router Feature and Switch Feature Management
10
Router Feature and Switch Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes router features and switch features. 10.1 Router Management Router management allows you to configure and maintain routers by means of the GUI. 10.2 Router V8 Management Router V8 management allows you to view NE configurations by means of GUIs. 10.3 Automatic NE Configuration Management Automatic NE configuration management is implemented by means of DHCP on the U2000. Automatic NE configuration management allows you to deploy and remotely debug case-shaped routers, reducing the costs in device deployment and increasing the efficiency of device deployment. 10.4 Switch Management Switch management allows you to configure and maintain switches by means of the GUI. 10.5 Template Management In NE configuration management, many operations need to be performed repeatedly. The template management function is introduced to solve this problem. This function allows you to rapidly configure NEs in batches. 10.6 Diagnosis Management Diagnosis management provides easy-to-use diagnostic functions for you to test network and service connectivity. Diagnostic cases can be run manually or run automatically at scheduled times. 10.7 Cluster Management The Huawei Group Management Protocol (HGMP) is mainly used to solve the problems of automatic management operations and centralized management for multiple dispersed low-end and mid-range switches. 10.8 Node Redounded Management Enhanced-Trunk (E-Trunk), developed on the basis of Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), is a protocol that controls and implements link aggregation among multiple sets of
equipment. E-Trunk is mainly applied to a scenario where a CE is dual homed to a VPLS, VLL, or PWE3 network. In the scenario, E-Trunk can be used to protect the PEs and the links between the CE and PEs. 10.9 Report Subsystem Management The report subsystem allows you to generate, distribute, and manage reports based on the Web and helps you to monitor, analyze, and optimize network performance. 10.10 VPN Service Management The U2000 provides centralized and unified management, including service deployment, service monitoring, and service diagnosis, on VPN services, namely, BGP/MPLS VPN service, VPLS service, and PWE3 service. 10.11 Tunnel Service Management Tunnel service management is used to plan and deploy services on the entire MPLS network. Carriers can plan, deploy, audit, and monitor end-to-end LSPs through tunnel service management, thus reducing the costs of operating and maintaining MPLS networks.
10-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
10.1 Router Management

Router management allows you to configure and maintain routers by means of the GUI.
Device Management
Device types and software versions can be automatically identified and differentiated management can be performed accordingly.
Component Management
l l Information about components, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports can be automatically obtained. Information about components can be refreshed and component status can be monitored.
Panel Management
Information about components on panels, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports, can be displayed.
Clock Management
Physical clocks and PTP clocks can be configured and managed.
Interface Management
The following interfaces can be configured: l l l Ethernet interfaces POS interfaces Virtual interfaces such as subinterfaces, trunk interfaces, loopback interfaces, and virtual template (VT) interfaces
LLDP Management
LLDP can be globally configured or on interfaces.
Ethernet Features Management

l l l VLAN functions, including global VLAN, port VLAN, VLAN stacking, and VLAN mapping, can be configured. MAC address forwarding can be managed by configuring static MAC addresses, MAC address learning rules, and MAC address aging. The VLAN switch feature is supported.

OAM is implemented on the basis of two standards: IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The U2000 can continuously monitor user services, and identify and locate faults by means of IEEE 802.1ag; the U2000 can monitor user services of the last mile and report faults by means of IEEE 802.3ah.
Ethernet OAM management supports the following functions: l l Manages global information. Supports IEEE 802.1ag-related functions, such as the configurations of the MD, MA, local MEP, remote MEP, and MIP, and diagnostic operations (including loopback, link trace, MAC ping, and MAC trace). Supports IEEE 802.3ah-related functions, such as Ethernet OAM configurations, querying ports, and loopback detection.
Channel Management
The following channels can be configured and managed: l l l l l l VTYs Telnet and FTP services Syslog parameters Alarms SSH services NAP services
QoS Management
The following QoS functions are supported: l l l l l Traffic classifications, traffic behaviors, and traffic policies Interface QoS and system QoS DS domain policies Traffic mirroring and port mirroring HQoS, including the discard policy, HQoS flow queue policy, HQoS flow queue mapping, HQoS scheduler, and HQoS user scheduling
Route Management
Static routes, routing information, routing policies, OSPF routes, and BGP/IS-IS public network and private network routes can be configured.
MPLS Management
The following NE-level MPLS configurations are supported: l l l l l MPLS-related protocols MPLS TE tunnel MPLS interface parameters Static LSPs MPLS OAM detection and protection groups
ACL Management
ACLs-based access control is supported.
BRAS Management
The following broadband remote access service (BRAS) features of multi-service gateways are supported: l l l l l l l l l Address pool management Authorization, authentication and accounting (AAA) management Domain and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) management Built-in Web server management Layer 3 Internet Service Provider (ISP) configuration management Portal server management VLAN management User management Real-time statistics collection on domains, IP address segments, and device IP addresses
VPDN Management
The Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) can be configured on multi-service gateways and L2TP tunnels can be managed.
BFD Management
The following BFD functions are supported: l l l l BFD attributes BFD sessions BFD alarms BFD for VRF/PW/MPLS TE/VSI/physical links
VRRP/VGMP Management
l l Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) configurations, including global VRRP attributes, interface attributes, and interface VR, and VRRP alarms, are supported. VRRP Group Management Protocol (VGMP) configurations, including global VGMP attributes, VGMP members, and VGMP alarms, are supported.
VPN Management
The following VPN management functions are supported: l l l l l Tunnel policies PWs PW templates VSIs VRFs
MSE Management
MSE functions, including global MSE, AAA, user management, and interface services, are supported.
Layer 3 Multicast Management

The following Layer 3 multicast functions are supported: l l l l l Manage routers Manage IGMP Manage PIM Manage MSDP Manage L3VPN RP

The following VSI-based Layer 2 multicast functions are supported for routers: l l l l IGMP snooping SSM mapping Multicast CAC Multicast groups
E-Trunk Management
The E-trunk search and discovery, E-trunk configuration, E-trunk member management, and trunk member monitoring are supported.
Smart Configuration Tool

The Smart Configuration Tool (SCT) can import the routers managed by the U2000. CLI grammar check, template configuration, navigation paths are supported. The SCT can issue configurations in batches and can be integrated with the U2000.
ANCP Management
The following ANCP features are supported for routers: l l l l ANCP management ANCP global configuration Line management Neighbor management
10.2 Router V8 Management

Router V8 management allows you to view NE configurations by means of GUIs.
Device Management
NE software versions can be automatically identified.
Panel Management
l l l l Information about components such as frames, boards, power supplies, fans, subboards, and ports on the NE panel can be displayed. Showing alarms using alarm indicators on the NE panel. Information about alarms can be displayed. Real-time performance data and historical performance data can be displayed.
NE Management
The following functions can be configured and information about these functions can be displayed: l l l l l l l Routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF, and IS-IS Security, including AAA and attack defense MPLS VPN, including L2VPN and L3VPN QoS Interfaces, including Ethernet and trunk interfaces Channels, including SNMP, Telnet, and NETCONF channels
10.3 Automatic NE Configuration Management

Automatic NE configuration management is implemented by means of DHCP on the U2000. Automatic NE configuration management allows you to deploy and remotely debug case-shaped routers, reducing the costs in device deployment and increasing the efficiency of device deployment. Automatic NE configuration management supports the following functions: l l l l l l l Starts or stops the DHCP server. Manages configuration data. Assigns NE IP addresses automatically. Upgrades NE versions. Modifies and applies NE scripts. Views script application results. Changes management IP addresses.
Automatic NE configuration management uses the C/S model, in which the NEs serve as the DHCP clients and the U2000 serves as the DHCP server to remotely deploy and commission NEs.
Function
The detailed functions are as follows: l Manages planned records The functions of managing configuration data, creating a data record and importing data records in batches are provided.
Manages DHCP servers The function of automatically assigning IP addresses to NEs is supported when the DHCP server function is enabled.
Manages scripts The function of managing device scripts on the U2000 is provided for automatically deploying device configurations.
Upgrades system versions remotely The function of remotely upgrading device versions is provided. Both automatic and manual upgrade modes are available.
Deploys device scripts remotely The function of remotely deploying device scripts is provided. Both automatic and manual deployment modes are available.
Monitors task status during automatic device deployment The function of monitoring task status during automatic device deployment is provided.
10.4 Switch Management

Switch management allows you to configure and maintain switches by means of the GUI.
Device Management
Device types and software versions can be automatically identified and differentiated management can be performed accordingly.
Component Management
l l Information about components, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports can be automatically obtained. Information about components can be refreshed and component status can be monitored.
Panel Management
Information about components on panels, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports, can be displayed.
LLDP Management
LLDP can be globally configured or on interfaces.
Interface Management
The following interfaces can be configured: l l l Ethernet interfaces POS interfaces Virtual interfaces such as subinterfaces, trunk interfaces, loopback interfaces, and Tunnel interfaces
10-8
Ethernet Features Management

The VLAN, VCT, and VLAN switch features are supported.
OAM Management
OAM is implemented on the basis of two standards: IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The U2000 can continuously monitor user services, and identify and locate faults by means of IEEE 802.1ag; the U2000 can monitor user services of the last mile and report faults by means of IEEE 802.3ah. Ethernet OAM management supports the following functions: l l Manages global information. Supports IEEE 802.1ag-related functions, such as the configurations of the MD, MA, local MEP, remote MEP, and MIP, and diagnostic operations (including loopback, link trace, MAC ping, and MAC trace). Supports IEEE 802.3ah-related functions, such as Ethernet OAM configurations, querying ports, and loopback detection.
Route Management
Static routes, routing policies, OSPF routes, IS-IS routes, and BGP routes can be configured.
MPLS Management
The following NE-level MPLS configurations are supported: l l l l l MPLS-related protocols MPLS TE tunnel MPLS interface parameters Static LSPs MPLS OAM detection and protection groups
BFD Management
The following BFD functions are supported: l l l l BFD attributes BFD sessions BFD alarms BFD for VRF/PW/MPLS TE/VSI/physical links
VRRP/VGMP Management
l l Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) configurations, including global VRRP attributes, interface attributes, and interface VR, and VRRP alarms, are supported. VRRP Group Management Protocol (VGMP) configurations, including global VGMP attributes, VGMP members, and VGMP alarms, are supported.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
VPN Management
The following VPN functions are supported: l l l l l Tunnel policies PWs PW templates VSIs VRFs
EPON Management
PON interface management and ONU management are supported.
Channel Management
The following channels can be configured and managed: l l l l l l l VTYs FTP services Local users Syslog parameters Alarm services SSH services SNMP parameters
DLDP Management
The Device Link Detection Protocol (DLDP), packet authentication mode, and statistics collection are supported.
MSTP Management
MSTP domains, MSTP protection, and statistics collection are supported.
DHCP Management
DHCP servers, DHCP relay, client addresses, and DHCP statistics are supported.
Web Authentication Management

The Web authentication server is supported.
Controllable Multicast Management

Multicast group, multicast template, and interface filtering are supported.
Mirroring Management
Local/remote interface mirroring, VLAN mirroring, MAC address mirroring, flow mirroring, CPU mirroring, and CPU buffer statistics are supported.
IP Source Guard Management

Static user binding table, dynamic check, and clearance of dynamic configurations are supported.
Interface Security Management

Ethernet interface security management is supported.
MAC Address Authentication Management

MAC address authentication is supported.
PPPoE+ Management
PPPoE+ functions are supported.
AAA and User Management

AAA and user management are supported.
MFF Management
Static gateways, MFF servers, and MFF network-side interfaces are supported.
ARP Management
Proxy ARP and ARP Ping-IP are supported.
DHCP Snooping Management

Alarms on spoofing attacks, DoS attacks, lease-extending packet attacks, packet sending rate, and packet discarding are supported.
Firewall Management
Firewall functions are supported.
NAT
Network address translation (NAT) is supported.
Traffic Suppression Management

Traffic suppression is supported on Ethernet interfaces.
Anti-attack Management
Whitelists, blacklists, user-defined flow, and CAR are supported.
IP Source Trail Management

Attack source search and URPF are supported.
MBGP Management
Route advertisement policies, route exchange policies, and route attributes are supported.
RRPP Management
RRPP, RRPP instances, RRPP rings, and working mode are supported.
Smart Link Management

Smart Link groups, data flow policies for Smart Link groups, and Monitor Link groups are supported.
IGMP Proxy Management

Static router interfaces, multicast policies, prompt leave, and IGMP proxy are supported.
IGMP Snooping Management

Static router interfaces, multicast policies, and IGMP snooping are supported.
MSDP Management
MSDP peers and SA messages are supported.
PIM-DM Management
Multicast sources, multicast neighbors, multicast forwarding, and assertion management are supported.
PIM-SM Management
Multicast sources, multicast neighbors, dynamic RP, and SPT switching are supported.
IGMP Management
IGMP groups, IGMP group policies, and IGMP features are supported.
Multicast Route Management

Static multicast routes, multicast route policies, and multicast forwarding are supported.

Layer 2 multicast and multicast VLAN replication are supported.
802.1x Management
802.1x management is supported.
Batch VLAN Management

Managing VLANs in batches is supported.
Port Isolation Configuration

Port isolation is supported.
PoE Configuration
PoE is supported.
Stack Configuration
Stack functions are supported.
QoS Management
The following QoS functions are supported: l l l l Traffic classifications, traffic behaviors, and traffic policies Interface QoS and system QoS DS domain policies Traffic mirroring and port mirroring
VLANIF Configuration
VLAN interfaces are supported.
Ethernet Configuration
LDT, MAC tables, BPDU tunnels, and SEP are supported.
Security Configuration
The ACL, firewall, NAT, and ARP features are supported.
Basic Configuration
NAP remote deployment is supported.
10.5 Template Management

In NE configuration management, many operations need to be performed repeatedly. The template management function is introduced to solve this problem. This function allows you to rapidly configure NEs in batches.
Template Features
Default templates are available. When a template is referenced, the attribute settings on the template automatically apply to the configured resource. A template has the following features: l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Offline configuration
Global templates are created in advance and saved on the U2000. They are not created on devices. The creation of global templates is irrelevant to the equipment status. l l Global validity A global template can be referenced by all the devices managed by the U2000. Minimal duplicate data After a global template is applied, the U2000 keeps only one record on the devices that reference this template. When a device references a global template, the U2000 does not add a record of template data. The U2000 only records the reference relationship between the device and the template. l A global template can be referenced by a large number of devices of the same type. The number of global templates, therefore, is small. Consequently, global templates are easy to manage.
Main Templates
The main templates are as follows: l ACL template An ACL template allows you to configure ACLs on multiple interfaces of different routers at the same time, simplifying attack defense configurations on the network access side. l QoS template Routers support the following QoS templates, which can be applied to NE interfaces in batches: CBQoS templates DS domain templates HQoS templates PQ templates Interface CAR templates l IP multicast template Routers support the following IP multicast templates: Layer 2 CAC templates, which can be applied to VSIs, PWs, and NE interfaces to adjust and configure multicast CAC configurations in batches Layer 2 static multicast group templates, which can be applied to PWs and NE interfaces to adjust and configure static multicast groups in batches l l VPN service template Used to configure VPN services in batches. Switch EPON template Used to configure ONU services in batches.
10.6 Diagnosis Management

Diagnosis management provides easy-to-use diagnostic functions for you to test network and service connectivity. Diagnostic cases can be run manually or run automatically at scheduled times.
Test Diagnosis Functions

l The U2000 provides test cases, such as VPLS MAC ping/traceroute, ICMP ping/traceroute, PWE3 ping/traceroute, LSP ping/traceroute, and ICMP VRF ping/traceroute, which can help you to test network connectivity at each protocol layer. The U2000 allows you to combine several test cases into a test suite, so that you can perform test cases in batches. By diagnosing services layer by layer, the U2000 can rapidly locate the network layer where a fault occurs. Application layer DNS, DHCP, FTP, HTTP, SNMP, and VoIP Transport layer TCP and UDP Network layer ICMP ping/traceroute, ICMP VRF ping/traceroute, ICMP jitter, multicast ping/trace, multicast VRF trace, and MTU ping Data link layer 8021.ag MAC ping and CE ping MPLS service PWE3 ping, PWE3 trace, LSP ping, LSP trace, VPLS MAC ping, VPLS MAC trace, MAC study, MFIB ping, and service ping l The U2000 supports intelligent diagnostic result analysis. A result analysis template can be customized to include diagnostic indicators such as delay, jitter, and packet loss ratio and a result analysis policy based on service levels. Diagnostic result analysis can help you rapidly determine network status.
Test Diagnosis Management

Test diagnosis management allows you to test network connectivity and QoS and rapidly pinpoint a fault location. A test diagnostic tool consists of the following parts: l Test suite A test suite consists of multiple test cases. Test cases are implemented on different layers: the application layer, transport layer, network layer, and data link layer. Test cases for MPLS services can also be created. You can choose to perform all test cases or only some cases in a test suite at the same time. QoS can be determined based on the parameters shown in the test results, such as delay, jitter, and packet loss ratio. l l Diagnostic policy Test suites can be performed at a specified interval, such as daily, weekly, or monthly. Network scanning Network information is collected and virtual link connectivity and side-by-side link connectivity are tested. The U2000 displays scanning progress in real time and allows you to stop the scanning. It also provides the traceroute function to locate faults. l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Historical data
The U2000 records historical data of test suite operations. It supports filtering and querying historical data based on test suite names, test results, or test time. l Diagnostic result analysis The U2000 supports intelligent diagnostic result analysis. A result analysis template can be customized to include diagnostic indicators such as delay, jitter, and packet loss ratio and a result analysis policy based on service levels. Diagnostic result analysis can help you rapidly determine network status.
10.7 Cluster Management

The Huawei Group Management Protocol (HGMP) is mainly used to solve the problems of automatic management operations and centralized management for multiple dispersed low-end and mid-range switches. Cluster network management involves the following functions: l l l l l Managing cluster views Configuring clusters Managing cluster configuration files Managing image programs Locating cluster faults
The U2000 provides cluster management for the CX200/CX200D/CX300/CX380/CX600/ S2300/S3300/S5300. This function allows you to manage network equipment in a more convenient and efficient manner. With this function, you can monitor the network status through the physical topology of cluster networks and reduce improper operations on single equipment during management. Therefore, the U2000 meets the ever-increasing service requests. Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2 show the cluster topology management window and functions provided by theU2000. Figure 10-1 Cluster topology
10-16
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Figure 10-2 Navigation path to cluster functions
The U2000 provides the following functions: l l l l l l l l Automatically discovering and dynamically refreshing cluster equipment nodes Automatically discovering and dynamically refreshing the physical topology of cluster networks and links Managing the configurations of cluster equipment in batches and in a unified and centralized manner Maintaining the equipment of a cluster in a centralized manner and supporting fault detection and recovery Facilitating the backup and recovery of configuration data Setting the parameters, such as the management VLAN, IP address pool, and multicast MAC address, for the switches of a cluster Supporting the plug-and-play feature of protocols such as NDP, NTDP, and HGMP Supporting the access to command or member switches through Telnet based on the nodes in the cluster view
10.8 Node Redounded Management

Enhanced-Trunk (E-Trunk), developed on the basis of Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), is a protocol that controls and implements link aggregation among multiple sets of equipment. E-Trunk is mainly applied to a scenario where a CE is dual homed to a VPLS, VLL, or PWE3 network. In the scenario, E-Trunk can be used to protect the PEs and the links between the CE and PEs. This function allows you to perform the following operations: l l l Creat an E-Trunk, bind Eth-Trunks, and configure the attributes of the E-Trunk and the Eth-Trunks. Display the automatically discovered E-Trunk information in the database of the NMS to the interface of the NMS. Automatically discover the E-Trunk by user specify the equipment range, the configuration of the equipment and the E-Trunk group can be automatically discovered.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
10-17
10.9 Report Subsystem Management

The report subsystem allows you to generate, distribute, and manage reports based on the Web and helps you to monitor, analyze, and optimize network performance. The report subsystem can generate reports in both manual and automatic modes. It can be easily integrated with the security management module of the U2000. For more information, refer to the iManager U2000 (RPT)V100R002C01 Release Notes.
10.10 VPN Service Management

The U2000 provides centralized and unified management, including service deployment, service monitoring, and service diagnosis, on VPN services, namely, BGP/MPLS VPN service, VPLS service, and PWE3 service.
Service Deployment
The U2000 provides a user-friendly service configuration GUI on which you can complete all configuration operations. The parameters of multiple sets of equipment can be automatically generated through related service templates. User configuration results can be previewed through the topology before being delivered. l Customer management The U2000 supports the operations of adding, deleting, and modifying customers, and binding customers to VPN services. l BGP/MPLS VPN service management Configuring L3VPNs in networking modes such as Full-Mesh, Hub-Spoke, and Extranet Configuring VPN FRR and IP FRR for L3VPNs and binding L3VPNs to TE tunnels Configuring static, OSPF, and BGP private routes Configuring VPN services in inter-AS OptionA or inter-AS OptionB mode Configuring the service wholesale feature of BGP/MPLS VPNs based on the ME60 l In service wholesale mode, the ME60 forwards all the user service packets of a certain ISP to the access server of the ISP through VPNs. In this mode, the ME60 does not forward packets according to the destination IP addresses of the packets as it usually does. Instead, the ME60 forwards packets according to the ISP information of the users and forwards all the packets from the users to the access server of the ISP. The access server of the ISP then implements the related services or performs service accounting. With the service wholesale feature, the U2000 can support the multi-ISP service. The multi-ISP service is also called the virtual ISP service. For a multi-ISP service, multiple ISPs exist on a physical network. These ISPs lease the physical network of the physical network provider to operate services. Generally, the providers who construct physical networks are called network service providers (NSPs) and the providers who lease physical networks to operate services are called ISPs.
The ME60 supports the multi-ISP service by wholesaling the user service packets of different ISPs to related ISPs. l VPLS service management Supporting the VPLS services in LDP signaling (Martini) mode Supporting the interworking of different VSIs Supporting VLL/VPLS services l PWE3 service management Configuring static and dynamic PWE3 services Supporting PWE3 services in CES, ATM, Ethernet, IWF, and heterogeneous interworking mode Backing up PW configurations Configuring PW FRR l Composite service management The U2000 supports the management on composite services, such as the access of a VLL to another VLL, the access of a VLL to a VPLS network, the access of a VLL to an L3VPN, L3VPN multi-VRF, and inter-AS OptionA.
Automatic Service Discovery

The U2000 provides the function of automatically discovering BGP/MPLS VPN, VPLS, and PWE3 services that are running on the managed network. In addition, the U2000 can quickly load services on the current network to itself for unified management and monitoring, without requiring much user participation.
Service Monitoring
l The U2000 provides the visual topology display function for MPLS VPN, VPLS, and PWE3 services. The running status of the resources used by the current service, such as an interface, a VRF, or a VSI, can be displayed in the related topology view, thus helping you to quickly locate faults. Moreover, the U2000 also allows you to customize topology views. For example, you can place the services of key customers in one topology view for monitoring. You can quickly locate a faulty service based on the alarm generated by the related NE.
Service Diagnosis
l The diagnosis tools are used to detect the connectivity of networks and locate faults. Through the service diagnosis function, you can generate diagnosis tasks according to the selected services and directly operate equipment nodes in topology views. The diagnosis results can be directly displayed.
Service Check and Test

l l l Configuration check: checking the consistency of VPN service configurations on different sites and showing the positions of configuration errors Service connectivity test: testing the service connectivity through the ping and tracert tests, and locating the fault equipment Protocol status test: checking the service protocol status and the forwarding table, and displaying the error information, thereby helping you to locate faults
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
10.11 Tunnel Service Management

Tunnel service management is used to plan and deploy services on the entire MPLS network. Carriers can plan, deploy, audit, and monitor end-to-end LSPs through tunnel service management, thus reducing the costs of operating and maintaining MPLS networks.
Tunnel Deployment
l l l l Enabling MPLS, LDP, and MPLS TE on the network equipment and interfaces in batches Implement the planning of traffic on MPLS core networks by supporting the deployment of end-to-end MPLS TE tunnel services Facilitating the implementation of the MPLS access scheme by supporting the deployment of static LSP services Implementing the end-to-end MPLS OAM protection by supporting the configuration of end-to-end MPLS TE protection groups, configuration of MPLS OAM detection, and monitoring of related alarms
Automatic Tunnel Discovery

With the help of a network administrator, the LSPs and related protection groups that are previously deployed on the network can be restored to the U2000. This satisfies the requirement in the special case where the LSP deployment is prior to the U2000 installation. Moreover, less time of the network administrator is required and the impact of incorrect operations on original services is prevented.
Tunnel Monitoring
l l l Supporting the networkwide tunnel view and displaying multiple types of tunnels, such as static, RSVP, LDP, and IP tunnels, and their alarms in the topology view Collecting and displaying the performance data of tunnels Switching to the related tunnel from an alarm
Tunnel Diagnosis
The U2000 supports LSP ping and LSP tracert functions through which you can diagnose deployed MPLS TE tunnels and static tunnel services.
10-20
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
11 Feature Management for Security Devices
11
Feature Management for Security Devices
About This Chapter

This topic describes the features supported by security devices. 11.1 Security Device Management Security device management allows you to configure and maintain security devices by means of the GUI. 11.2 Single-Point Web Configuration for Security Devices Single-point Web configuration integrates the existing Web functions on the device by embedding browser controls in the Client/Server interfaces. Single-point configuration applies to all the configurations of security devices. In collaboration with centralized security policy configuration, it provides an integrated and comprehensive network security management solution. 11.3 Centralized Security Policy Configuration Deploying a set of security devices with comprehensive security technologies on a network does not mean that the network is well secured. 11.4 Report Subsystem Management The report subsystem provides a complete set of convenient services. It allows you to generate, distribute, and manage reports based on the Web. The powerful report subsystem can help you to monitor, analyze, improve, and plan network performance. 11.5 VPN Service Management The VPN service management module is an important part to implement the IPSec VPN/L2TP VPN solution. It is used to configure and monitor IPSec and L2TP VPN service.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
11-1
11.1 Security Device Management

Security device management allows you to configure and maintain security devices by means of the GUI. Security device management supports the following functions: l Device management Identifies software versions and adapt to different types of devices automatically. Supports channel management, including local users using Telnet and STelnet, SNMP parameters, and trap parameters. l Component management Information about device components, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports can be automatically obtained. Information about device components can be refreshed and device component status can be monitored. l Panel management Information about components on the panel, including frames, boards, power supplies, fans, and ports, can be displayed. l l Interface management General interface information and Ethernet interfaces can be configured. GTP management Security devices can filter GTP packets according to GTP policies to protect GPRS networks from attacks such as GTP overbilling attacks. l Automatic registration The U2000 can automatically update the IP address of a receiving device based on registration messages sent by the receiving device.
11.2 Single-Point Web Configuration for Security Devices

Single-point Web configuration integrates the existing Web functions on the device by embedding browser controls in the Client/Server interfaces. Single-point configuration applies to all the configurations of security devices. In collaboration with centralized security policy configuration, it provides an integrated and comprehensive network security management solution. The Web features of security devices provide easy-to-use Web configuration windows through which users can operate and maintain devices. The single-point Web configuration is a proxy-based Web access mode. It can be implemented without affecting local browsers such as Internet Explorer and Firefox. The single-point Web configuration includes two parts: Web proxy and Web browser. The functions of single-point Web configuration are as follows: l l
11-2
Users can open the Web management window of a device on a U2000 client. Users can log in to the Web window automatically.
l l
Users can access security devices by means of the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) protocol. Multiple Web protocols, such as Java script, Hyper Text Marked Language (HTML), CSS, and Applet, and technologies related to Web 2.0 are supported.
11.3 Centralized Security Policy Configuration

Deploying a set of security devices with comprehensive security technologies on a network does not mean that the network is well secured. During network security maintenance, deploying a satisfied security scheme for a small-sized local network is a complicated task. Designing and deploying a reliable security scheme for a large-scale network is a more difficult and challenging task. Centralized security policy configuration provides a reliable and stable protection system for a network. It is implemented on security devices deployed on the network. Centralized security policy configuration has the following features: l Policy package management A policy package can manage all security devices on a network. A policy package consists of security policy, attack defense, and service port mapping. Users can create their own policy packages. A policy package can include all security configurations such as creating, deploying, removing, and verifying configurations. l Configuration and management scope Security policy Attack defense Service port mapping Policy resource l Policy recovery During network security management and maintenance, the data consistency between the U2000 and devices must be ensured so that the actual network configurations can be accurately displayed on the U2000. Policy recovery can restore the security policies and attack defense configurations deployed on devices and the used resources of devices to the U2000, achieving the data consistency between the NMS and devices. l Policy audit Auditing the configuration data difference between the U2000 and devices helps to ensure data consistency between the NEs and the U2000. l Security policy configuration and management in two dimensions 1. Service-dimension configuration: manages services that are deployed on multiple or all devices on a network. This allows users to manage and audit services in a unified manner. Users do not need to configure and check services on devices separately, reducing the cost and improving the efficiency. Single NE-dimension configuration: manages the configurations of a single NE. Users can check security configurations, create, modify, deploy, and remove configurations on a single NE, and import the configurations of other NEs to this NE.
2.
l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Policy deployment status display

Whether a policy is deployed, whether the deployment is successful, and whether the deployment status is the same as that on the device can be displayed. This helps to prevent duplicate deployment of a policy. l History record query The detailed procedures for configuring and maintaining policy packages are recorded. The historical operations that users performed on policy packages can be checked. 11.3.1 Policy Package Management This topic describes the fuction of policy package management. 11.3.2 Security Policy Configuration The U2000 allows you to manually create and modify security device rules. 11.3.3 Attack Defense Configuration The U2000 provides attack defense functions. 11.3.4 Policy Resource Configuration The configuration of policy resources includes the configuration of service,addess sets,period and ports sets. 11.3.5 Mapping Service The U2000 It provides the configuration function that re-maps the most common service ports to other ones.
11.3.1 Policy Package Management

This topic describes the fuction of policy package management. This feature allows you to create, modify, delete, verify, deploy, undeploy, discover, and audit policy packages, view the deployment and audit result of policy packages. By changing operations based on single policies and single devices to centralized operations based on batch policies and multiple devices, this feature increases operation efficiency and reduces maintenance cost. The policy packages verifying function ensures the correctness of policy package configurations and correlations among the policies within the same policy package. With the policy verifying function, you can correctly deploy policy packages on devices and avoid repeated modifications due to configuration errors during policy deployment. Policy auditing is to audit the policy configuration differences between the NMS and device, so as to determine whether the policy needs to be deployed or discovered. Policy discovery is to recover the data synchronized to the database to the NMS for management. The rights to perform various operations on policy packages are under control. Operations on policy packages are recorded in logs for the policy maintenance personnel to monitor and manage policies.
11.3.2 Security Policy Configuration

The U2000 allows you to manually create and modify security device rules. The U2000 allows you to manually create the device rule, including: l l
11-4
Specify the name of a new rule Select the source security zone
l l l l l l l l l l l
Add the source address manually Select the destination security zone Add the destination address Select the service Select the action Add the device Add the time range Choose whether to generate logs Configure functions such as ASPF Configure functions such as DDoS Configure functions such as package filtering
After a rule is created and deployed to a device, the device filters device information according to this rule. The U2000 allows you to modify the device rule, including: l l l l l l l l l l l l l Change the name of a rule Change the source security zone Change the source address Change the destination security zone Change the destination address Change the service Change the action Change the device Change the time range Change whether to generate logs Modify functions such as ASPF Modify functions such as DDoS Modify functions such as package filtering
The U2000 also allows you to delete a rule, or the value of a certain configuration item of a rule.
11.3.3 Attack Defense Configuration

The U2000 provides attack defense functions. This feature provides attack defense functions against SYN flood, UDP flood, ICMP flood, HTTP get flood, DNS request flood, connection flood, scanning, malformed packet, special packet control, and blacklist for security devices.
11.3.4 Policy Resource Configuration

The configuration of policy resources includes the configuration of service,addess sets,period and ports sets. l Configuring services, address set, time range, and port set Services
As flexible support for the IP protocol, security services can be classified into TCP services, UDP services, ICMP services, and other services. The U2000 provides some basic services by default. You can create different services by adding different parameter settings to the same protocol. Different types of services can form a service group. A rule corresponds to one or multiple services. In the case where a rule corresponds to multiple services, these services can be in a service group or map to these services. When you log in to the U2000 for the first time, the U2000 provides some services by default. Address set When setting source and destination addresses on the U2000, you can either set single IP addresses or set address sets. Time range Time ranges are classified into two types: continuous time ranges and periodic time ranges. A continuous time range starts from one time point and ends at another time point. Rules are valid only within the time range. A period time range is on a weekly cycle. You need to set the start time and end time of a day and specify on which days of a week the rules are valid. Then the rules will take effect on a weekly cycle. Port set A port set is a collection of single, continuous, or discontinuous port numbers, specifying the ports through which the server can provide services. The value of a port set ranges from 0 to 65535. l Configuration log server Binary flow logs of devices can be sent to binary servers via configuration of log server.
11.3.5 Mapping Service

The U2000 It provides the configuration function that re-maps the most common service ports to other ones. Mapping Service means security devices map the service ports of networking program to outof-ordered ports when forwarding network data packets.It implies the most common ports to prevent the outer attack to programs.
11.4 Report Subsystem Management

The report subsystem provides a complete set of convenient services. It allows you to generate, distribute, and manage reports based on the Web. The powerful report subsystem can help you to monitor, analyze, improve, and plan network performance. 10.9 Report Subsystem Management lists the details of the report subsystem management.
11.5 VPN Service Management

The VPN service management module is an important part to implement the IPSec VPN/L2TP VPN solution. It is used to configure and monitor IPSec and L2TP VPN service. 11.5.1 IPSec End-to-End Service The IPSec end-to-end service is to securely connect two intranets trustable to each other through Internet. It is applied when secure communication connections need to be established. This application mode can be used to protect the sensitive data transmitted on the Internet.
11.5.2 Remote Access Service The U2000 supports the implementation of remote VPN access through L2TP, IPSec (IKEv2) and L2TP over IPSec technologies. The remote access service is applicable to employees accessing the enterprise intranet in remote dial-up mode over the Internet.
11.5.1 IPSec End-to-End Service

The IPSec end-to-end service is to securely connect two intranets trustable to each other through Internet. It is applied when secure communication connections need to be established. This application mode can be used to protect the sensitive data transmitted on the Internet. l Service deployment This feature provides both the single service deployment function and the service batch deployment function. Service deployment is used to make services take effect on devices. You can view the deployment results through the auditing function. l Service discovery This feature supports the function of automatically discovering services. With this function, you can discover running IPSec VPN services on the network and then restore the discovered services to the U2000 for unified management and monitoring. l Service monitoring By monitoring the status of managed services in real time, the performance management module allows you to view the service status in the topology view. The performance management module monitors the service status and performance indicators and displays collected performance data in graphs or reports. l Display of the service topology This feature provides the function of visualizing the service topology. In the topology view, you can view service alarms, service statuses, and service-related device alarms. l Service audit This feature supports to audit the differences of service configuration between the NMS and device.
11.5.2 Remote Access Service

The U2000 supports the implementation of remote VPN access through L2TP, IPSec (IKEv2) and L2TP over IPSec technologies. The remote access service is applicable to employees accessing the enterprise intranet in remote dial-up mode over the Internet. l Service deployment The remote access service management supports the deployment of a single service and the deployment of services in batches. In addition, you can view deployment results in the service topology view. Remote access services include L2TP service, L2TP over IPSec service and IPSec (IKEv2) service three types. l Service monitoring The L2TP service, L2TP over IPSec service and IPSec (IKEv2) service management can manage and monitor the online users of remote access services. It also provides the functions of displaying the statuses of online users in real time, restricting the number of online users, and forcing users to log out. l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Display of the service topology

The remote access service management provides the function of visualizing the service topology. In the topology view, you can view service alarms, service statuses, and servicerelated device alarms. l Service audit The remote access service management supports to audit the differences of service configuration between the NMS and device. l Service resource management The remote access service management provides the function of radius template management and user domain management.
11-8
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
12 FTTx Network Feature Management
12
FTTx Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functions and features of FTTx NE management and network management. 12.1 OLT Management For NE configuration management, the U2000 provides graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for configuring NEs and maintaining NE configurations. You can configure services for equipment in the GUIs. 12.2 ONU Management For NE configuration management, the U2000 provides graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for configuring NEs and maintaining NE configurations. You can configure services for equipment in the GUIs.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
12-1
12.1 OLT Management

For NE configuration management, the U2000 provides graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for configuring NEs and maintaining NE configurations. You can configure services for equipment in the GUIs.
Device Management
Device management includes the management of NE panels, basic and common device attributes, clock sources, security, protocols, and device templates. NE Panel Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l Display the NE panel by double-clicking an NE. Query the details of equipment. Collect statistics on device resources. Query the information about shelves. Collect the statistics on shelf resources. Query inter-shelf links. Add, delete, start, disable, reset, and confirm a board. Query the CPU usage and memory usage of boards in real time. Display the port view by double-clicking a board. Perform an active/standby switchover on the control boards. Configure traffic management and rate limitation for GPON boards. Configure rate limitation for EPON boards.
Management of Basic and Common Device Attributes The management of basic and common device attributes includes the query of the global information about devices and the configuration of the global policies of devices. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Query the system information about devices. Query the statistics on the resources and status of devices. Query the license information about the functions and resources of devices. Configure the system time, IP address of a device, and the binding between a Layer 3 interface and an IP address. Configure the SNMP protocol port. Set device handshake parameters. Configure the policy for automatically backing up device data. Enable and disable the energy-conservation function of a device. Configure and manage license files.
Clock Source Management Clock source management includes the management and configuration of equipment-level clock source information, such as information about the line clock, 1588 clock, and clock priorities.
Security Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Enable and disable anti-ICMP attack, anti-IP attack, anti-IP spoofing, anti-MAC spoofing, and anti-DoS attack. Set the aging time of an MAC address. Enable and disable MAC address learning. Configure the security attributes for user login in the CLI.
Protocol Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Manage the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)/ Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD), and Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Control the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) proxy. Configure the Policy Information Transfer Protocol (PITP) mode/Relay Agent Info Option (RAIO) customized format. Control the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option 82 function. Control the DHCP proxy and DHCP relay forwarding functions. Configure 802.1ag attributes of the Ethernet packet.
l l l l l
Global Configuration of Services The global configuration of services includes the configuration of the VLAN, QoS, xDSL, GPON, EPON, and multicast services. Device Template Management Device template management includes the display of different types of device templates on the U2000. Templates include the GPON template, EPON template, MDU SNMP template, IGMP template, traffic template, VLAN service template, optical transceiver alarm template, and PW template. Currently, the U2000 supports only query and generation of global templates.
Network Interface Management

Network interface management includes the management and maintenance of E1/T1 ports and the Ethernet port. Management and Maintenance of E1/T1 Ports E1/T1 ports are classified into TDM E1/T1 ports, CES E1/T1 ports, and IMA E1/T1 ports. TDM E1/T1 ports can be used as access ports or upstream ports, depending on the function of a board. On E1 ports for upstream transmission, you can perform only the loopback operation. On E1 ports for PRA access, you can perform the following operations: configure or delete port attributes, set the alarm threshold of L2 signaling bit errors, query timeslots, and enable or disable services. On CES E1/T1 ports, you can collect real-time performance statistics of the ports, configure port attributes, set a port alias, and perform loopback.
On IMA E1/T1 ports, you can query real-time performance statistics of the ports, and manage IMA groups and IMA links, such as adding, deleting, modifying, resetting, blocking, and unblocking an IMA group or link. Management of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port management includes the management of ports and aggregation groups. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure port attributes. Create, delete, query, and modify an aggregation group. Activate and deactivate an Ethernet port. Collect real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Configure the PPPoE, DHCP option 82, 802.3ah ETH OAM loopback, and port rate limit functions. Query the attributes of optical transceivers on Ethernet optical ports.
Connection Management
Connection management includes the management of service virtual ports and E1 connections. Service Virtual Port Management A service virtual port enables user equipment to access the OLT. The service virtual port provides service streams between the user equipment and the OLT for carrying user services. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, modify, activate, and deactivate a service virtual port. Collect the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Perform ATM ping tests. Configure the extended attributes of a service virtual port. Extended attributes allow for greater flexibility of addressing customer requirements. Extended attributes include the maximum number of learnable MAC addresses, the PPPoE session, the encapsulation type, and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be bound. Configure the connection attributes of a service virtual port, including the alias, VPI/VCI, transmit traffic profile, and receive traffic profile. Shift the VLAN ID of a service virtual port to change the VLAN ID of the service virtual port. After successful shifting, the service port assumes the new VLAN ID. Bind IP addresses to a service virtual port and query the bound IP addresses. To specify that only the users with certain IP addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source IP address of user packets. If the source IP address does not match any of the IP addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access. Bind static MAC addresses to a service virtual port. To specify that only the users with certain static MAC addresses can access the service virtual port, perform this operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source MAC address of user packets. If the source MAC address does not match any of the MAC addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access.
l l l
12-4
Configure service bundles. If several service virtual ports carry the same service, a service bundle can be configured to bundle the service streams over the service virtual ports.
E1 Connection Management In the FTTx scenario, an E1 connection is used for transmitting the TDM service over the GPON network by encapsulating the TDM packets directly into a GPON GEM frame. In E1 connection management, you can query, add, modify, and delete an E1 connection on the U2000.
Layer 2 Management
Layer 2 management includes the management of the VLAN, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP), and Rapid Ring Protection Protocol (RRPP). VLAN Service Management VLAN service management includes the management of the standard VLAN, MUX VLAN, smart VLAN, and super VLAN. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a VLAN. Collect the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Clear the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Manage a Layer 3 interface and its subinterfaces.
RSTP Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Modify and restore the default value of the trail overheads of a port. Collect the RSTP statistics of a port. Clear the RSTP statistics of a port.
MSTP Management MSTP management includes the management of domains, instances, and ports. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Modify and restore the default setting of a domain. Add, delete, and modify an instance. Modify a port. Query the statistics of a port.
ANCP Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Add, delete, modify, enable, and disable an ANCP session. Query the real-time status of an ANCP session.
RRPP Management For RRPP management, you can perform the query, add, delete, and modify operations.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
12-5
Layer 3 Management
Layer 3 management includes the management of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS)/pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), and Layer 3 routes. DHCP Management DHCP management includes the management of the DHCP server group, MAC address segment, standard mode, DHCP domain, and VLAN L3 interface. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a DHCP server group. Query, add, delete, and modify a MAC address segment. Query, enable, disable, and modify a standard mode. Query, add, delete, and modify a DHCP domain. Modify a VLAN Layer 3 interface.
MPLS/PWE3 Management The MPLS is a transmission technology. It implements transparent transmission of data packets between users. The MPLS tunnel is defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent of a service, an MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries service-related PWs. You can perform the following operations on the MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure the basic attributes of the MPLS. Configure the MPLS tunnel of the static unicast type. Create forward MPLS tunnels. Create an E-LSP. Manage PWs. Manage tunnel tags and PW labels.
ACL and QoS Management

ACL and QoS management includes the management of the access control list (ACL), quality of service (QoS), time segments, and hierarchical QoS (HQoS). In a traditional packet-based network, all packets are treated in the same way. Every router adopts the first-in first-out (FIFO) policy to process packets, and makes its best effort to transmit packets to the destination. The router, however, does not make any commitment to packet transmission performance, such as the delay, delay variation (jitter), packet loss rate, and reliability. With the rapid development of the computer network, more and more networks are connected to the Internet. In addition, new services are emerging and raise new requirements on the service capability of the IP network. Therefore, network-wide end-to-end QoS solutions are called into attention, which necessitates QoS assurance for services. To achieve so, devices must be able to apply QoS techniques and provide hierarchical QoS guarantee for different types of service streams (especially for those highly sensitive to delay and jitter). For ACL management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure one or more time segments, and associate a time segment with an ACL by specifying the name of the time segment in the ACL. Query, modify, create, and delete the ACL of the standard, extended, Layer 2, and userdefined types.
12-6
QoS management includes filtering packets based on ACL, tagging priorities, limiting traffic and port rate, collecting statistics on traffic, redirecting, and mirroring. On the U2000, you can query, add, modify, and delete a QoS policy. HQoS stands for the hierarchical QoS. It not only controls user traffic but also schedules packets according to the priorities of user services. On the U2000, you can query, add, modify, and delete an HQoS policy.
BFD Management
The BFD can quickly check the link status between two devices. To mitigate the impact of device faults on services and to improve the network availability, a network device needs to quickly detect any fault occurring between the device and its adjacent devices. Actions can then be taken to ensure service continuity. The BFD enables the device to check the connectivity of a type of data protocol of the same trail between two systems. The trail can be a physical or a logical link, including a tunnel. The BFD mechanism is a remedy for the weakness of the existing detection mechanism.
User Security and System Security Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Configure user access in PITP mode. Configure user access in DHCP option 82 mode. Configure user access control. Configure system secure access.
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management

As the Ethernet technology extends from carrier networks to metropolitan area networks (MANs) and wide area networks (WANs), carriers are increasingly concerned about the maintainability of equipment, especially the Ethernet equipment. An imperative demand for the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) of transport equipment hence arises. The 802.1ag connectivity fault management (CFM) provides a method for detecting faults end-toend. The Ethernet OAM mechanisms supported by 802.1ag CFM include connectivity check (CC), loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and forward AIS alarms. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Manage maintenance domains (MDs). Ethernet CFM divides a network into up to eight levels. A bridge can span multiple levels to manage different MDs. A CFM MD is constituted by bridges. An MD is the combination of bridges and maintenance levels. MDs can be classified into three layers: user domain (levels 7-5), service provider domain (levels 4-3), and carrier domain (levels 2-0). Different MDs are maintained by different management entities. Manage maintenance associations (MAs). An MD can be divided into multiple MAs. Each MA maps a service instance (SI) that belongs to an MD and is identified by a VLAN. An MA can be regarded as a combination of an MD and a VLAN. According to the standards, multiple VLANs can map one SI, and one SI maps one MA. Manage maintenance points (MPs). An MA consists of MPs defined on the ports of bridges. An MP is a combination of a bridge port, a VLAN, and a maintenance level. MPs are classified into maintenance association end points (MEPs) and maintenance association
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
intermediate points (MIPs). MEPs initiate and respond to CFM messages; MIPs transparently transmit or respond to CFM messages but do not initiate the messages.
Protection Group Management

Protection group management involves the protection switchover and protection group. Protection switchover: Important board resources and port resources are generally backed up to enhance system reliability. If a fault occurs on a working member, protection switchover will be triggered to transfer services to the protection member that will continue to handle the services. Protection group: You can manage the working member and the protection member in the protection group. In a protection group, you can manage the relationship between the members involved in the protection switchover, record the status of members, and manage the configuration data and status that are involved by the protection relationship between the members. With the protection group feature, you can protect the following objects on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Active and standby control boards Aggregation groups on active control board and standby control board Ports on active and standby control boards Upstream Ethernet ports Upstream aggregation links of Ethernet ports Objects configured with GPON/EPON type B protection Objects configured with GPON type C protection Objects configured with EPON type D protection Objects configured with GPON/EPON type B dual-homing
GPON Service Management

Gigabit passive optical network (GPON) uses the passive optical transmission technology. It supports a downstream transmission rate of 2.448 Gbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1.244 Gbit/s. GPON service management supports two modes: distributed mode and profile mode. The equipment and the U2000 support both modes. In the distributed mode, GPON service management includes the management of the UNI ports, GEM ports, and ONUs. In the profile mode, GPON service management includes the management of the UNI ports and ONUs; in this mode, the GEM port is encapsulated in the line template of the UNI port. For GPON UNI port management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Modify the port attributes, such as the minimum reach, maximum reach, configuration status of the ONU auto-discovery function, configuration status of the downstream FEC function, status of the laser switch, and update cycle of the encryption key of the GPON UNI port. Enable and disable the ONU auto-discovery function for a GPON UNI port. After the ONU auto-discovery function is enabled, the OLT regularly checks whether any ONUs newly connected to the GPON UNI port are online.
12-8
Cut over services to implement GPON port backup on the OLT. If the active GPON port on the OLT is faulty, you can switch over the ONU services from the faulty GPON port to the specified standby GPON port on the OLT. Query the alarms of GPON UNI ports. This function allows you to maintain and manage GPON UNI ports according to the details about and suggested solutions for active alarms. Enable and disable the laser of a GPON UNI port. By default, the laser of a GPON UNI port is enabled so that the ONUs connected to the GPON UNI port can go online. Detect and isolate rogue ONU on a GPON UNI port. Query the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics.
l l l l
A GEM port identifies the virtual service channel that carries service streams between the MA5600T or MA5603T and an ONU. An ONU can provision services only after the mapping between the GEM port, T-CONT, and service stream is configured on the ONU. For GEM port management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Enable and disable the encryption function. When the encryption function is enabled, the device encrypts the service stream carried on the GEM port. This feature enhances the security of user data. Bind a GEM port to an ONU to establish the mapping between the GEM port on the OLT and the T-CONT on the ONU. Limit the rate of packets of a specified priority on a GEM port according to the specified traffic profile. Query the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics of a GEM port.
l l l
An ONU provides user interfaces. A GPON UNI port can be connected to a maximum of 128 ONUs. For GPON ONU management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l Add, delete, and modify an ONU. Generate topological nodes. Perform this operation to generate topological nodes for ONT management in the topology view. Locate directly an ONU in the topology view through the topological node. Activate and deactivate an ONU. Re-register an ONU. After an online ONU is reset by force, the ONU re-registers with the OLT to update the registration information about the ONU. Re-discover an ONU. ONU re-discovery is applicable only to the ONU that adopts the once-on authentication mode. Configure the parameters of value-added service (VAS). The VAS feature of the GPON ONU is used for provisioning VAS, such as the VoIP service. Upgrade ONUs. Query the real-time performance statistics of ONUs and clear the performance statistics.
EPON Service Management

The Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) is an Ethernet-based passive optical network (PON). It is a new generation broadband access technology, using the point to multi-point (P2MP) structure and the passive optical fiber transmission mode. As a new technology of fiber broadband access for the "last mile", the PON does not require node devices but only a simple optical splitter at the optical branching point. The PON has the following features: l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Fewer optical fibers.

l l l l l
Shared bandwidth between branches. Less investment in telecommunications rooms. Higher equipment security. Faster network deployment. Lower overall costs for network construction.
The EPON uses the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) technology for concurrent bidirectional signal transmission. Upstream and downstream signals are transmitted over different wavelengths: upstream uses a 1310 nm wavelength and downstream uses a 1490 nm wavelength. The EPON provisions the voice, data, and video services for users over a single optical fiber. Currently, the EPON supports a maximum symmetric transmission rate of 1.25 Gbit/s in upstream and downstream, and a maximum transmission reach of 20 km. In downstream direction, the EPON broadcasts encrypted data to different users; in upstream direction, the EPON employs the time division multiplexing (TDM) technology. In this way, the EPON implements bandwidth sharing in upstream and downstream directions and accommodates the bandwidth requirements of access users. EPON service management includes the management of EPON UNI ports and ONUs. The EPON UNI port is the downstream port for the EPON access. The OLT is connected to various types of ONUs, including MDUs, through the UNI port to provision high-speed Internet service for users. For EPON UNI port management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Modify the attributes of an EPON UNI port, including the alias, ONU auto-discovery function, the maximum distance between an ONU and the OLT, and the tag attribute of packets. Display the topology of the optical distribution node (ODN). The EPON UNI port, as an ODN, is connected to a remote MDU. With this feature, you can enter the ODN+MDU Layer 2 topology view, and view the ODN-centered star topology. In addition, you can add, delete, and modify the MDU, and configure relevant services. Enable and disable an EPON UNI port. The laser of an EPON UNI port is enabled by default so that the ONUs connected to the EPON UNI port can go online. Enable and disable the ONU auto-discovery function for an EPON UNI port. After the ONU auto-discovery function is enabled, the OLT regularly checks whether any ONUs newly connected to the EPON UNI port go online. Cut over services to implement EPON port backup on the OLT. If the active EPON port on the OLT is faulty, you can switch over the ONU services from the faulty EPON port to a specified standby EPON port on the OLT. Query the alarms of EPON UNI ports. This function allows you to maintain and manage EPON UNI ports according to the details about and suggested solutions for active alarms. Query the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics.
l l
l l
An ONU provides user interfaces. For EPON ONU management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l
12-10
Add, delete, and modify an ONU. Generate topological nodes. Perform this operation to generate topological nodes for ONT management in the topology view. Locate directly an ONU in the topology view through the topological node.
l l l l l l
Activate and deactivate an ONU. Re-register an ONU. After an online ONU is reset by force, the ONU re-registers with the OLT to update the registration information about the ONU. Re-discover an ONU. ONU re-discovery is applicable only to the ONU that adopts the once-on authentication mode. Configure the parameters of value-added service (VAS). The VAS feature of the EPON ONU is used for provisioning VAS, such as the VoIP service. Upgrade ONUs. Query the real-time performance statistics of ONUs and clear the performance statistics.
Multicast Service Management

Multicast is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication mode in which the source sends information to a specified subset of objects under a network node. Multicast services are applicable to the streaming media, distance learning, video conferencing, video on demand (VOD), network gaming, data replication, and other P2MP transmission. Multicast communication uses a class D IP address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address. A source host sends out a packet that uses a class D IP address as the destination. If other hosts in the network are interested in the multicast packet, these hosts can send a request to join the multicast group and receive the packet. The hosts outside of the group cannot receive the packets sent by the source host. In controllable multicast, network equipment determines whether a user has the rights to watch programs by identifying the join or request packets of the user. Then, the access device controls and forwards the multicast services accordingly. There are two multicast modes: l l IGMP snooping: IGMP snooping is a multicast control mechanism at the data link layer. It is used to manage and control multicast services. IGMP proxy: In a tree topology, the OLT does not set up routes for forwarding multicast packets; the OLT only relays and forwards multicast protocol packets. To multicast users, the OLT is a multicast router that implements the router functions defined in the IGMP protocol. To multicast routers, the OLT is a multicast user. Manage multicast users. Manage multicast VLANs. Manage the virtual upstream ports of multicast services. Manage multicast subtending ports.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 to manage multicast services: l l l l
Service Provisioning Template

The OLT supports the E2E service template to improve the service provisioning efficiency.
Alarm Responsibility Division

The alarm responsibility division function helps quickly and accurately identify the possible cause of an out-of-management alarm of an ONU, such as whether the backbone optical fiber or branch optical fiber is faulty, or the terminal is experiencing a power outage. In this manner, physical visits to the sites of fault can be reduced.
12.2 ONU Management

Device Management
Device management includes the management of NE panels, basic and common device attributes, clock sources, security, protocols, global configuration of services, and device templates. NE Panel Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l Display the NE panel by double-clicking an NE. Query the details of equipment. Collect statistics on device resources. Query the information about shelves. Collect the statistics on shelf resources. Query inter-shelf links. Add, delete, start, disable, reset, and confirm a board. Query the real-time performance statistics on the CPU usage and memory of boards. Display the port view by double-clicking a board. Perform an active/standby switchover on the control boards.
Security Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Enable and disable anti-ICMP attack, anti-IP attack, anti-IP spoofing, anti-MAC spoofing, and anti-DoS attack. Set the aging time of an MAC address. Enable and disable MAC address learning. Configure the security attributes for user login in the CLI.
Protocol Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Manage the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)/ Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD), and Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP). Control the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) proxy. Configure the Policy Information Transfer Protocol (PITP) mode/Relay Agent Info Option (RAIO) custom format. Control the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option 82 function. Control the DHCP proxy and DHCP relay forwarding functions. Configure 802.1ag attributes of the Ethernet packet.
l l l l l
Global Configuration of Services The global configuration of services includes the configuration of the VLAN, QoS, xDSL, and multicast services. Device Template Management Device template management includes the display of different types of device templates on the U2000. Templates include the GPON template, EPON template, MDU SNMP template, IGMP template, traffic template, VLAN service template, optical transceiver alarm template, and PW template. Currently, the U2000 supports only query and generation of global templates.

Network interface management includes the management of GPON ports, EPON ports, Ethernet ports, and xDSL bonding groups. Management of GPON NNI Ports The GPON network to network interface (NNI) is the upstream port provided by the control board. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Configure the suppression level of the broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast packet traffic. Configure and query the alarm thresholds of an optical transceiver. Collect the real-time performance statistics on the number of discarded Ethernet frames, transmitted Ethernet frames, received Ethernet frames, transmitted GEM frames, received GEM frames, transmitted PLOAM messages, received PLOAM messages, transmitted OMC messages, and received OMC messages.
Management of EPON NNI Ports

EPON NNI is the upstream port provided by the ONU. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure and query the alarm thresholds of an optical transceiver. Collect the real-time performance statistics on the number of transmitted frames, transmitted bytes, received frames, received bytes, received OAMPDU frames, and received MPCP frames.
Management of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port management includes the management of ports and aggregation groups. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure port attributes. Create, delete, query, and modify an aggregation group. Activate and deactivate an Ethernet port. Collect real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Configure the PPPoE, DHCP option 82, 802.3ah ETH OAM loopback, and port rate limit functions. Query the attributes of optical transceivers on Ethernet optical ports.
Management of xDSL Bonding Groups You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Create, delete, and modify an xDSL bonding group. Set the upstream PVC value for an xDSL bonding group.
ONU connection management includes the management of service virtual ports. Service Virtual Port Management A service virtual port enables user equipment to access the ONU. The service virtual port provides service streams between the user equipment and the ONU for carrying user services. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, modify, activate, and deactivate a service virtual port. Collect the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Perform ATM ping tests. Configure the extended attributes of a service virtual port. Extended attributes allow for greater flexibility of addressing customer requirements. Extended attributes include the maximum number of learnable MAC addresses, the PPPoE session, the encapsulation type, and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be bound. Configure the connection attributes of a service virtual port, including the alias, VPI/VCI, transmit traffic profile, and receive traffic profile. Shift the VLAN ID of a service virtual port to change the VLAN ID of the service virtual port. After successful shifting, the service port assumes the new VLAN ID. Bind IP addresses to a service virtual port and query the bound IP addresses. To specify that only the users with certain IP addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source IP address of user packets. If the source IP address does not match any of the IP
l l l
12-14
addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access. l Bind static MAC addresses to a service virtual port. To specify that only the users with certain static MAC addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source MAC address of user packets. If the source MAC address does not match any of the MAC addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access. Configure service bundles. If several service virtual ports carry the same service, a service bundle can be configured to bundle the service streams over the service virtual ports.
Layer 2 Management
Layer 2 management includes the management of the VLAN, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), and the Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP). VLAN Service Management VLAN service management includes the management of the standard VLAN, MUX VLAN, smart VLAN, and super VLAN. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a VLAN. Collect the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Clear the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Manage a Layer 3 interface and its subinterfaces.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
12-15
Layer 3 Management
MPLS/PWE3 Management The MPLS is a transmission technology. It implements transparent transmission of data packets between users. The MPLS tunnel is defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent of a service, an MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries service-related PWs. You can perform the following operations on the MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure the basic attributes of the MPLS. Configure the MPLS tunnel of the static unicast type. Create forward MPLS tunnels. Create an E-LSP. Manage PWs. Manage tunnel tags and PW label.

ACL and QoS management includes the management of the access control list (ACL), quality of service (QoS), and time segments. In a traditional packet-based network, all packets are treated in the same way. Every router adopts the first-in first-out (FIFO) policy to process packets, and makes its best effort to transmit packets to the destination. The router, however, does not make any commitment to packet transmission performance, such as the delay, delay variation (jitter), packet loss rate, and reliability. With the rapid development of the computer network, more and more networks are connected to the Internet. In addition, new services are emerging and raise new requirements on the service capability of the IP network. Therefore, network-wide end-to-end QoS solutions are called into attention, which necessitates QoS assurance for services. To achieve so, devices must be able to apply QoS techniques and provide hierarchical QoS guarantee for different types of service streams (especially for those highly sensitive to delay and jitter). For ACL management, you can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure one or more time segments, and associate a time segment with an ACL by specifying the name of the time segment in the ACL. Query, modify, create, and delete the ACL of the standard, extended, Layer 2, and userdefined types.
12-16
QoS management includes filtering packets based on ACL, tagging priorities, limiting traffic and port rate, collecting statistics on traffic, redirecting, and mirroring. On the U2000, you can query, add, modify, and delete a QoS policy.
User Security and System Security Management

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure user access in PITP mode. Configure user access in DHCP option 82 mode. Configure user access control. Configure system secure access. Manage BFD sessions.
BFD Management
The BFD mechanism can quickly check the link status between two devices. To mitigate the impact of device faults on services and to improve the network availability, a network device needs to quickly detect any fault occurring between the device and its adjacent devices. Actions can then be taken to ensure service continuity. The BFD enables the device to check the connectivity of a type of data protocol of the same trail between two systems. The trail can be a physical or a logical link, including a tunnel. The BFD mechanism is a remedy for the weakness of the existing detection mechanism.

As the Ethernet technology extends from carrier networks to metropolitan area networks (MANs) and wide area networks (WANs), carriers are increasingly concerned about the maintainability of equipment, especially the Ethernet equipment. An imperative demand for the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) of transport equipment hence arises. Within Ethernet technology, the 802.1ag connectivity fault management (CFM) provides a method for detecting faults end-to-end. The Ethernet OAM mechanisms supported by 802.1ag CFM include connectivity check (CC), loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and forward AIS alarms. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l Manage maintenance domains (MDs). Ethernet CFM divides a network into up to eight levels. A bridge can span multiple levels to manage different MDs. A CFM MD is constituted by bridges. An MD is the combination of bridges and maintenance levels. MDs can be classified into three layers: user domain (levels 7-5), service provider domain (levels 4-3), and carrier domain (levels 2-0). Different MDs are maintained by different management entities. Manage maintenance associations (MAs). An MD can be divided into multiple MAs. Each MA maps a service instance (SI) that belongs to an MD and is identified by a VLAN. An MA can be regarded as a combination of an MD and a VLAN. According to the standards, multiple VLANs can map one SI, and one SI maps one MA. Manage maintenance points (MPs). An MA consists of MPs defined on the ports of bridges. An MP is a combination of a bridge port, a VLAN, and a maintenance level. MPs are classified into maintenance association end points (MEPs) and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs). MEPs initiate and respond to CFM messages; MIPs transparently transmit or respond to CFM messages but do not initiate the messages.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
xDSL Service Management

xDSL service management includes the management of the asymmetrical digital subscriber loop (ADSL), ADSL2+, ATM global single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (G.SHDSL), and very high speed digital subscriber lines 2 (VDSL2) services. The features of these services are as follows: ADSL Service Management ADSL is a technology for providing the asymmetric and high-speed private line access service over common twisted pairs. The ADSL supports the asymmetrical transmission in the upstream and downstream directions, which is suitable for the user data access service and can provide high-speed data transmission channels for users. The ADSL2+ is an extension of the ADSL technology. It supports a maximum transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and 2.5 Mbit/s in the downstream and upstream respectively and a maximum transmission distance of 6.5 km. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize the port. Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line template, alarm template, extended template, and monitoring thresholds. These attributes are used to activate the ADSL port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.
G.SHDSL Service Management G.SHDSL is a technology for providing a high-rate symmetrical data service over one or two twisted pairs. The 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL access services are supported to allow for a transmission distance ranging from 3 km to 6 km. The rates of the 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL lines range from 192 kbit/s to 5696 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s to 4608 kbit/ s, 576 kbit/s to 17088 kbit/s, and 768 kbit/s to 22784 kbit/s respectively. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Maintain a port. Bind and unbind a port. You can bind multiple ATM G.SHDSL ports. This increases the bandwidth at the physical layer and improves the rate of the ATM G.SHDSL port. Configure port attributes, such as the associated line profile and alarm profile. These attributes are used to activate the ATM G.SHDSL port. Query the real-time performance statistics.
VDSL2 Service Management VDSL2 is an extension of the VDSL technology. It provides high-speed private line access in the symmetrical or asymmetrical mode over common twisted pairs. VDSL2 supports a high bandwidth with symmetric rates of up to 100 Mbit/s and multiple spectrum template and encapsulation modes. Based on these features, it provides short-distance and high-speed access solutions to the next generation broadband access scenarios. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l
12-18
Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize a port.
l l
Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line profile, alarm profile, extended profile, and monitoring thresholds of a VDSL2 port. These attributes are used to activate the VDSL2 port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.
Ethernet Access Management

Ethernet access management includes the management of ports and aggregation groups. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure port attributes. Create, delete, query, and modify an aggregation group. Activate and deactivate an Ethernet port. Collect real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Control the PPPoE, DHCP Option 82, 802.3ah ETH OAM loopback, and port rate limit functions. Query the attributes of optical transceivers for Ethernet optical ports.

Multicast is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication mode in which the source sends information to a specified subset of objects under a network node. Multicast services are applicable to the streaming media, distance learning, video conferencing, video on demand (VOD), network gaming, data replication, and other P2MP transmission. Multicast communication uses a class D IP address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address. A source host sends out a packet that uses a class D IP address as the destination. If other hosts in the network are interested in the multicast packet, these hosts can send a request to join the multicast group and receive the packet. The hosts outside of the group cannot receive the packets sent by the source host. In controllable multicast, network equipment determines whether a user has the rights to watch programs by identifying the join or request packets of the user. Then, the access device controls and forwards the multicast services accordingly. There are two multicast modes: l l IGMP snooping: IGMP snooping is a multicast control mechanism at the data link layer. It is used to manage and control multicast services. IGMP proxy: In a tree topology, the OLT does not set up routes for forwarding multicast packets; the OLT only relays and forwards multicast protocol packets. To multicast users, the OLT is a multicast router that implements the router functions defined in the IGMP protocol. To multicast routers, the OLT is a multicast user.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Manage multicast users. Manage multicast VLANs. Manage the virtual upstream ports of multicast services. Manage multicast subtending ports.
Narrowband Service Management

Narrowband service management includes the management of the media gateway (MG), signaling gateway (SG), POTS ports, and IP ports. MG Management In the next generation network (NGN), the media gateway (MG) and the media gateway controller (MGC) are separated. That is, the functions of the user plane are separated from the functions of the control plane. The messages of the user plane interact with each other by using the MG and the messages of the control plane interact with each other by using the MGC. An MG device consists of the MG, MGC, digital signal processor (DSP) management, and ringing mapping. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Manage MGs Manage MGCs Manage ringing mapping Manage DSP channels
SG Management Signaling gateway (SG) management includes the management of signaling gateways and associations. An SG is a part for signaling interaction. An SG is a signaling proxy for receiving and transmitting signaling messages between the No.7 signaling network and the IP network. An SCTP association provides data transmission for the transfer of the protocol data unit of one or more ports. VoIP PSTN Port Management The public switched telephone network (PSTN) is a communication network that provides telephone services for public users over analog subscriber lines. It is also called plain old telephone service (POTS). Voice over IP (VoIP) is a communication mode for delivery of voice and data over Internet Protocol (IP) networks. In the VoIP technology, voice information is transmitted in digital form in discrete packets rather than through the traditional circuit-oriented protocols of PSTN. The VoIP PSTN service is provided through the VoIP PSTN ports on the voice service board of an ONU. A gateway is established on the ONU between the PSTN network and the IP network. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Reset a port. Collect the real-time performance statistics.
VoIP ISDN BRA Port Management ISDN basic rate access (BRA) is the basic rate interface (BRI) and user-network interface provided by the ONU. The BRI supports a transmission rate of 44 kbit/s and provides 2 B channels for carrying services and 1 D channel for transmitting the call control signaling and maintaining the management signaling. The rate of B channels is 64 kbit/s and the rate of D channel is 16 kbit/s. In the upstream direction, the ONU transmits the ISDN service to the NGN network in IP networking mode. The ISDN service is called the VoIP ISDN BRA service. You can perform the following operations on the U2000:
l l l l l l l l
Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Activate and deactivate a port. Reset a port. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of VoIP ISDN BRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Collect the real-time performance statistics.
VoIP ISDN PRA Port Management ISDN primary rate access (PRA) is the primary rate interface (PRI) and user-network interface provided by the ONU. The PRI supports a transmission rate of 2.048 Mbit/s and provides 30 B channels and 1 D channel. The rates of the B channel and D channel are 64 kbit/s. In the upstream direction, the ONU transmits the ISDN service to the NGN network in IP networking mode. The ISDN service is called the VoIP ISDN PRA service. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of VoIP ISDN PRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Query the timeslots that are occupied by a specified VoIP ISDN PRA port.
Sheet-based Predeployment Management

The U2000 provides the sheet-based predeployment solution which enables you to import device data to the U2000 in batches. This solution provides for plug-and-play (PnP) of equipment, implements software-commissioning-free and requires only one site visit. Therefore, this solution improves deployment efficiency and reduces network construction cost, and at the same time allows for concurrent offline configuration and on-site construction. Sheet-based predeployment has the following features: l l l Offline deployment by importing a predeployed sheet Automatic upgrade of NE software Automatic issuing of configuration data
Plug-and-Play Feature Management

When an MDU is faulty, it is essential to locate the fault and recover services quickly. It is, however, time-consuming to locate and troubleshoot an internal fault of the MDU. Therefore, faulty MDUs are directly replaced, and are stored and repaired later in a centralized manner. Solution limitations: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
The versions of the MDUs of the same type in the entire network must be the same. The configuration data of the MDUs must be backed up periodically to safeguard the data.
Only one MDU can go offline and one MDU be automatically discovered during automatic replacement.
Solution implementation procedure: l l l 1. Back up the configuration data as required by using the DC component. 2. Replace the MDU that encounters a severe hardware fault. 3. The hardware installation engineer replaces the faulty MDU with a new MDU and furnishes the maintenance engineer with the identification information about the new MDU. 4. The maintenance engineer modifies the authentication information about the MDU on the U2000, starts the automatic upgrade of the NE software by using the DC component, and loads the configuration file to the MDU.
Solution benefit: l l The MDU implements PnP and is replaced quickly. The configuration data is restored quickly.
MDU replacement methods: l l l Manual replacement based on a MAC address (EPON) or SN (GPON) Automatic replacement based on the key or password Automatic one-to-one replacement based on the MAC address
Remote Acceptance
To achieve one site visit and reduce the O&M cost in FTTx network construction, the deployed ONUs must support remote acceptance. With the FTTx PnP solution, you can perform the following acceptance operations: l l Narrowband emulation acceptance, to check whether the voice links are in the normal state by using the call emulation test. PPPoE dialup emulation acceptance, to check whether the links for Internet access are in the normal state.
ONT Automatic Bulk Upgrade

An FTTH network is deployed with a large number of ONTs. When the ONTs are upgraded, the following problems may occur: l l l The online status of ONTs in user premises cannot be confirmed. The range of ONTs to be upgraded cannot be determined when ONTs are added to the network during service provisioning.
The U2000 provides the automatic offline bulk upgrade solution for ONTs. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l
12-22
Upgrade ONTs in batches. Upgrade ONTs automatically by creating a periodic upgrade task. Upgrade offline ONTs automatically when the ONTs go online.
13 MSAN Network Feature Management
13
MSAN Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functions and features of MSAN NE management and network management. 13.1 MSAN Management For NE configuration management, the U2000 provides graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for configuring NEs and maintaining NE configurations. You can configure services for equipment in the GUIs.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
13-1
13.1 MSAN Management

Device Management
Security Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Enable and disable anti-ICMP attack, anti-IP attack, anti-IP spoofing, anti-MAC spoofing, and anti-DoS attack. Set the aging time of a MAC address. Enable and disable MAC address learning. Configure the security attributes for user login in the CLI.
l l l l l
Global Configuration of Services The global configuration of services includes the configuration of the VLAN, QoS, xDSL, and multicast services. Device Template Management Device template management includes the display of different types of device templates on the U2000. Templates include the IGMP template, traffic template, VLAN service template, and PW template. Currently, the U2000 supports only query and generation of global templates.

Network interface management includes the management and maintenance of E1/T1 ports and the Ethernet port. Management and Maintenance of E1/T1 Ports E1/T1 ports are classified into TDM E1/T1 ports, CES E1/T1 ports, and IMA E1/T1 ports. TDM E1/T1 ports can be used as access ports or upstream ports, depending on the functions of the boards. On E1 ports for upstream transmission, you can perform only the loopback operation. On E1 ports for PRA access, you can perform the following operations: configure or delete port attributes, set the alarm threshold of L2 signaling bit errors, query timeslots, and enable or disable services. On CES E1/T1 ports, you can collect real-time performance statistics of ports, configure the port attributes, set port alias, and perform loopback.
On IMA E1/T1 ports, you can query real-time performance statistics of the ports, and manage IMA groups and IMA links, including adding, deleting, modifying, resetting, blocking, and unblocking an IMA group or link. Management of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port management includes the management of ports and aggregation groups. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure port attributes. Create, delete, query, and modify an aggregation group. Activate and deactivate an Ethernet port. Collect real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Configure the PPPoE, DHCP option 82, 802.3ah ETH OAM loopback, and port rate limit functions. Query the attributes of optical transceivers for Ethernet optical ports.
Connection management includes the management of service virtual ports and CESoP connections. Service Virtual Port Management A service virtual port enables user equipment to access the OLT. The service virtual port provides service streams between the user equipment and the OLT for carrying user services. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, modify, activate, and deactivate a service virtual port. Collect the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Perform ATM ping tests. Configure the extended attributes of a service virtual port. Extended attributes allow for greater flexibility of addressing customer requirements. Extended attributes include the maximum number of learnable MAC addresses, the PPPoE session, the encapsulation type, and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be bound. Configure the connection attributes of a service virtual port, including the alias, VPI/VCI, transmit traffic profile, and receive traffic profile. Shift the VLAN ID of a service virtual port to change the VLAN ID of the service virtual port. After successful shifting, the service port assumes the new VLAN ID. Bind IP addresses to a service virtual port and query the bound IP addresses. To specify that only the users with certain IP addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source IP address of user packets. If the source IP address does not match any of the IP addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access. Bind static MAC addresses to a service virtual port. To specify that only the users with certain static MAC addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source MAC address of user packets. If the source MAC address does not match any of the MAC addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access.
l l l
13-4
Management of CESoP Connection Management The circuit emulation service over packet (CESoP) simulates circuit emulation services over packets. After the CESoP connection is set up and the required service stream is created, the communication over the CESoP E1 line is successful.
Layer 2 Management
Layer 2 management includes the management of the VLAN, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP), and Rapid Ring Protection Protocol (RRPP). VLAN Service Management VLAN service management includes the management of the standard VLAN, MUX VLAN, smart VLAN, and super VLAN. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a VLAN. Collect the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Clear the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Manage a Layer 3 interface and its subinterfaces.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
13-5
Layer 3 Management
MPLS PWE3 Management The MPLS is a transmission technology. It implements transparent transmission of data packets between users. The MPLS tunnel is defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent of a service, an MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries service-related PWs. You can perform the following operations on the MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure the basic attributes of the MPLS. Configure the MPLS tunnel of the static unicast type. Create forward MPLS tunnels. Create an E-LSP. Manage PWs. Manage tunnel tags and PW labels.

13-6
User Security and System Security

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure user access in PITP mode. Configure user access in DHCP option 82 mode. Configure user access control. Configure system secure access. Manage BFD sessions.


Protection group management involves the protection switchover and protection group. Protection switchover: Important board resources and port resources are generally backed up to enhance system reliability. If a fault occurs on a working member, protection switchover will be triggered to transfer services to the protection member that will continue to handle the services.
Protection group: You can manage the working member and the protection member in the protection group. In a protection group, you can manage the relationship between the members involved in the protection switchover, record the status of members, and manage the configuration data and status that are involved by the protection relationship between the members. With the protection group feature, you can protect the following objects on the U2000: l l l l l Active and standby control boards Aggregation groups on active control board and standby control board Ports on active and standby control boards Upstream Ethernet ports Upstream aggregation links of Ethernet ports

xDSL service management includes the management of the asymmetrical digital subscriber loop (ADSL), ADSL2+, ATM global single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (G.SHDSL), and very high speed digital subscriber lines 2 (VDSL2) services. The features of these services are as follows: ADSL Service Management ADSL is a technology for providing the asymmetric and high-speed private line access service over common twisted pairs. ADSL supports the asymmetrical transmission in the upstream and downstream directions, which is suitable for the user data access service and can provide highspeed data transmission channels for users. ADSL2+ is an extension of the ADSL technology. It supports a maximum transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and 2.5 Mbit/s in the downstream and upstream respectively and a maximum transmission distance of 6.5 km. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize the port. Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line template, alarm template, extended template, and monitoring thresholds. These attributes are used to activate the ADSL port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.
G.SHDSL Service Management G.SHDSL is a technology for providing a high-rate symmetrical data service over one or two twisted pairs. The 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL access services are supported to allow for a transmission distance ranging from 3 km to 6 km. The rates of the 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL lines range from 192 kbit/s to 5696 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s to 4608 kbit/ s, 576 kbit/s to 17088 kbit/s, and 768 kbit/s to 22784 kbit/s respectively. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Bind and unbind a port. You can bind multiple ATM G.SHDSL ports. This increases the bandwidth at the physical layer and improves the rate of the ATM G.SHDSL port.
13-8
l l
Configure port attributes, such as the associated line profile and alarm profile. These attributes are used to activate the ATM G.SHDSL port. Query the real-time performance statistics.
VDSL2 service Management VDSL2 is an extension of the VDSL technology. It provides high-speed private line access in the symmetrical or asymmetrical mode over common twisted pairs. VDSL2 supports a high bandwidth with symmetric rates of up to 100 Mbit/s and multiple spectrum template and encapsulation modes. Based on these features, it provides short-distance and high-speed access solutions to the next generation broadband access scenarios. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize a port. Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line profile, alarm profile, extended profile, and monitoring thresholds of a VDSL2 port. These attributes are used to activate the VDSL2 port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.

Multicast is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication mode in which the source sends information to a specified subset of objects under a network node. Multicast services are applicable to the streaming media, distance learning, video conferencing, video on demand (VOD), network gaming, data replication, and other P2MP transmission. Multicast communication uses a class D IP address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address. A source host sends out a packet that uses a class D IP address as the destination. If other hosts in the network are interested in the multicast packet, these hosts can send a request to join the multicast group and receive the packet. The hosts outside of the group cannot receive the packets sent by the source host. In controllable multicast, network equipment determines whether a user has the rights to watch programs by identifying the join or request packets of the user. Then, the access device controls and forwards the multicast services accordingly. There are two multicast modes: l l IGMP snooping: IGMP snooping is a multicast control mechanism at the data link layer. It is used to manage and control multicast services. IGMP proxy: In a tree topology, the OLT does not set up routes for forwarding multicast packets; the OLT only relays and forwards multicast protocol packets. To multicast users, the OLT is a multicast router that implements the router functions defined in the IGMP protocol. To multicast routers, the OLT is a multicast user. Manage multicast users. Manage multicast VLANs. Manage the virtual upstream ports of multicast services. Manage multicast subtending ports.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
MG Management
In the next generation network (NGN), the media gateway (MG) and the media gateway controller (MGC) are separated. That is, the functions of the user plane are separated from the functions of the control plane. The messages of the user plane interact with each other by using the MG and the messages of the control plane interact with each other by using the MGC. An MG device consists of the MG, MGC, digital signal processor (DSP) management, and ringing mapping. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Manage MGs. Manage MGCs. Manage ringing mapping. Manage DSP channels.
SG Management
Signaling gateway (SG) management includes the management of signaling gateways and associations. An SG is a part for signaling interaction. AN SG is a signaling proxy for receiving and transmitting signaling messages between the No.7 signaling network and the IP network. An SCTP association provides data transmission for the transfer of the protocol data unit of one or more ports.
Narrowband VoIP Service Management

Narrowband VoIP service management includes the management of the MG, SG, POTS ports, and IP ports. VoIP PSTN Port Management The public switched telephone network (PSTN) is a communication network that provides telephone services for public users over analog subscriber lines. It is also called plain old telephone service (POTS). Voice over IP (VoIP) is a communication mode for delivery of voice and data over Internet Protocol (IP) networks. In the VoIP technology, voice information is transmitted in digital form in discrete packets rather than through the traditional circuit-oriented protocols of PSTN. The VoIP PSTN service is provided through the VoIP PSTN ports on the voice service board of an ONU. A gateway is established on the ONU between the PSTN network and the IP network. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Reset a port. Collect the real-time performance statistics.
VoIP ISDN BRA Port Management ISDN basic rate access (BRA) is the basic rate interface (BRI) and user-network interface provided by the ONU. The BRI supports a transmission rate of 44 kbit/s and provides 2 B channels for carrying services and 1 D channel for transmitting the call control signaling and maintaining the management signaling. The rate of B channels is 64 kbit/s and the rate of D channel is 16 kbit/s. In the upstream direction, the ONU transmits the ISDN service to the NGN
network in IP networking mode. The ISDN service is called the VoIP ISDN BRA service. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Activate and deactivate a port. Reset a port. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of VoIP ISDN BRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Collect the real-time performance statistics.
VoIP ISDN PRA Port Management ISDN primary rate access (PRA) is the primary rate interface (PRI) and user-network interface provided by the ONU. The PRI supports a transmission rate of 2.048 Mbit/s and provides 30 B channels and 1 D channel. The rates of the B channel and D channel are 64 kbit/s. In the upstream direction, the ONU transmits the ISDN service to the NGN network in IP networking mode. The ISDN service is called the VoIP ISDN PRA service. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of VoIP ISDN PRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Query the timeslots that are occupied by a specified VoIP ISDN PRA port.
V5 Voice Service Management

V5 voice service management includes the management of V5 interfaces, service ports, semipermanent connections (SPCs), VFB boards, ATI boards, and CDI boards. V5 Interface Management The V5 interface is a standard digital interface between the access network (AN) and the local exchange (LE). The V5 interface supports the access of abundant integrated services. In addition, it separates accesses and services to optimize the network organization. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l l Manage the attributes of V5 interfaces. Restart the PSTN protocol on the V5 interface. Switch over the logical communication channels of a specified V5 interface for protection. Manage 2M links. Manage communication channels. Manage ISDN communication channels. Configure the ringing mode for users.
Service Port Management

Service ports are classified into V5 PSTN ports, V5 ISDN BRA ports, and V5 ISDN PRA ports. You can perform the following operations to manage V5 PSTN ports on the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Reset a port. Collect real-time performance statistics. Configure and modify port attributes. Enable and disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Activate and deactivate a port. Reset a port. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of V5 ISDN BRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Collect real-time performance statistics. Configure and modify port attributes. Enable or disable services. Perform and cancel a loopback. Query the statistics on the usage of MG ports and collect the number of V5 ISDN PRA ports by port status. Configure the alarm threshold of Layer 2 signaling errors. Query the timeslots occupied by a specified V5 ISDN PRA port.
You can perform the following operations to manage V5 ISDN BRA ports on the U2000:
You can perform the following operations to manage V5 ISDN PRA ports on the U2000:
SPC Management SPC can connect, release, check, and protect one or more 64 kbit/s channels of different ports of the same board or different boards. SPCs occupy dedicated and fixed voice channels to meet the communication requirements of special and VIP access subscribers and ensure the communication quality. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Set up common SPCs between narrowband service ports. Set up VoIP-based IP SPCs. Set up internal SPCs. Configure private lines. Set up V5 SPCs. Set up V5 pre-SPCs.
VFB Board Management The UA5000(PVMV1) provides point-to-point voice frequency (VF) channels to transmit voice or data in dedicated networks. You can connect VF telephones or modems (connecting user terminals) to the VF channels at the two sides so that the voice or data is interconnected over dedicated lines. The VFB board of the UA5000(PVMV1) is a 2/4-wire VF dedicated line
interface board and supports the VF dedicated line services. The VFB board provides the function of adjusting the 2/4-wire port through software. It provides sixteen 2-wire port or eight 4-wire ports. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure the attributes of ports provided by the VFB board. Add SPCs.
Certain dedicated networks access LEs or interwork with remote dedicated networks over the access network. In dedicated networks, many users adopt the E&M trunk ports. To access these users over the access network, ONUs must provide the E&M trunk ports. ATI Board Management The ATI board, inserted in a service shelf, transparently transmits E/M signaling and 2-wire/4wire VF signals by using SPCs. This helps the HONET system access certain dedicated networks. The ATI board provides six 2-wire/4-wire E&M trunk ports. Each port provides the 2-wire/4-wire VF line and the 1E1M signaling line. If the 1E1M signaling line is not in use, the 2-wire/4-wire VF line can be used independently to transmit VF signals. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service. Configure the hotline service of E&M trunk ports.
CDI Board Management The CDI board is a 16-channel direct-dialing-in subscriber interface board of the HONET access system, which implements the transparent transmission through analog subscriber ports. The CDI board implements the transparent extension inside the HONET system for the analog subscriber ports of external exchanges by means of digital-to-analog conversion between CDI ports and ASL ports, transparent transmission, and signaling processing of hosts. In addition, as a foreign exchange office (FXO) port, the CDI port works with the foreign exchange subscriber (FXS) port provided by the ASL board to implement the analog access of the POTS users to the LE. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l Configure the Z interface extension service. Configure the PBX bidirectional service. Configure the DDI service.
Narrowband Data Service Management

Narrowband data service management includes the management of multifunctional terminal adapters (MTAs), HSL boards, and TDM G.SHDSL ports. MTA Management The MTA of the UA5000(PVMV1) provides the synchronous port with the rate of 64/128 kbit/ s and the synchronous or asynchronous port with the sub-rate of 2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2 kbit/s. The MTA also provides physical communication channels between terminal users and the DDN network or other digital terminal users. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure the attributes of MTA ports. Add SPCs.
HSL Management The HSL board of the UA5000 (PVMV1) provides two V.35 ports and two FE1 ports to access N x 64k (n ranges from 1 to 31) data services. You can perform the following operations on the U2000:
l l
Configure the attributes of V.35 ports provided by the HSL board. Add SPCs.
TDM G.SHDSL ports The UA5000(PVMV1) uses the SDL board to carry G.SHDSL services. The SDL board accesses the G.SHDSL service of data dedicated line subscribers in TDM mode. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l Configure the TDM G.SHDSL service. Configure the subtend service of the TDM G.SHDSL port.
13-14
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
14 DSLAM Network Feature Management
14
DSLAM Network Feature Management
About This Chapter

This topic describes the functions and features of DSLAM NE management and network management. 14.1 DSLAM Management For NE configuration management, the U2000 provides graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for configuring NEs and maintaining NE configurations. You can configure services for equipment in the GUIs.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
14-1
14.1 DSLAM Management

Device Management
Security Management You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Enable and disable anti-ICMP attack, anti-IP attack, anti-IP spoofing, anti-MAC spoofing, and anti-DoS attack. Set the aging time of a MAC address. Enable and disable MAC address learning. Configure the security attributes for user login in the CLI.
l l l l l
Global Configuration of Services The global configuration of services includes the configuration of the VLAN, QoS, xDSL, and multicast services. Device Template Management Device template management includes the display of different types of device templates on the U2000. Templates include the IGMP template, traffic template, VLAN service template, and PW template. Currently, the U2000 supports only query and generation of global templates.

Network interface management includes the management and maintenance of E1/T1 ports and the Ethernet port. Management and Maintenance of E1/T1 Ports E1/T1 ports are classified into TDM E1/T1 ports, CES E1/T1 ports, and IMA E1/T1 ports. TDM E1/T1 ports can be used as access ports or upstream ports, depending on the functions of boards. On E1 ports for upstream transmission, you can perform only the loopback operation. On E1 ports for PRA access, you can perform the following operations: configure or delete port attributes, set the alarm threshold of L2 signaling bit errors, query timeslots, and enable or disable services. On CES E1/T1 ports, you can collect real-time performance statistics of ports, configure the port attributes, set port alias, and perform loopback.
On IMA E1/T1 ports, you can query real-time performance statistics of the ports, and manage IMA groups and IMA links, including adding, deleting, modifying, resetting, blocking, and unblocking an IMA group or link. Management of Ethernet Ports Ethernet port management includes the management of ports and aggregation groups. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure port attributes. Create, delete, query, and modify an aggregation group. Activate and deactivate an Ethernet port. Collect real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Configure the PPPoE, DHCP option 82, 802.3ah ETH OAM loopback, and port rate limit functions. Query the attributes of optical transceivers for Ethernet optical ports.
ONU connection management includes the management of service virtual ports. Service Virtual Port Management A service virtual port enables user equipment to access the ONU. The service virtual port provides service streams between the user equipment and the ONU for carrying user services. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, modify, activate, and deactivate a service virtual port. Collect the real-time performance statistics and clear the performance statistics. Perform ATM ping tests. Configure the extended attributes of a service virtual port. Extended attributes allow for greater flexibility of addressing customer requirements. Extended attributes include the maximum number of learnable MAC addresses, the PPPoE session, the encapsulation type, and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be bound. Configure the connection attributes of a service virtual port, including the alias, VPI/VCI, transmit traffic profile, and receive traffic profile. Shift the VLAN ID of a service virtual port to change the VLAN ID of the service virtual port. After successful shifting, the service port assumes the new VLAN ID. Bind IP addresses to a service virtual port and query the bound IP addresses. To specify that only the users with certain IP addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source IP address of user packets. If the source IP address does not match any of the IP addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access. Bind static MAC addresses to a service virtual port. To specify that only the users with certain static MAC addresses can access the service virtual port, perform the binding operation. After successful binding, the service forwarding module checks the source MAC address of user packets. If the source MAC address does not match any of the MAC addresses bound to the service virtual port, the user packets are dropped. Otherwise, the user packets are forwarded. This ensures the security of user access.
l l l
14-4
Layer 2 Management
Layer 2 management includes the management of the VLAN, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP), and Rapid Ring Protection Protocol (RRPP). VLAN Service Management VLAN management includes the management of the standard VLAN, MUX VLAN, smart VLAN, and super VLAN. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a VLAN. Collect the real-time performance statistics of a VLAN. Clear the real-time performance statistics on VLANs. Manage a Layer 3 interface and its subinterfaces.
Layer 3 Management
Layer 3 management includes the management of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS)/pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), and Layer 3 routes. DHCP Management
DHCP management includes the management of the DHCP server group, MAC address segment, standard mode, DHCP domain, and VLAN L3 interface. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Query, add, delete, and modify a DHCP server group. Query, add, delete, and modify a MAC address segment. Query, enable, disable, and modify a standard mode. Query, add, delete, and modify a DHCP domain. Modify a VLAN Layer 3 interface.
MPLS PWE3 Management The MPLS is a transmission technology. It implements transparent transmission of data packets between users. The MPLS tunnel is defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent of a service, an MPLS tunnel implements end-to-end transmission and carries service-related PWs. You can perform the following operations on the MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis on the U2000: l l l l l l Configure the basic attributes of the MPLS. Configure the MPLS tunnel of the static unicast type. Create forward MPLS tunnels. Create an E-LSP. Manage PWs. Manage tunnel tags and PW labels.

User Security and System Security

You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l Configure user access in PITP mode. Configure user access in DHCP option 82 mode. Configure user access control. Configure system secure access.
BFD Management
The BFD mechanism is used for quickly checking the link status between two devices. To mitigate the impact of device faults on services and to improve the network availability, a network device needs to quickly detect any fault occurring between the device and its adjacent devices. Actions can then be taken to ensure service continuity. The BFD enables the device to check the connectivity of a type of data protocol of the same trail between two systems. The trail can be a physical or a logical link, including a tunnel. The BFD mechanism is a remedy for the weakness of the existing detection mechanism.


Protection group management involves the protection switchover and protection group. Protection switchover: Important board recourses and port recourses are generally backed up to enhance system reliability. If a fault occurs on a working member, protection switchover will
be triggered to transfer services to the protection member that will continue to handle the services. Protection group: You can manage the working member and the protection member in the protection group. In a protection group, you can manage the relationship between the members involved in the protection switchover, record the status of members, and manage the configuration data and status that are involved by the protection relationship between the members. With the protection group feature, you can protect the following objects on the U2000: l l l l l Active and standby control boards Aggregation groups on active control board and standby control board Ports on active and standby control boards Upstream Ethernet ports Upstream aggregation links of Ethernet ports

xDSL service management includes the management of the asymmetrical digital subscriber loop (ADSL), ADSL2+, ATM global single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (G.SHDSL), and very high speed digital subscriber lines 2 (VDSL2) services. The features of these services are as follows: ADSL Service Management ADSL is a technology for providing the asymmetric and high-speed private line access service over common twisted pairs. ADSL supports the asymmetrical transmission in the upstream and downstream directions, which is suitable for the user data access service and can provide highspeed data transmission channels for users. ADSL2+ is an extension of the ADSL technology. It supports a maximum transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and 2.5 Mbit/s in the downstream and upstream respectively and a maximum transmission distance of 6.5 km. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize the port. Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line template, alarm template, extended template, and monitoring thresholds. These attributes are used to activate the ADSL port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.
G.SHDSL Service Management G.SHDSL is a technology for providing a high-rate symmetrical data service over one or two twisted pairs. The 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL access services are supported to allow for a transmission distance ranging from 3 km to 6 km. The rates of the 2-wire, 4-wire, 6-wire, and 8-wire G.SHDSL lines range from 192 kbit/s to 5696 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s to 4608 kbit/ s, 576 kbit/s to 17088 kbit/s, and 768 kbit/s to 22784 kbit/s respectively. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l
14-8
Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback.

l l l
Bind and unbind a port. You can bind multiple ATM G.SHDSL ports. This increases the bandwidth at the physical layer and improves the rate of the ATM G.SHDSL port. Configure port attributes, such as the associated line profile and alarm profile. These attributes are used to activate the ATM G.SHDSL port. Query the real-time performance statistics.
VDSL2 Service Management VDSL2 is an extension of the VDSL technology. It provides high-speed private line access in the symmetrical or asymmetrical mode over common twisted pairs. VDSL2 supports a high bandwidth with symmetric rates of up to 100 Mbit/s and multiple spectrum template and encapsulation modes. Based on these features, it provides short-distance and high-speed access solutions to the next generation broadband access scenarios. You can perform the following operations on the U2000: l l l l l Activate and deactivate a port. Perform and cancel a loopback. Deactivate a port and then activate it again to initialize a port. Reconfigure port attributes. Configure the port attributes, such as the associated line profile, alarm profile, extended profile, and monitoring thresholds of a VDSL2 port. These attributes are used to activate the VDSL2 port. Query the real-time and history performance statistics.

Multicast is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) communication mode in which the source sends information to a specified subset of objects under a network node. Multicast services are applicable to the streaming media, distance learning, video conferencing, video on demand (VOD), network gaming, data replication, and other P2MP transmission. Multicast communication uses a class D IP address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address. A source host sends out a packet that uses a class D IP address as the destination. If other hosts in the network are interested in the multicast packet, these hosts can send a request to join the multicast group and receive the packet. The hosts outside of the group cannot receive the packets sent by the source host. In controllable multicast, network equipment determines whether a user has the rights to watch programs by identifying the join or request packets of the user. Then, the access device controls and forwards the multicast services accordingly. There are two multicast modes: l l IGMP snooping: IGMP snooping is a multicast control mechanism at the data link layer. It is used to manage and control multicast services. IGMP proxy: In a tree topology, the OLT does not set up routes for forwarding multicast packets; the OLT only relays and forwards multicast protocol packets. To multicast users, the OLT is a multicast router that implements the router functions defined in the IGMP protocol. To multicast routers, the OLT is a multicast user.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 to manage multicast services: l l
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Manage multicast users. Manage multicast VLANs.

l l
Manage the virtual upstream ports of multicast services. Manage multicast subtending ports.
14-10
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
15 Reliability
15
About This Chapter
15.2 Reliability Indicator This topic describes the indicators of the reliability design.
Reliability
Reliability design assures that measures are taken to prevent potential risks so that the product can work in a safer manner. 15.1 Reliability Design This topic describes the reliability design of the U2000. The reliability design of the U2000 ensures hardware reliability, software reliability, and system security and reliability.
15.3 HA System The high availability (HA) system helps you improve the running reliability of the U2000 server. 15.4 DCN Protection You can use a data communication network (DCN) to connect the U2000 to a standby gateway NE (GNE). This improves the reliability of the communication connection between the U2000 and equipment. 15.5 Disk Mirroring The disk mirroring function helps to improve the reliability of disk data on the U2000 server. 15.6 Data Backup The data backup function helps to improve the reliability of important U2000 data.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
15-1
15 Reliability
15.1 Reliability Design

This topic describes the reliability design of the U2000. The reliability design of the U2000 ensures hardware reliability, software reliability, and system security and reliability.
Hardware Reliability
U2000Hardware reliability is improved by disk redundancy, equipment redundancy, and HA system. l l l Disk redundancy: The U2000 supports disk redundancy. For example, RAID1, RAID10, hot standby, or disk array can be used for different hardware platforms. Equipment redundancy: During network deployment, the U2000 improves reliability by means of redundant equipment such as switches and NICs. HA system: For details, see 15.3 HA System.
Software Reliability
Software reliability mechanism of the U2000 enables the U2000 to withstand software failures such as software application failure or database damage. The U2000 supports the automatic protection mechanism so that it can monitor and check the running status of its processes. When the U2000 detects that a process stops abnormally or is faulty, it records system logs. Then, the system restarts the process automatically and ensures that the process runs in the normal state. The system can also generate an alarm that urges a user to manually resolve the problem. In the case of an HA system, when the active server is faulty (for example, software applications fail or the database quits unexpectedly), switchover is performed between the active server and the standby server and the standby server starts to monitor networks. Periodic and effective backup of the U2000 data ensures that the system runs stably and recovers promptly from faults. The U2000 provides various data backup methods. For details, see 15.6 Data Backup.
System Security and Reliability

System security and reliability involve the following aspects: l l l OS enhancement: The U2000 provides the SetSolaris to enhance the security of Solaris OS. Antivirus scheme: The U2000 uses the OfficeScan of Trend Micro as the antivirus software on Windows OS. Operation security: The U2000 supports user management, right management, user security management, ACL, AAA, and a series of security policies to ensure the security of operations that are performed on the U2000. Communication security and reliability: The U2000 client and server communicate with each other in SSH mode, which ensures security of communication between them. In addition, DCN protection ensures the reliability of communication connections between the U2000 and NEs.
15-2
15 Reliability
15.2 Reliability Indicator

This topic describes the indicators of the reliability design. Table 15-1 lists the reliability indicators of the U2000. Table 15-1 Reliability indicators of the U2000 Item MTBF Indicator The average fault interval is larger than 6 months. The fault is defined as database crash. MTTR The average fault recovery time is no more than 15 minutes. The fault is defined as database crash. HA switching time NMS start time NMS shutdown time 15 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 70% of the management capacity 70% of the management capacity 70% of the management capacity HA system Remarks HA system
15.3 HA System
The high availability (HA) system helps you improve the running reliability of the U2000 server. The non-distributed U2000 server works in 1+1 backup mode. If the active site is faulty, applications on the U2000 are automatically switched to the standby site so that the U2000 application is not interrupted. See Figure 15-1.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
15-3
15 Reliability
Figure 15-1 Switchover between active and standby sites in HA system

Normal Status Real time data replication
Application
When a fault occurs, the NMS application is switched to the standby site.
Applicaton
The protection mechanism of an HA system has two aspects: l l Database synchronization and backup between the active and standby sites Automatic application switchover between the active and standby sites
The U2000 provides the following HA schemes: l HA system (Veritas 1+1 hot standby): Applicable to remote hot standby of the nondistributed system, featuring automatic switching.
15.4 DCN Protection

You can use a data communication network (DCN) to connect the U2000 to a standby gateway NE (GNE). This improves the reliability of the communication connection between the U2000 and equipment. The communication between non-GNEs and the U2000 is forwarded by the GNE. In the U2000, you can set the active GNE and standby GNE for NEs in advance. When the communication between the active GNE and the U2000 is interrupted, the U2000 automatically switches to the standby GNE for communication, so that the communication between the U2000 and NEs is not interrupted. When the communication between the U2000 and the active GNE recovers, the U2000 determines whether to use the active GNE again according to the preset revertive mode.
NOTE
The recommended number of non-gateway NEs (including non-gateway NEs that connects to the GNE by using the extended ECC) that connect to each GNE is fewer than 50. Once the limit is exceeded, the number of GNEs should be increased.
15-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
15 Reliability
15.5 Disk Mirroring

The disk mirroring function helps to improve the reliability of disk data on the U2000 server. If the server has two or more than two hard disks, you can create disk mirroring (RAID 1) when installing the U2000. After you create disk mirroring, if the active disk is damaged, run a command to switch the data to the standby disk, thereby restoring the working data and parameter settings before the active disk is damaged. The RAID 5 and hot spare disk are recommended for the disk array where six hard disks are configured. Specifically, configure RAID 5 by using any four hard disks and use the remaining one as a hot spare disk.
15.6 Data Backup

The data backup function helps to improve the reliability of important U2000 data. The security of network data is a concern of users. Table 15-2 lists the data backup solutions provided by the U2000. Table 15-2 Data backup Data to Be Backed Up Alarm log, abnormal event log, performance log, security log, and operation log Configuration data Solution Dump logs. Operation Perform operations on the U2000 client. For details, see the U2000 Online Help.
Export the configuration data to script files in the MML command format. The script files neglect the structural differences among databases of the U2000 of different versions, and are suitable for data backup in case of version upgrade. The script files supported by the U2000 include network-wide configuration files, U2000 naming file, NE configuration file, NE list files, U2000 computer information files, service implementation configuration files, networklayer information files, and network simulation and planning information files.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
15-5
15 Reliability
Data to Be Backed Up Database
Solution Back up all data in the U2000 database. In general, restoring all data on the database takes less than three hours. The restoration duration is determined by the network size and the bandwidth between the U2000 server and the remote server. Supported backup scenarios are as follows: l OS: Windows, SUSE Linux, or Solaris. l Database: Oracle, Sybase, or SQL Server. l Data backup path: immediate backup to the local, immediate backup to the remote. and scheduled backup to the remote. If the scheduled backup fails, the U2000 reports an alarm. l Source of data to be restored: local restoration or remote restoration.
Operation
NE database
Back up the NE data.
15-6
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
16 Performance Indicators
16
Table 16-1 Performance indicators Item Storage capacity
Performance Indicators
This topic describes the performance indicators of the U2000.
Subitem Capacity of current alarms Capacity of history alarms Capacity of logs, including operation logs and system logs
Indicator Maximum: 100,000 pieces Maximum: 2,000,000 pieces Maximum: 1,000,000 pieces
Resources occupied Processing capability
CPU usage Response speed of handling an alarm
The CPU usage is normally not greater than 10%. The interval from the time at which an alarm is generated on the equipment to the time at which the alarm is displayed on the U2000 is normally not longer than 10 seconds. In the case of 1,000 pieces of performance data, the interval from the time at which they are reported to the U2000 to the time at which they are stored in the database is normally 10 seconds.
Response speed of handling performance data
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
16-1
Item
Subitem Alarm handling capability
Indicator In a normal circumstance, 100 (400 at maximum) pieces of alarms can be handled per second by a full-domain U2000. When managing only access equipment, the U2000 can handle 50 pieces of alarms per second. Maximum: 500 Maximum: 50 Maximum: 100 Maximum: 255 Less than 15 minutes The MTBF is longer than six months. A failure is the situation where the database quits unexpectedly. The MTTR is not longer than 15 minutes. A failure is the situation where the database quits unexpectedly. Maximum: 15,000 Maximum: 20,000 Maximum: 5,000,000 Maximum: 100,000 Not more than 3000 Not more than 50
U2000 user management capability
User User group Object set Operation Set
HA switchover time Stability
Switchover between remote active and standby servers Mean time between failures (MTBF)
Mean time to recovery (MTTR)
Management capability
Number of managed physical nodes Number of managed equivalent NEs
Service capability
VPN access interface Number of tunnels
HWECC/IP over DCC networking capacity
Number of manageable GNEs Number of manageable NEs for a GNE
Table 16-2 DCN bandwidth requirements Item Bandwidth required for the communication between a U2000 client and the U2000 server Bandwidth 2 Mbit/s
16-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Item Bandwidth required for the communication between N Equivalent NEs and the U2000 server
Bandwidth A bandwidth of 2 Mbit/s may not meet the bandwidth requirements in different networks. In this case, you can set the CIR or PIR by using the following formula: CIR: l N > 56: 2048 kbit/s + (N - 56) x 0.5 kbit/ s l N <= 56: 2 Mbit/s PIR: l N > 56: 10240 kbit/s + (N - 56) x 5 kbit/s l N <= 56: 10 Mbit/s
Bandwidth required for the communication between an OSS and the U2000 server Bandwidth required for the communication between the primary and secondary sites in an HA system (Veritas hot standby)
2 Mbit/s
NOTE A minimum of 2 Mbit/s is required.
2 Mbit/s
NOTE A minimum of 2 Mbit/s is required. A bandwidth of 2 Mbit/s is enough if you do not synchronize all performance data by using PMS. If you want to synchronize the performance data, more bandwidth is required.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
16-3
17 Management Capability
17
About This Chapter
l
Management Capability
Management capability refers to the capability of the NMS to manage network resources, which are expressed in the number of equivalent NEs. The key technical specifications include the number of equivalent NEs, number of clients, and number of physical NEs.The management capability of the U2000 in a network that consists of different types of NEs is affected by the following factors: The management capability refers to the maximum number of equivalent NEs that can be managed by the U2000 on certain hardware configuration conditions. The management capability depends on the hardware and varies with the hardware configuration. If a client also runs on the computer where the server is running, the management capability is reduced by 50%. Hence, it is recommended that you run the client and server on different computers. The system limits the number of physical nodes. Hence, the number of physical nodes is a restriction for the management capability. Virtual NEs are not included in the management capability. A pre-configured NE is equal to a real NE. One third-party NE is equal to one equivalent NE. The equivalent coefficient of the OEM equipment is calculated in the way similar to Huawei equipment.
l l
17.1 NE Equivalent Coefficient The NE equivalent coefficient is the ratio of the resources used by physical NEs or ports to the resources used by equivalent NEs. 17.2 Management Capabilities of the U2000 on Different Hardware Platforms This topic describes the management capabilities of the U2000 on different hardware platforms. 17.3 Manageable Equipment This topic describes the equipment that can be managed by the U2000.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-1
17.1 NE Equivalent Coefficient

The NE equivalent coefficient is the ratio of the resources used by physical NEs or ports to the resources used by equivalent NEs.
Equivalent NE and Equivalent Coefficient

l Equivalent NE: The functional features, cross-connect capacity, and number of cards, ports, or channels are specific to NEs of different types. As these NEs require different resources of the NMS, the number of NEs that can be managed by the NMS depends on the NE types. For easy description and calculation of the management capability, the concept of equivalent NE is defined so that NEs of different types or a number of ports can be converted to equivalent NEs by a uniform criteria according to the system resources required by them. The system resources required by an equivalent NE is equal to the resources for managing an STM-1 transport NE. Equivalent coefficient: Equivalent coefficient = (Resources used by physical NEs or ports)/ (Resources used by equivalent NEs)
Currently, a set of U2000 can manage a maximum of 15,000 physical NEs, 15,000 equivalent NEs, and 100 clients. This conclusion is drawn after the tests under a certain environment and objectively reflects the actual management capability of the U2000. The management scales of the U2000 are defined as follows: l l l Small-scale network: 2,000 equivalent NEs of the U2000 Medium-scale network: 6,000 equivalent NEs of the U2000 Large-scale network: 15,000 equivalent NEs of the U2000
NOTE
It is recommended that you enable no more than 100,000 performance collection instances at the same time to ensure the running efficiency of the U2000.
Calculating the Number of Equivalent NEs

Generally, the number of equivalent NEs that the U2000 can manage is calculated according to the following rules: l l The basic unit of an equivalent NE of the U2000 is OptiX Metro 1000. Number of equivalent NEs = <Number of equivalent NEs in the transport domain> + <Number of equivalent NEs in the IP domain> + <Number of equivalent NEs in the access domain> The comparison coefficient of an equivalent NE of the U2000 to the equivalent NE in each domain is as follows: 1 equivalent NE in the transport domain = 1 equivalent NE of the U2000 4 equivalent nodes in the IP domain = 1 equivalent NE of the U2000 3.3 equivalent nodes in the access domain = 1 equivalent NE of the U2000
NOTE
The preceding rules are not fixed. For more details, see the Management Capability Instructions.
17.1.1 Equivalent NEs in the Transport Domain <Number of equivalent NEs in the transport domain> = (Number of transport NEs of type_I x Equivalent coefficient + ... + (Number of transport NEs of type_n x Equivalent coefficient)
17.1.2 Equivalent NEs in the IP Domain <Number of equivalent NEs in the IP domain> = (Number of IP NEs of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of IP NEs of type_n x Equivalent coefficient) 17.1.3 Equivalent NEs in the Access Domain <Number of equivalent NEs in the access domain> = Number of FTTx OLT equivalent NEs + Number of FTTx MDU equivalent NEs + Number of MSAN equivalent NEs + Number of DSLAM equivalent NEs + Number of equivalent NEs of other access equipment
17.1.1 Equivalent NEs in the Transport Domain

<Number of equivalent NEs in the transport domain> = (Number of transport NEs of type_I x Equivalent coefficient + ... + (Number of transport NEs of type_n x Equivalent coefficient)
NOTE
For example, there are 5 OptiX OSN 9500 (equivalent coefficient: 10), 10 OptiX OSN 7500 (equivalent coefficient: 6.5), and 100 OptiX OSN 3500 (equivalent coefficient: 4.5). Then, you can calculate the number of equivalent NEs in the transport domain as follows: Number of equivalent NEs in the transport domain = 5 x 10 + 10 x 6.5 + 100 x 4.5 = 565
The management capability of the U2000 varies with OptiX NE Equivalents, as shown in Table 17-1. Table 17-1 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different OptiX NE Equivalents NE Series OSN series NE Type OptiX OSN 500 OptiX OSN 1500 Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 1 3.5 (With ASON) 2.5 (Without ASON) OptiX OSN 2000 OptiX OSN 2500 2 4.5 (With ASON) 3.5 (Without ASON) OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 3500 3.5 (Without ASON) 6.5 (With ASON) 4.5 (Without ASON) OptiX OSN 7500 10 (With ASON) 6.5 (Without ASON) OptiX OSN 9500 15 (With ASON) 10 (Without ASON) MSTP series OptiX Metro 100 OptiX Metro 200 OptiX Metro 500 0.5 0.5 1
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-3
NE Series
NE Type OptiX 155/622H (Metro 1000) OptiX Metro 1000V3 OptiX Metro 1050 OptiX Metro 1100 OptiX 155/622 (Metro 2050) OptiX 2500+(Metro 3000) OptiX Metro 3100 OptiX 10G (Metro 5000)
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 2 3 1.5 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 +1.5 *N (N refers to the number of slave shelves) 1 1.5 1 1
SDH series
OptiX 155C OptiX 155S OptiX 155/622B_I OptiX 155/622B_II OptiX 2500 OptiX 2500 REG
Metro WDM series
OptiX Metro 6020 OptiX Metro 6040 OptiX Metro 6040V2 OptiX Metro 6100 OptiX Metro 6100V1 OptiX Metro 6100V1E OptiX OSN 900A
LH WDM series
OptiX BWS OAS, OptiX BWS OCS, OptiX BWS OIS OptiX BWS 320GV3 OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA OptiX OTU40000
Marine series
OptiX BWS 1600S OptiX PFE 1670 OptiX SLM 1630
17-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
NE Series NG WDM series
NE Type OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OSN 3800
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 1 3.5 (With ASON) 1.5 (Without ASON)
OptiX OSN 6800
4+4*N (With ASON) 2+2*N (Without ASON) N refers to the number of slave shelves
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
NA WDM series
OptiX BWS 1600A OptiX BWS 1600(NA) OptiX OSN 1800(NA) OptiX OSN 3800A
1.5 1.5 1 3.5 (With ASON) 1.5 (Without ASON)
OptiX OSN 6800A
OptiX OSN 8800 T32(NA)
OptiX OSN 8800 T64(NA)
RTN series
OptiX RTN 605 OptiX RTN 610 OptiX RTN 620
0.4 0.4 0.5
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-5
NE Series
NE Type OptiX RTN 910 OptiX RTN 950 OptiX RTN 5000S
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 0.5 1 1
17.1.2 Equivalent NEs in the IP Domain

<Number of equivalent NEs in the IP domain> = (Number of IP NEs of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of IP NEs of type_n x Equivalent coefficient)
NOTE
For example, there are 5 NE5000E (equivalent coefficient: 10), 200 S5300 (equivalent coefficient: 1.25), and 1000 CX200 (equivalent coefficient: 0.625). Then, you can calculate the number of equivalent NEs in the IP domain as follows: Number of equivalent NEs in the IP domain = 5 x 10 + 200 x 1.25 + 1000 x 0.625 = 925
The management capability of the U2000 varies with IP NE Equivalents, as shown in Table 17-2. Table 17-2 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different IP NE Equivalents NE Series Router NE Type NE05/NE08(E)/NE16(E) NE20/NE20E NE40/NE80 NE40E-X3 NE40E-4 NE40E-X8 NE40E-8 NE40E-X16 NE40E-16 NE5000E R-series router AR-series router Security equipment for load balancing and blocking
17-6
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 0.75 1.25 5 1.25 1.25 2.5 2.5 5 5 10*N (N: number of chassis) 1 0.25 10 10
SSP NSE
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
NE Series Switch
NE Type S2000 series S2300 series S2700 series S3000 series S3300 series S3700 series S5000 series S5300 series S5700 series S6500 series S7800 series S8016 series S8500 series S9303 series S9306 series S9312 series
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 0.125 0.625 0.625 0.125 0.75 0.75 0.25 1.25 1.25 0.75 1.25 1.25 1.25 2.0 3.5 6.0 2.5 4.5 4.0 0.5 0.5 1 0.625 1.25 0.5 1 1.25 1.25 2.5
PTN series
OptiX PTN 1900 OptiX PTN 3900 OptiX PTN3900-8 OptiX PTN 912 OptiX PTN 910 OptiX PTN 950
MAN service platform
CX200 series CX300 series CX600-X1 CX600-X2 CX600-X3 CX600-4 CX600-X8
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-7
NE Series
NE Type CX600-8 CX600-X16 CX600-16
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 2.5 5 5 0.5 0.25 0.75 3 6 4 8 4 2 3 6 4 8 0.75 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Firewall
Eudomen 300/500/1000 Eudomen 200E series Eudomen 1000E series Eudomen 8040 Eudomen 8080 Eudomen 8080E Eudomen 8160E
USG
USG9110 USG9120 USG9210 USG9220 USG9310 USG9320 USG5000 series USG3030 USG3040 USG2100 series USG2200 series USG50
SRG
SRG1200 SRG20-10 SRG20-11 SRG20-12 SRG20-15 SRG20-20 SRG20-21
17-8
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
NE Series
NE Type SRG20-30 SRG20-31 SRG20-31-D
Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 0.25 0.25 0.25 4 8 4 0.25 1.5 10 10 0.25 0.25
SIG
SIG9810 SIG9820 SIG9800 Server
SVN Broadband access
SVN3000 MA5200E/F series MA5200G series ME60 series
Voice gateway WLAN AP
VG1040/1041 series AP
17.1.3 Equivalent NEs in the Access Domain

<Number of equivalent NEs in the access domain> = Number of FTTx OLT equivalent NEs + Number of FTTx MDU equivalent NEs + Number of MSAN equivalent NEs + Number of DSLAM equivalent NEs + Number of equivalent NEs of other access equipment
NOTE
l Number of FTTx OLT equivalent NEs = (Number of ONTs x Equivalent coefficient) + (Number of MDUs x Equivalent coefficient) + (Number of P2P ports x Equivalent coefficient) l Number of FTTx MDU equivalent NEs = (Number of ports of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of ports of type n x Equivalent coefficient) l Number of MSAN equivalent NEs = (Number of ports of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of ports of type n x Equivalent coefficient) l Number of DSLAM equivalent NEs = (Number of ports of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of ports of type_n x Equivalent coefficient) l Number of equivalent NEs of other access equipment = (Number of NEs of type_I x Equivalent coefficient) + ... + (Number of NEs of type_n x Equivalent coefficient)
The management capability of the U2000 varies with access NE Equivalents, as shown in Table 17-3.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-9
Table 17-3 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different access NE Equivalents Class FTTx OLT (calculation based on the managed ONT, MDU, and P2P resources in the case of OLT) FTTx MDU (calculation based on the managed user ports in the case of MDU) MSAN (calculation based on the number of managed ports) Type ONT MDU P2P port Equivalent Coefficient for the U2000 1/64 1/32 1/64
xDSL port E1 port ETH port PSTN/ISDN/HSL port xDSL port E1 port ETH port PSTN/ISDN/HSL port
1/128 1/128 1/128 1/160 1/128 1/128 1/128 1/160 1/128 1/128 1/128 1.5 18 18 18 3
DSLAM (calculation xDSL port based on the number E1 port of managed ports) ETH port Other NEs (calculation based on the NE types) MD5500 8850 8825 8750 MA5200V1R2/R9
17.2 Management Capabilities of the U2000 on Different Hardware Platforms

This topic describes the management capabilities of the U2000 on different hardware platforms. Table 17-4 lists the management capabilities of the Table 17-4 on different hardware platforms.
17-10
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Table 17-4 Management capabilities of the U2000 on different hardware platforms Server Short Name of Computer Managem ent Capability Number of Clients Support Unified Network Manageme nt Number of Physical NEs
Mainstream Server to Be Delivered with the U2000 V100R002C01 T5220-4C*1.2 G-16G T5220-8C*1.4 G-32G M4000-4P*2. 53G-32G Array: 6*300G Array PC Server HP DL380G6-2P *2.0G-8G HP DL580G5-4P *2.13G-16G 2000 32 Yes 2000 6000 15000 32 64 100 No Yes Yes
Sun Server
6000
64
Yes
Compatible Server (Reuse) SUN Server M4000-2P*2. 15G-16G SUN V890-4P*1.5 G-16G SUN V890-2P*1.5 G-8G SUN V445-4P*1.6 GHz-8G SUN E2900-8P*1.5 GHz-32G SUN E2900-12P*1. 5GHz-48G Fujitsu Server PW650-4P*1. 8GHz-16G 6000 3000 64 48 No No
1500
32
No
Maximum number of physical NEs: 15000 Maximum number of SDH paths: 300000 Maximum number of WDM paths: 50000
1500
32
No
5000
80
Yes
5000
100
Yes
2000
48
No
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-11
Server
Short Name of Computer
Managem ent Capability
Number of Clients
Support Unified Network Manageme nt No No
Number of Physical NEs
PW650-2P*1. 8GHz-8G PC Server IBM X3650-2P*2.0 G-8G IBM X3850M2-4P *2.13G-16G
1500 2000
32 32
6000
64
No
Compatible Server for the Single-Domain Upgrade The servers are applicable to only the single-domain upgrade instead of the cross-domain management in centralized manner. For example, if the T2000 is installed on SUN V490, the T2000 can be directly upgraded to the U2000, but the U2000 cannot have the management functions of the IP and access domains in this case. SUN Server SUN Netra240-2P* 1.5GHz-2G 600 16 No SUN Netra240 does not support the management of PTN devices. If T2000 is installed on Netra240, after upgraded to the U2000, the U2000 cannot have the management functions of the PTN devices. If must to manage the PTN devices, the Netra240 must be changed.
17-12
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Server
Number of Clients
Support Unified Network Manageme nt No
SUN V490-2P*1.6 GHz-4G SUN V440-2P*1.6 GHz-4G SUN V240-2P*1.5 GHz-4G SUN V245-2P*1.5 GHz-4G PC Server IBM X3500-2P*2.0 G-4G IBM X3200-1P*2.4 G-2G HP ML350-2P*2. 0G-4G HP ML110-1P*2. 4G-2G HP ML570-4P*2. 0G-4G DELL R900-4P*2.13 G-4G DELL PE6800-4P*2. 0G-4G DELL PE2900-2P*2. 0G-4G
800
24
800
24
No
600
16
No
600
16
No
2000
64
No
600
14
No
2000
64
No
600
24
No
2000
48
No
2000
48
No
2000
48
No
1500
32
No
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-13
Server
Number of Clients
Support Unified Network Manageme nt No
DELL PE840-1P*2.4 G-2G HP DL380G5-2P *2.0G-8G HP DL580G5-4P *2.13G-16G IBM X3650-2P*2.0 G-8G IBM X3850M2-4P *2.13G-16G
600
24
6000
64
No
10000
100
No
6000
64
No
10000
100
No
17.3 Manageable Equipment

This topic describes the equipment that can be managed by the U2000. 17.3.1 Manageable MSTP Series Equipment 17.3.2 Manageable WDM Series Equipment 17.3.3 Manageable NA WDM Series Equipment 17.3.4 Manageable Submarine Line Equipment 17.3.5 Manageable RTN Series Equipment 17.3.6 Manageable PTN Series Equipment 17.3.7 Manageable FTTx Series Equipment 17.3.8 Manageable MSAN Series Equipment 17.3.9 Manageable DSLAM Series Equipment 17.3.10 Manageable Router Series Equipment 17.3.11 Manageable Switch Series Equipment 17.3.12 Manageable Metro Service Platform Equipment 17.3.13 Manageable Broadband Access Series Equipment 17.3.14 Manageable VoIP Gateway Equipment
17.3.15 Manageable WLAN Series equipment 17.3.16 Manageable Firewall Series Equipment 17.3.17 Manageable DPI Equipment 17.3.18 Manageable SVN Series Equipment Manageable SVN series equipment are listed as follows: 17.3.19 Manageable OP-Bypass Equipment Manageable OP-Bypass equipment are listed as follows:
17.3.1 Manageable MSTP Series Equipment

Manageable MSTP series equipment is listed as follows: Table 17-5 Manageable MSTP series equipment Category SDH series Equipment OptiX 155C OptiX 155S OptiX 1556/622B_I OptiX 1556/622B_II OptiX 2500 OptiX 2500 REG MSTP series OptiX Metro 100 OptiX Metro 200 OptiX Metro 500 OptiX 155/622H (Metro 1000) OptiX Metro 1000 Description OptiX 155C SDH transmission unit for the access network OptiX 155S simplified STM-1 optical transmission system OptiX 155/622B STM-1/STM-4 compatible optical transmission system (19-inch rack) OptiX 2500 STM-4/STM-16 compatible optical transmission system OptiX 2500 REG STM-16 regenerator OptiX Metro 100 terminal STM-1 optical transmission system OptiX Metro 200 ultra compact STM-1 optical transmission system OptiX Metro 500 ultra compact STM-1 multi-service transmission system OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/ STM-4 MSTP OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/ STM-4 MSTP optical transmission system V3 series OptiX Metro 1050 compact STM-1/ STM-4 multi-service optical transmission system
OptiX Metro 1050
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-15
Category
Equipment OptiX Metro 1100
Description OptiX Metro 1100 compact container STM-16 multi-service transmission system OptiX 155/622(Metro2050) STM-1/ STM-4 compatible optical transmission system OptiX 2500+(Metro3000) STM-16 MADM/MSTP optical transmission system OptiX Metro 3100 STM-16 multiservice transmission system OptiX 10G(Metro5000)STM-64 MADM optical transmission system OptiX OSN 500 STM-1/STM-4 multiservice CPE optical transmission system OptiX OSN 1500 intelligent optical transmission system OptiX OSN 2000 enhanced STM-1/ STM-4 multi-service optical transmission system OptiX OSN 2500 intelligent optical transmission system OptiX OSN 2500 REG STM-16 regenerator OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system OptiX OSN 7500 intelligent optical switching system OptiX OSN 9500 intelligent optical switching system
OptiX 155/622 (Metro 2050) OptiX 2500+ (Metro 3000) OptiX Metro 3100 OptiX 10G (Metro 5000) OSN series OptiX OSN 500 OptiX OSN 1500 OptiX OSN 2000
OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500 II OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX OSN 9500
17.3.2 Manageable WDM Series Equipment

Manageable WDM series equipment is listed as follows:
17-16
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Table 17-6 Manageable WDM equipment Category Metro WDM series Equipment OptiX Metro 6020 Description OptiX Metro 6020 compact container CWDM system V100R001 OptiX Metro 6040 compact container WDM system V100R001 OptiX Metro 6040 compact container DWDM system V200R001 or higher OptiX Metro 6100 DWDM multi-service transmission system V100R002 OptiX Metro 6100 DWDM multi-service transmission system V100R003 OptiX Metro 6100 WDM multi-service transmission system V100R004 or higher OptiX OSN 900A compact WDM system (A Type) OptiX BWS 320G backbone DWDM optical transmission system V300R002 OptiX BWS 320G backbone DWDM optical transmission system V300R004 OptiX BWS 1600G backbone DWDM optical transmission system V100R003 or higher OptiX BWS 1600S submarine line terminal equipment OptiX OTU 40000 backbone DWDM optical transmission system OptiX OSN 1800 compact multi-service edge optical transport platform
OptiX Metro 6040
OptiX Metro 6040 V2
OptiX Metro 6100
OptiX Metro 6100V1
OptiX Metro 6100 V1E
OptiX OSN 900A LH WDM series OptiX BWS 320G
OptiX BWS 320G V3
OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX BWS 1600G OLA
OptiX BWS 1600S
OptiX OTU40000
NG WDM series
OptiX OSN 1800
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-17
Category
Equipment OptiX OSN 3800
Description OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 6800 intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 8800 T32 intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 8800 T64 intelligent optical transport platform
OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64
NOTE
The OptiX BWS 1600G OLA is an independent power supply subrack. It is supported by the OptiX BWS 1600G backbone DWDM optical transmission system V100R004 and higher versions.
17.3.3 Manageable NA WDM Series Equipment

Manageable NA WDM series equipment is listed as follows: Table 17-7 Manageable NA WDM equipment Category LH WDM series Equipment OptiX BWS 1600A Description OptiX BWS 1600A WDM Optical Transmission System OptiX BWS 1600G(NA) Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System OptiX OSN 1800(NA)
OptiX BWS 1600G(NA)
NG WDM series
OptiX OSN 1800(NA) compact intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 3800A compact intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 6800A intelligent optical transport platform OptiX OSN 8800 I/II(NA) intelligent optical transport platform
OptiX OSN 3800A
OptiX OSN 6800A
OptiX OSN 8800 I/II(NA)
17-18
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17.3.4 Manageable Submarine Line Equipment

Manageable submarine line equipment is listed as follows: Table 17-8 Manageable submarine line equipment Category Submarine line series Equipment OptiX SLM 1630 OptiX PFE 1670 OptiX BWS 1600S Description OptiX SLM 1630 submarine line monitor OptiX PFE 1670 Power Feeding Equipment OptiX BWS 1600S submarine line terminal equipment
17.3.5 Manageable RTN Series Equipment

Manageable RTN series equipment is listed as follows: Table 17-9 Manageable RTN equipment Category RTN series Equipment OptiX RTN 605 OptiX RTN 610 OptiX RTN 620 OptiX RTN 910 OptiX RTN 950 OptiX RTN 5000S Description OptiX RTN 605 radio transmission system OptiX RTN 610 radio transmission system OptiX RTN 620 radio transmission system OptiX RTN 910 radio transmission system OptiX RTN 950 radio transmission system OptiX RTN 5000S radio transmission system
17.3.6 Manageable PTN Series Equipment

Manageable PTN series equipment is listed as follows:
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-19
Table 17-10 Manageable PTN series equipment Category PTN series Equipment OptiX PTN 1900 Description OptiX PTN 1900 multiservice packet transmission platform OptiX PTN 3900 multiservice packet transmission platform OptiX PTN 3900-8 multiservice packet transmission platform OptiX PTN 912 multiservice packet transmission platform OptiX PTN 910 multiservice packet transmission platform OptiX PTN 950 multiservice packet transmission platform
OptiX PTN 3900
OptiX PTN 3900-8
OptiX PTN 912
OptiX PTN 910
OptiX PTN 950
17.3.7 Manageable FTTx Series Equipment

Manageable FTTx series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-11 Manageable FTTx series equipment Category Equipment MA5600T MA5603T MA5680T OLT series MA5683T MA5606T Description SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5603T Optical Access Equipment SmartAX MA5680T Optical Access Equipment SmartAX MA5683T Optical Access Equipment SmartAX MA5606T Optical Access Equipment, Only the version of V800R105 support. SmartAX MA5603U Multi-service Access Module
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
MA5603U
17-20
Category
Equipment MA5606T MA5620 MA5626 MA5628 MA5620E MA5626E MA5620G MA5626G
Description SmartAX MA5606T Optical Access Equipment SmartAX MA5620 Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5626 Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5628 Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5620E EPON Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5626E EPON Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5620G GPON Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5626G GPON Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5610 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5612 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5616 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5651 Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5651G Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5652G GPON Multiple Dwelling Unit SmartAX MA5635 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5662 Multi-Service Access Module SRG2220 Service Router Gateway 17-21
MDU series
MA5610 MA5612 MA5616 MA5651 MA5651G MA5652G MA5635 MA5662 SRG2220 EchoLife:OT550
ONT series
EchoLife:HG850 EchoLife:HG850a EchoLife:HG851
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Category
Equipment EchoLife:HG852 EchoLife:HG853 EchoLife OT925 SmartAX OT928 EchoLife:HG810 EchoLife:HG811 EchoLife:HG813 EchoLife:HG860 EchoLife:HG861 EchoLife:HG863 EchoLife:HG865 EchoLife:HG810a EchoLife:HG866 EchoLife:HG866e U5KG 810e 813e 850e 925e U5KE HG8240 HG8245 HG8247
Description -
17.3.8 Manageable MSAN Series Equipment

Manageable MSAN series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-12 Manageable MSAN series equipment Category UA5000 series
17-22
Equipment UA5000
Description UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Category
Equipment UA5000(PVU) UA5000(IPMB) UA5000(PVMV1)
Description UA5000 Universal Access Unit UA5000 Universal Access Unit UA5000 Universal Access Unit MD5500 Multi-service Distribution Module
MD5500 series
MD5500
17.3.9 Manageable DSLAM Series Equipment

Manageable DSLAM series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-13 Manageable DSLAM series equipment Category Equipment MA5100V2 MA5100 series MA5105 MA5300 MA5600V3 MA5605 MA5615 MA5600T MA5603T MA5606T Description SmartAX MA5100 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5300 Broadband Access System SmartAX MA5600 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5605 Multi-service Access Module SmartAX MA5615 Broadband Access System SmartAX MA5600T Multiservice Access Module SmartAX MA5603T Multiservice Access Module SmartAX MA5606T Multiservice Access Module
MA5300 series
MA5600 series
MA5600V8 series
17.3.10 Manageable Router Series Equipment

Manageable router series equipment are listed as follows:
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-23
Table 17-14 Manageable router series equipment Category NE series routers Device NE05 NE08 NE16 NE08E NE16E NE20 NE20E NE40 NE80 NE40E/NE80E NE5000E R/AR series routers R series routers AR18 AR28 AR46 AR19 AR29 AR49 Description Net engine 05 router Net engine 08 router Net engine 16 router Net engine 08E router Net engine 16E router Net engine 20 router Net engine 20E router Net engine 40 universal switching router Net engine 80 universal switching router Net engine 40E/80E core router Net engine 5000E core router R series routers Advanced router 18 serials router Advanced router 28 serials router Advanced router 46 serials router Advanced router 19 serials router Advanced router 29 serials router Advanced router 49 serials router
17.3.11 Manageable Switch Series Equipment

Manageable switch series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-15 Manageable switch series equipment Category S8500 series switches Device S8505 S8505E S8508 Description Quidway S8505 Series Routing Switches Quidway S8505E Series Routing Switches Quidway S8508 Series Routing Switches
17-24
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Category
Device S8512
Description Quidway S8512 Series Routing Switches Quidway S7800 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S6502 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S6502 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S6506R Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S6506 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S5000 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S5500 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S5600 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S3000 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S3500 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S3900 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S2000 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S2400 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S2300 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S2700 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S3300 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S3700 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S5300 Series Ethernet Switches
S7800 series switches S6500 series switches
S7800 S6502 S6503 S6506R S6506
S5000 series switches
S50 series switches S55 series switches S56 series switches
S30 series switches S35 series switches S39 series switches
S20 series switches S24 series switches
box series switches
S2300 S2700 S3300 S3700 S5300
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-25
Category
Device S5700
Description Quidway S5700 Series Ethernet Switches Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
frame series switches
S9300
17.3.12 Manageable Metro Service Platform Equipment

Manageable Metro service platform equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-16 Manageable Metro service platform equipment Category CX series devices Device CX200 CX200C CX200D CX300 CX380 CX600 Description CX200 Metro Services Platform CX200C Metro Services Platform CX200D Metro Services Platform CX300 Metro Services Platform CX380 Metro Services Platform CX600 Metro Services Platform
17.3.13 Manageable Broadband Access Series Equipment

Manageable broadband access series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-17 Manageable broadband access series equipment Category Multi-service gateways Device MA5200E MA5200F MA5200G ME60 series Description Multiservice access 5200E service gateway Multiservice access 5200F service gateway Multiservice access 5200G service gateway Multiservice engine 60 serials service gateway
17.3.14 Manageable VoIP Gateway Equipment

Manageable VoIP gateway equipment are listed as follows:
17-26
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Table 17-18 Manageable VoIP gateway equipment Category VoIP Gateway Device VG10 VG20 VG80 XE series Description VoIP gateways 10 VoIP gateways 20 VoIP gateways 80 -
17.3.15 Manageable WLAN Series equipment

Manageable WLAN Series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-19 Manageable WLAN series equipment Category WLAN Device WA10 AP WA12 AP Description WLAN 10 WLAN 12
17.3.16 Manageable Firewall Series Equipment

Manageable firewall series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-20 Manageable firewall series equipment Category Eudemon Device E8080E E8160E NE40E-FW NE80E-FW E8040 E8080 E1000E U2 E1000E U3 E1000E U5 E1000E U6 Eudemon1000E-D
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Description Eudemon 8000E series Firewall Eudemon 8000E series Firewall Eudemon 8000E series Firewall Eudemon 8000E series Firewall Eudemon 8000 series Firewall Eudemon 8000 series Firewall Eudemon 1000E series Firewall Eudemon 1000E series Firewall Eudemon 1000E series Firewall Eudemon 1000E series Firewall Eudemon 1000E series Firewall
17-27
Category
Device Eudemon1000E-I E300 E500 E1000 E200 E100E E200S
Description Eudemon 1000E series Firewall Eudemon 300 series Firewall Eudemon 500 series Firewall Eudemon 1000 series Firewall Eudemon 200 series Firewall Eudemon E100E series Firewall Eudemon E200S series Firewall USG9300 Unified Security Gateway USG9300 Unified Security Gateway USG9200 Unified Security Gateway USG9200 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG5000 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway
USG
USG9310 USG9320 USG9210 USG9220 USG5320 USG5330 USG5350 USG5360 USG5310 USG5300ADD USG5300ADI USG2130 USG2130W USG2160 USG2160W E200E-B USG2160 USG2160W USG2160BSR USG2160BSR-W USG2130BSR USG2130BSR-W USG2120BSR
17-28
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Category
Device USG2160HSR USG2160HSR-W USG2130HSR USG2130HSR-W Eudemon200E-B Eudemon200E-BW USG2130HSR-P USG2130HSR-WP USG2160HSR-P USG2160HSR-WP USG2110-F USG2110-F-W USG2110-A-W USG2110-A-GW-W USG2110-A-GW-C USG2110-A-GW-T USG50 USG2110 USG2210 USG2220 USG2230 USG2250 USG2250-D USG2205BSR USG2220BSR USG2220BSR-D E200E_C E200E_F E200E-F-D USG2220BSR
Description USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG50 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2100 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway E200E Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
17-29
Category
Device USG2205BSR USG2220HSR USG2205HSR USG5150 USG5120 USG5150BSR USG5120BSR USG5150HSR USG5120HSR USG2205HSR USG2220HSR-D USG2220TSM USG2250TSM USG5120-D USG5120BSR-D USG3040 USG3030
Description USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG2200 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG5100 Unified Security Gateway USG3040 Unified Security Gateway USG3030 Unified Security Gateway SRG2200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG2200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG2200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG3200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG3200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG3200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG3200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG3200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway
SRG
SRG2220 SRG2220-D SRG2210 SRG3230 SRG3240 SRG3240-D SRG3250 SRG3260 SRG20-20 SRG20-21 SRG20-30 SRG20-31 SRG20-31-D
17-30
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Category
Device SRG2220 SRG2220-D SRG20-10 SRG1210 SRG1210W SRG1220 SRG1220W SRG1210-S SRG1210-S SRG20-11 SRG20-12 SRG20-15 SRG20-15W SRG20-12W
Description SRG2200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG2200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG1200 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway SRG20 Secure Routing Gateway EGW2100 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2100 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2100 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2100 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW3200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW3200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW3200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW3200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW3200 series Enterprise Gateway EGW2100 series Enterprise Gateway
EGW
EGW2160 EGW2160W EGW2130 EGW2130W EGW2220 EGW2220-D EGW2210 EGW3260 EGW3250 EGW3240 EGW3240-D EGW3230 EGW2112GW
17.3.17 Manageable DPI Equipment

Manageable DPI equipment are listed as follows:
Table 17-21 Manageable DPI equipment Category SIG Device SIG9810 SIG9820 NE40E-DPI NE80E-DPI SIG Server DPI Server RADIUS Server URL Classify Server Description SIG9810 DPI Equipment SIG9820 DPI Equipment NE40E-DPI DPI Equipment NE80E-DPI DPI Equipment SIG DPI Equipment DPI DPI Equipment RADIUS DPI Equipment URL Classify DPI Equipment
17.3.18 Manageable SVN Series Equipment

Manageable SVN series equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-22 Manageable SVN series equipment Category SVN Device SVN3000 Description SVN3000
17.3.19 Manageable OP-Bypass Equipment

Manageable OP-Bypass equipment are listed as follows: Table 17-23 Manageable OP-Bypass equipment Category OP-Bypass Device OP-Bypass Description OP-Bypass
17-32
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
18 Standards Compliance
18
l l l RFC 793 Telnet/TCP/IP standards
Standards Compliance
This topic describes the standards that the U2000 is compliant with. The U2000 is developed according to the network management system model that the ITU-T TMN series standards define. The information model is constructed based on the object-oriented concept. Complying with multiple standards, the U2000 has good expandability and reusability. The U2000 complies with the following international standards and protocols: RFC 1155, RFC 1157, RFC 1212, RFC 1213 and RFC 1215 SNMP V1 series standards RFC 1905, RFC 1906, RFC 1907, RFC 1908, RFC 2011, RFC 2012, RFC 2013, RFC 2571, RFC 2572, RFC 2573, RFC 2574, RFC 2576, RFC 2578, RFC 2579, and RFC 2580 SNMP V2 series standards RFC 3411, RFC 3412, RFC 3413, RFC 3414, RFC 3415, RFC 3416, RFC 3417, and RFC 3418 SNMP V3 series standards RFC 3164 Syslog standards ISO 8824 and ISO 8825 ASN.1 standards ITU-T standards for managing the telecommunications management network: M.3000, M. 3010, M.3020, M.3100, and M.3400 (without accounting) HTTP and JAVA interface protocols and standards W3C SOAP 1.1/WSDL TL1 (Telcordia GR-811, GR-831, etc.) The XML service delivery and inventory query are based on the MTOSI standards as follows: TMF 518, TMF 612, and TMF 864 CORBA 2.5 protocol ISO 8824 and ISO 8825 ASN.1 standards The CORBA alarm northbound interface complies with the MTNM standards as follows: TMF 513, TMF 608, and TMF 814
l l l l l l l l l l l
Table 18-1 lists the details of the standards and protocols.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
18-1
Table 18-1 Details of the Standards and Protocols Standards and Protocols RFC 793 RFC 1155 RFC 1212 RFC 1213 RFC 1215 RFC 1905 RFC 1906 RFC 1907 RFC 1908 RFC 2011 RFC 2012 RFC 2013 RFC 2571 RFC 2572 RFC 2573 RFC 2574 RFC 2576 RFC 2578 RFC 2579 RFC 2580
Description Transmission Control Protocol (Darpa Internet Program Protocol Specification) Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP/IP-based Internets Concise MIB Definitions Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based Internets: MIB-II A Convention for Defining Traps for use with the SNMP Protocol Operations for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol Transport Mappings for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internet-standard Network Management Framework SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 An Architecture for Describing SNMP Management Frameworks Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Applications User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internetstandard Network Management Framework Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2) Textual Conventions for SMIv2 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
18-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Standards and Protocols RFC 3411 RFC 3412 RFC 3413 RFC 3414 RFC 3415 RFC 3416 RFC 3417 RFC 3418 RFC 3164 ISO 8824-4-200 0 ISO 8825-2-199 8 ITU-T M. 3000 ITU-T M. 3010 ITU-T M. 3013 ITU-T M. 3017 ITU-T M. 3020 ITU-T M. 3100 ITU-T M. 3101
Description An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3) View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) BSD syslog Protocol Information Technology - Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Parameterization of ASN.1 Specifications Amendment 1: ASN.1 semantic model Information Technology - ASN.1 Encoding Rules: Specification of Packed Encoding Rules (PER) Second Edition; Technical Corrigendum 1: 12/15/1999; Amendment 1: 12/01/2000 Overview of TMN recommendations Principles for a telecommunications management network Considerations for a telecommunications management network Framework for the integrated management of hybrid circuit/packet networks TMN interface specification methodology Generic network information model Managed Object Conformance statements for the generic network information model
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
18-3
Standards and Protocols ITU-T M. 3180 ITU-T M. 3200 ITU-T M. 3300 ITU-T M. 3400 ITU-T X. 720 ITU-T X. 721 ITU-T X. 722 ITU-T X. 733 ITU-T X. 903 ITU-T G. 707 ITU-T G. 773 ITU-T G. 774 (01, 02, 03, 04) ITU-T G. 783 ITU-T G. 784 ITU-T G. 803 ITU-T G. 831 ITU-T G. 851.1 ITU-T G. 852.1
18-4
Description Catalogue of TMN management information TMN management services and telecommunications managed areas: overview TMN F interface requirements TMN management functions Management information model Definition of management information Guidelines for the definition of managed objects Information technology - Open Systems Interconnection - Systems Management: alarm reporting function Information technology - Open distributed processing - Reference Model: architecture Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) - Management information model for the network element view Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of the transport network - Application of the RM-ODP framework Enterprise viewpoint for simple subnetwork connection management
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Standards and Protocols ITU-T G. 852.2 ITU-T G. 852.3 ITU-T G. 852.6 ITU-T G. 853.1 ITU-T G. 853.2 ITU-T G. 853.3 ITU-T G. 853.6 ITU-T G. 854.1 ITU-T G. 854.3 ITU-T G. 854.6 Rational Unified Process 5.5 Sif99025 TMF513 V2.0 TMF608 V2.0 TMF814 V2.0 TMF814 V2.0
Description Enterprise viewpoint description of transport network resource model Enterprise viewpoint for topology management Enterprise viewpoint for trail management Common elements of the information viewpoint for the management of a transport network Subnetwork connection management information viewpoint Information viewpoint for topology management Information viewpoint for trail management Computational interfaces for basic transport network model Computational viewpoint for topology management Computational viewpoint for trail management Rational Unified Process
EML-NML interface models Multi-Technology Network Management Business Agreement NML-EML Interface Version 2.0 Multi-Technology Network Management Information Agreement NML-EML Interface Version 2.0 Multi Technology Network Management Solution Set Conformance Document Version 2.0 Multi Technology Network Management Solution Set Conformance Document Version 2.0
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
18-5
A Glossary and Abbreviations
A
A
Abnormal Resource AIS insertion
Glossary and Abbreviations
When the NMS carries out the operation of device resource polling on the device management module or the module is refreshed manually, the physical resources of some devices, such as the card, sub-card and port, cannot be accessed because they have been deleted or have some faults. So, after the NMS carries out the operation of device resource polling on the device management module or the module is refreshed manually again, the result of polling the physical resources differ from the first time. The physical resources that cannot be polled in the second time are called the abnormal resource. If there are excessive errors in a channel, AIS can be inserted in this channel to indicate it is unavailable. For a line board, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For a tributary board at the E1 or T1 level, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For a tributary board at the E3 level or higher, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3 byte. Alarm Indication Signal. A signal sent downstream in a digital network if an upstream failure has been detected and persists for a certain time. In the case alarm2 is raised within five seconds after alarm1 is raised, and alarm2 complies with the conditions defined in the alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either suppress the alarm2 or raise its severity level according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule. Such a process is called alarm correlation analysis. Alarm level is to identify the severity of an alarm or event. It is divided up into four levels: critical, major, minor, warning alarm. Device reports the trap information to NMS. NMS displays the received information on the alarm start on the topological view. The alarm state contains four types: urgent alarm, important alarm, subordinate alarm and prompt alarm.
AIS Alarm correlation analysis
Alarm Level Alarm Status
Auto Discovery
NMS tests the remote device by using PING or the SNMP parameter module configured in advanced to discover the IP device or the device that supports SNMP and to add the discovered devices automatically.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
A-1
Alarm reversion
For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. According to ITU-T recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning. The suppressed alarm of a specific object is not reported. The object here may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event.
Alarm severity Alarm suppression
Alarm
ATM protection group An ATM protection group refers to the logically bound ATM VP network or subnetwork connections that share the same physical transmission channel. In the VP group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working connection and its protection connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching (as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer. ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown. ALS is turned on when the optical interface board does not carry services or the optical fibre is faulty. Its service life can be prolonged by decreasing the duration during which laser is on. Property of an object. When the active board or path fails, the standby one can automatically take over the job of the active one.
Attribute Automatic switching
B
Band Width Baseline In the data communication area, bandwidth specifies the maximum value of the rate when the data passes through some data channel. Select the test result when the line is in good condition as the line test baseline, to provide a basis of comparison and analysis for the following line test result.
Baseline collection test One of the test types for submarine line. In the case of deployment or fault restoration, or when updating the baseline is required, you need to collect the baseline, to provide reference for comparison tests, and alerts or alarms. Binding In virtual concatenated payload configuration, designating one binding number to identify the VC4s of the same virtual concatenated payload is called "bind". If a fault occurs to one of the bound services, all bound services will switch as a whole. When the bit error reaches a specific limit, the equipment will report an alarm. This limit is the bit error alarm threshold. The threshold can be divided into crossing threshold and defect threshold.
Bit error alarm threshold
C
Comparison test in periodic mode One of the test types for submarine line. Carry out polling tests for multiple lines on the same LMU board periodically, compare the test result with the baseline data in in-service mode, and provide alerts or alarms for the line.
A-2
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
Comparison test in single-test mode Check alarms
One of the test types for submarine line. Test a line by using test parameters of the baseline collection test in in-service mode, compare the test result with the baseline data, and provide alerts or alarms for the line. The check feature compares one (or more) uncleared alarm on the NMS with that on the NE. If an alarm is included in the current alarms on the NE, it is kept on the NMS. If not, it will be removed from the NMS. A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a network that can send instructions to a server and get results through a user interface. See also server. The Clock View provides a visible platform to enable:1. NE clock settings2. Networkwide clock synchronisation status query3. Clock tracing and search functions The data that configures the NE hardware for coordination between this NE and other NEs in the entire network and operation of specified services. Configuration data is the instruction file of NEs, and it is the key for efficient network running. The typical configuration data includes board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationship. Configuration management enables inventory query of network configuration resources, including relevant configuration of NMS or SNMS, NE, subnet, links, SNC, route, TP, edge point, equipment, and so on. Real-time inventory change report can also be provided through this resource, it will be timely reported to the upper NMS to notify the carrier of the current network operation status and ensure data consistency of the upper NMS or SNMS. To set the basic parameters of an operation object. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs. Alarms that do not clear, or has cleared but is not acknowledged. The performance data stored in the current register is called current performance data. The current 15-minute or 24-hour register (only one for each) is applied to collect the performance data in the current monitoring period. It changed within the monitor period. Change Audit Service is developed to record the change on the network device, including the changes on the information about the device, the configuration and the mapping. It provides one integrated database. Every application program records these changes in the database and ensures that these changes in the database are reflected on other applications. The cluster is an administrative domain composed of a set of switches. It consists of a command switch and multiple member switches. The management over all the switches within the cluster is realized through a public IP address. Text file, including various configuration on the device.
Client Clock View Configuration data
Configuration management
Configure Connection point
Connection
Current alarms Current performance data Change Audit Service
Cluster
Configuration File
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
A-3
D
DCC Within an STM-N signal there are two DCC channels, one is the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel composed of bytes D1-D3, and the other is the 576 kbit/s DCC- channel composed of bytes D4-D12. All NEs can communicate with one another through the DCC-R. The DCC-M is not the regenerator section overhead and does not support communications among regenerators, and it is used to support communication channels of more universal purpose. Dual Node Interconnection. The protection mode defined in G. 842 Recommendation for the inter-ring service . By using the recommended protection modes, the protection of the interconnecting service between two ring networks composed of the devices from different manufacturers and in different protection modes can be realised. Moreover, in case of fibre failure or node failure, services can also be protected. The domain of the NMS specifies the scope of address or functions which are available to a certain user. Dump is a process of exporting alarm data from the database to the customized file and meanwhile the exported data is cleared in the database.
DNI
Domain Dump
E
ECC EMU Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilising a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. Environment Monitoring Unit. As one type of power and environment monitoring unit, EMU is installed on the top of the OptiX 155/622H equipment cabinet to monitor the environment variables, such as the power supply and temperature. With external signal input through the relay, fire alarm, smoke alarm, burglary alarm, and so on can be monitored as well. Displayed on the NMS, the change of environment can be monitored timely and accurately. An aggregate of multiple managed equipment. Equipment set facilitates the user authority management on equipment in the management domain of the NMS. If some operation authorities over one equipment set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation authorities over all equipment of the equipment set are assigned to the user (user group).
Equipment set
F
Failure The fault cause persisted long enough to consider the ability of an item to perform a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as failed; a fault has now been detected. A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This does not include an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions. The filter is used to filter the matched logs and have the unmatched one left. This command performs the ring switch from working channels to the protection channels. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels, unless the protection channels are satisfying a higher priority bridge request.
Fault Filter Forced switch
A-4
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
H
History alarms History performance data Alarms that have cleared and been acknowledged. The performance data stored in the history register and the auto-report performance data stored on the NMS are called history performance data in a unified way.
I
Intermediate office It refers to the equipment used for optical fibre management and dispatch in the metropolitan area. It has multiple pairs of interfaces for the optical fibre connection. Every two interfaces in a pair are connected with each other to form a longer physical optical fibre path. The physical optical fibre path connecting the transmission equipment can comprise two or more sections of optical fibre cascaded via the intermediate office. There is an intermediate office information list for some fibre & cable connections, which shows the section information about the fibre & cable. One of the test modes for submarine line. By using the in-service test mode , you can test submarine cables and repeaters without damaging the existing services of the submarine system. Binary file, equivalent to the OS of the device and a part of the device version. In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the address of the communication port, which consists of four bytes in decimal digits, for example, 129.9.161.55.
In-Service Mode
Image (OS) IP address
J
Jitter This index shows the delay stability of many Ping operations with the unit of ms.
L
Label Layer A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. Local Craft Terminal. The LCT provides the user with single-layer management network solutions to the transmission network of up to five NEs to realise integrated management of multi-service transmission network. Usually it uses the cross-over cable or serial port cable to connect one NE, so as to configure and maintain a single NE. See also U2000 LCT. A permission provided by a vendor to authorise the use of specific functions of a product. Usually the licence consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of licence. The link is responsible to transmit the data from one station to next neighbour station correctly. This function prohibits the users at lower levels from logging in NE and forces logged NE users with lower level to log out.
LCT
Licence
Link Lock NE login
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
A-5
M
Main Topology Management information Manual switch The default NMS client interface and all topology management functions are accessed here. The signal passing across an access point. When the protection channel is efficient and there is no higher-level switching request, this mode switches the service from the working channel to the protection channel, thus testing whether network still has the protection capability. One of the test types for submarine line. You need to set test parameters manually, start the test, and save the test result as the baseline of the in-service mode. Managed Object. The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section. Multiplex Section. A multiplex section is the trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. Multiplex section protection. The nodes online achieve protection switching through the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section, including linear 1+1 MS protection switching link, linear 1:n MS protection switching link, dedicated MS protection ring and shared MS protection ring.
Manual test MO
MS MSP
N
NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a powerdown RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. NE Explorer is the main operation interface of the NMS. For easy navigation, the NE Explorer window presents an expandable directory tree (Function Tree) in the lower left pane. The configuration, management and maintenance of the equipment are accessed here. Network Element. NE includes the hardware unit and the software running on it. Usually, one NE has at least an SCC (system control and communication) board which responsible for the management and monitoring of the NE. The NE software runs on the SCC board. Network Management. In the telecommunication management network structure, the NMS is located between the NE level and network level, which can supports all functions at NE level and part of the network level management functions. See also U2000. Network Node Interface. NNI identifies the interface between the ATM network nodes. See also SDH NNI. Node is one of the topology objects and the minimum unit that represents the device displayed on the topological view. The device is displayed with the node icon on the topological view. The type of the node includes the router, the switch and the 3rd-party device and the virtual node.
NE Explorer
NE
NM
NNI Node
A-6
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
O
Online help Optical time domain reflectormeter An indexed collection of information on all aspects of the NMS. They can be accessed at any time from the Help menu or by pressing the F1 key. OTDR is an optical fault locator and analysis tool for optical fiber networks. The OTDR features a light, compact, hand-held design with an intelligent user interface that is easy and quick to use. The color LCD display and backlight design makes testing work more comfortable and convenient, whether during daylight or at night. One of the test modes for submarine line. By transmitting detection light with high power, the out-of-service test can detect the fiber status and repeater status, to realize the status detection and fault point location after fiber cut. In general, when detecting that a line is abnormal during a test in in-service mode, you can carry out a test in out-of-service mode to locate the fault. Optical Wavelength Shared Protection. OWSP is a bidirectional ring, where each node is equipped with an OWSP. There are two channels (1 and 2) in the main optical path on the internal and external rings in each span on a ring. The fibre and the OWSP on the main optical path are connected with the optical ports inputting 1 and 2 on the mux/ demux board (unnecessary to be connected with the OTU), and thus 1 and 2 can be added and dropped at every node.
Out-of-Service Mode
OWSP
P
Path protection The working principle of path protection: When the system works in path protection mode, the PDH path uses the dual-fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent simultaneously to the east and west lines. Meanwhile, the cross-connect matrix sends the signal dually sent from the opposite end to the tributary board through the active and standby buses, and the hardware of the tributary board will selectively receive the signal from the two groups of buses automatically according to the AIS number of the lower order path. A trail in a path layer. Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register.
Path Performance register
Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way, performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. PMU Private line Procedure Process Protection path One type of power and environment monitoring unit. Both communication parties are connected permanently. A generic term for an action. A generic term for a collection of actions. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
A-7
Protection strategy
In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection strategies can be selected as required. Protection strategy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and sub-network connection protection. The resources that form a protection subnetwork include NEs and fiber cables. The creation of the protection subnetwork actually means that corresponding logical system is configured for each NE by means of creating the protection subnetwork, the optical interfaces (or VC4) of each board are mapped into the logical system, and then these independent logical systems are connected with one another to form a complete network structure. This index shows the packet loss ratio after many Ping operations with the unit of %. The NMS polls the device status and other configuration data periodically and displays the polling results on the topology view. The polling status contains normal, unknown, off-line, light fault, subordinate fault, important fault and urgent fault.
Protection subnet
Packets Loss Ratio Poll Status
R
ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing. ROADM helps you to terminate or pass through any one wavelength at every node without affecting the existing services. At the same time, ROADM can change wavelengths through the NMS remotely, to adjust wavelengths added or dropped in a quick and convenient manner. In addition, ROADM enables power equalization at path level through a built-in power equalization function, and thus adjusts power for pass-through paths in a better way than a band-based dynamic gain equalizer (DGE) does. The IP route selection is in table driving mode. In each host and each router of the Internet, there is a routing table that contains information about how the service is transmitted from the source to the sink, providing a basis for route selection. Ethernet static routing in ET1 refers to the mapping relationship between the Ethernet port and the bound path. Its routing type includes port routing and VLAN routing. Port routing: It means configuring a route between the Ethernet port and the bound path port, which is usually used for point-to-point networking communication; VLAN routing: It means configuring a route between the Ethernet port and the bound path port based on the VLAN service. It can be used flexibly in point-to-point, point-to-multipoint or multipoint-to-multipoint communication. The implementation is to divide and converge the data stream according to the VLAN flag of the packet. As a VLAN flag can be added to the Ethernet port, the equipment can be applied more flexibly. The report that is generated manually in a real-time fashion. RTT is the round trip time, which is the time delay of the ping task.
Route
Report RTT
S
Script file It is the text file describing the physical information and configuration information of the entire network, including the NE configuration file, port naming file, end-to-end configuration file, NE physical view script file, NM information file and service implementation data script file.
A-8
Schedule Task Script SDH NNI
The report on schedule task that is generated at a interval along with the periodical running of the schedule tasks. A list of instructions for performing a specific task or action, written in a scripting language. SDH Network Node Interface. It is applied to build communications connection with the equipment beyond the NMS management area. Usually, the NM creates an SDH NNI by creating a logical system on the port of an idle line board, and the NE must be a TM without protection and fibre connection. A trail in a section layer. Parameters of an operation that can be selected by the user. See Alarm Severity. Also referred to as the network mask off code, it is used to define network segments, so that only the computers in the same network segment can communicate with one another, thus suppressing broadcast storm between different network segments. Subnetwork number is used to differentiate the different network sections in the subnetwork conference. Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number. Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organisation of a network view. The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor. Send the system time of the NMS server to NEs so as to synchronise all NEs with the server.
Section Settings Severity Subnet mask
Subnet number
Subnet
Support Synchronise NE time
T
T2000 The T2000 is a subnetwork management system (SNMS). In the TMN architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and network level, which can supports all function of NE-level and part of the network-level management functions. See also NM. The T2100 is a network level management system for the optical transmission network, and is located in the network management layer (NML) in the telecommunication management network (TMN) architecture. TDA is short for Tone Data Access. For the 2500+ NE equipment, it can be installed with the external TDA board for which the clock source must be set so that the TDA board can switch according to the set clock source sequence when clock source switching occurs. Telecommunications Management Network. The entity which provides the means used to transport and process information related to management functions for the telecommunications network. The NMS topology is a basic component of the man-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnetworks in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status.
T2100
TDA clock source
TMN
Topology
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
A-9
Trail management function
A network level management function of the NMS. Through trail management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralised manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report. A trail is a kind of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signal from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signal. According to the different levels of the trail, the trail includes various types (OTS, OCH, OMS, SPI, RS, MS, VC4 server trail, VC4, VC3 and VC12). Among them, OTS, OCH and OMS represent the trails in a DWDM layer network. For the ADM and TM equipment in the SDH network, each optical fibre connection corresponds to an SPI, RS or MS trail, and a trail is the general name for service carriers, including SDH and PDH services. A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, Outloop and Inloop. The alarm range will be defined after the performance data is collected. The threshold contains the upper and lower one, related with the unit and index.
Trail
Tributary loopback
Threshold
U
U2000 To be oriented to the future network trend, the iManager U2000 that is the unifed network management system (NMS) combines all-IP and FMC, and manages carrier equipment and access equipment in a centralized manner. Unavailable Time. A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds. UNI is the abbreviation for User Network Interface. It identifies the interface between the user and the ATM network node. Services transmitted through an ordinary way, once a failure or interruption occurs, the data cannot be restored for lack of protection mechanism. Report all or part of the configuration data of the NE to the NM and overwrite the configuration data saved in the NE layer on the NM side. User set refers to the set of NMS users with the same management authorities. The default user group includes: system administrator, system maintainer, system operator and system supervisor. The attributes of user set include name and detailed description. The user of the NMS client, and the user and his/her password define the corresponding authority of operation and management of the NMS.
UAT
UNI Unprotected Upload User group
User
V
VC4 loopback The fault of each VC4 path on the optical fibre can be located by setting loopback for each VC4 path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, Outloop, Inloop.
A-10
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
VC4 server trail
The path rate of the VC4 server trail is 150.336Mbit/s. The VC4 server trail provides transparent channels (that is, circuit group) for circuit-layer network nodes (for example, a switch) in a path-layer network, and acts as the basic unit of inter-office communication path. When the VC4 server trail is configured, only the higher order cross-connection of VC4 is generated in the intermediate NE, but no cross-connection is generated at the two ends, that is, no service is added/dropped. Therefore, the VC4 server trail is not a traditional service. It is only the basis for VC3 and VC12 trail creation. The VCI, shorted for Virtual Channel Identifier, occupies 16 bits in both NNI cell or UNI cell. It indicates the virtual channel in the path. The VPI and VCI together indicate a virtual connection. Organize and display rules and filter conditions of the topology data. Customize the view according to requirements of every product and organize the data in the view displayed by the topology module, such as the layer 2 view, VPN view and IP view. By default, the platform provides the physical view. The topology view can be planned according to the domain, maintenance relationship and so on. Edits and displays the rule of the topology data or the filter conditions. It can be tailored according to the requirements
VCI
View
Virtual fibre
A virtual fibre is created between SDH equipment that has WDM equipment in between. From SDH equipment perspective, creation of virtual fibres disassociates its fibre connection with WDM equipment and prevents impact on the auto fibre search function, ensuring independence of SDH trail management.From WDM equipment perspective, its service bearer layer is a virtual fibre instead of a true one after the virtual fibre is created. Deletion of the true fibre does not affect trail management. Like a common NE, a virtual NE is also displayed with an icon on a view, but it is only an NE simulated according to the practical situation, which does not represents an actual NE. Therefore, the actual status of this NE cannot be queried and its alarm status cannot be displayed with colours. Usually, when the trail management function is used for the NEs or sub-networks the NMS cannot manage, or the equipment is interconnected with other vendors NEs for service configuration, the end-to-end service configuration method and the trail management capability are provided. Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One Ethernet port can support 4K VLAN routes, and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN routes. The VPI, shorted for Virtual Path Identifier, occupies 12 bits in the NNI cell, and 8 bits in the UNI cell.
Virtual NE
VLAN ID VPI
W
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection sub-network in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM service Web LCT Working path
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)
The WDM service is accessed at the client side of the OTU board that can access SAN services. In the TMN architecture, the Web LCT is located in the NE management level, which can manage the RTN series and NG WDM series equipment. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labelled working.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-11
WTR time
A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet the restoral threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTR period unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority bridge request. Wavelength Cross-Connection Protection. It is a path protection type for ring networks. In this protection mode, services are switched between the primacy and secondary rings through cross-connection based on the dual fed signal selection principle.
WTR
WXCP
A-12
Issue 05 (2010-11-19)

Huawei

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Huawei

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

About This Document

About This Document

Changes in Issue 05 (2010-11-19)

Changes in Issue 04 (2010-09-24)

Changes in Issue 03 (2010-08-16)

About This Document

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

Changes in Issue 02 (2010-07-30)

Changes in Issue 01 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

4 Networking and Application................................................................................................... 4-1

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

6 MSTP Network Feature Management...................................................................................6-1

7 WDM Network Feature Management....................................................................................7-1

8 RTN Network Feature Management......................................................................................8-1

9 PTN Network Feature Management.......................................................................................9-1

10 Router Feature and Switch Feature Management............................................................10-1

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

11 Feature Management for Security Devices ......................................................................11-1

12 FTTx Network Feature Management.................................................................................12-1

13 MSAN Network Feature Management..............................................................................13-1

14 DSLAM Network Feature Management............................................................................14-1

16 Performance Indicators.........................................................................................................16-1 17 Management Capability.......................................................................................................17-1

18 Standards Compliance..........................................................................................................18-1 A Glossary and Abbreviations..................................................................................................A-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

1 Positioning and Benefits

Positioning and Benefits

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Positioning and Benefits

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

1.1 Network Position

1.1.1 Network Management Trend

1.1.2 Product Orientation

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

1 Positioning and Benefits

Figure 1-1 Position of the U2000 in the TMN hierarchy

1.2 Product Characteristics

Centralized Network Management

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Positioning and Benefits

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

Figure 1-2 Centralized network management

Multiple Operating Systems

Leading Scalable NMS Architecture

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

1 Positioning and Benefits

Cross-Domain E2E Service Provisioning

1 Positioning and Benefits

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System Product Description

1.3 Manageable Equipment